Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
31A-029
c-1 / �z-2—I Page 3� of 37 Inspector(print) Lic# Signature ate Address of Lead Inspection 3.7 "t1 Apt# City E GARAGE 1111E LOCATION! LEAD TYPE CF COMMENTS DELEAO DELEAD SIDE LOCATION/ LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD A SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD C SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOO A Slog #7 L Siding 010 Carer Boar'„s 04 i L Comer Boards Ot�, L A ILowerTnm �� L C LowerT-ft L UpW TMn d j a L Upper Trim 0,0 L Door d�d AIM L Door AN L r- A Door Casing (7a ) AIM L C Casing AIM L Door Jamb AIM L Door Jam ARM L Threshold window SiG ( A/M L Wkxicw SN AiM A: Win AIM L C Win Casing ArM L Win Sash L Win Sash AIM L Foundatio A/M L F ndatlon A M L Comments: Exduded Surfaces:Surfaces listed In this box can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. Excluded Surfaces:Surfaces listed in this box can be made Intact,only by a licensed deleader. SIDE ( LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT OELEAD DELEAO SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT OELEAD OELEAO A (MORE THAN 1440 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD C (MORE THAN 1440 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD A C A C A C SIDE LOCATION! LEAD TYPE OF I COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION/ LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS OELEAO OELEAD B SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD D SURFACE HAZARD I DATE METHOD B Siding 04 1 L D Siding L L9 r.G Comer Boards t L Caner Boards v 1 L B Lower Trim L D Lower Trim ( L Upper Trim L uWarim rd ,� L Doe �,r A/M Door AIM L B Door Casing G r AIM L Coor Casing AIM L Door Jamb ,4 AN L Door AIM L Threshold .�„, AIM L Threshold AIM L Window Sll rS AIM L Window Sill L B Win Casing r A/M L D Win Casing AIM Win Sash rC? A/M L Win Sash L Fo+�> Foundation AIM L Comments: Common Excluded Surface:Surfaces fisted in this box can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. Excluded Surfaces:Surfaces fisted in this box can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD B (MORE THAN 1440 SO.IN.) DATE ME THOO D (MORE THAN 1440 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD B p B D B p Paged'— ofd Inspector(punt) Llc# Signature Date I Address of Lead Inspection x'.11 '" Apt# � City � I� EXTERIOR SIDE LOCATION/ LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SDE LOCATIOW LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD D SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD D SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD Sidirq 1— l Wk4ar SA A/M L Comer 6oar+,.s L (7 1 D Win Ca 1k , ARM L D Lower7rim — L VV S— Window sash L Upper Trim L Window SW Win above 5' L D Win Casing AIM L Porch above 5' L Sash AN L Storm Door AIM L V D C-6 Win Sash �1 rC] ARM L -t D Door ARM L Cal Wm Frame , AIM L Door Jamb ARM L Cellar Win Sill AN L Threshold Alhl L D Sash AN L Kc'S plate ARM L Cel Win Framie, AN L Stcrm Door L Cellar Win SIN ARM L Door . AIM L D Cal win Sash ARM L D Door Casing AIM Cal Win Frame L Door Jamb AIM L Cellar Win SW AIM L Threshold L D Cell ARM L Ki#late ARM L Cel Wn Frame ARM L R AN L Foundation Z. D Cas rq AIM L Ja ARM L Eenca AIM . L _ Th�esh AIM L Shutters AIM L Newel post A/M L D r Casing AIM L ing Cap AIM L s Door Jamb AIM L Handrail ARM L Threshold AIM L �. D Balusters ARM L Window SN AIM L Lcwer Rail L D Win Casing d�: AIM L Treads ARM L Window Sash E ARM L Risers AIM L AIM L Stringer AAM L D W'h Casing w n ARM L COMMENTS: ` EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact oniv by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DEL EAO SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD D (MORE THAN 1440 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD D (MORE THAN 1440 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD D D D D D D 1h t*--,2 /4- - F'cUkjt�3 gl.t7 ` GL 122- 14, Page 3S'"_ of Inspector(print) L.ic# Signature Dat Address of Lead Inspection 5-7 fj tzd tL" APt# Z.kt City ,)0„2`L141 . ,v PORCH SIDE LOCATION/ LEAD( TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION! LEAD TYPE OF ( COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SURFACE HAZARD DAT"c METHOD SURFACE KA DATE MET}i0D L I r _A SuGport CkT= . AIM L Comet Boards „. — L ` "° Newel pQSt � ,Q AIM L L'pPer Trim L ' Railing Cap ! r AN L Handrail r AIM L JGi s.� Bakuters 0,0 AX L Door f t AM L Lower Rag d 4 Ll AIM L Stoc Doea� KM L Traads 6t a, ARC( L Door Casing r 0 AIM L Risers U, AIM L Coor Jamb V4 I A,M S " Threshold I d ,�--I) AJM Wa111 L Kic 4La,e Q AIM L I AIM L Door ro,0 j AN L Law Trim L 1 Door Casing b� AIM L T>fi Door Jamb A/M L Threshold 43 AIM L Kidkptate r) AIM L Window Sill @ t0 AIM L Win Casing 0,L? AIM L CWindow Sash f , A/M L M I' Window Sill 00 AIM L Win Casing okc, AN L J Window Sash AIM L Mill' AIM Window Sill AIM L °`WuI Casing AIM L Window Sash` A/M Mullions WindowSlf-' AIM L Win Casing AIM L Window Sash AIM L MuMOM A/M L COMMENTS: COMMENTS: EXCLUDED SURFACES: Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT 1ELEA0 OELEAD (MORE THAN 1440 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 1440 SO.IN.) DATE . METHOO Page —L Inspector(punt) c.j Lic# Signature. Dafe Address of Lead Inspection �� �� J��, Apt# City /U'R 414,0 EXTERIOR SIDE I LOCATIOW LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATIOW LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD CELEAD C SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD C SURFACE HAZARD DATE (METHOD L WindowSlll AIM L Ccrer Boards L E C ' Casing AJM L C Lower Trim L fr+i' Window Aim Upper Trim F._- . L ,f.�'' � Window Sill L Win above 5' L b. C Win Casi Aim L Pc.--h above 5' - L endow Sash AIM L Stcrn Door rj,,.^n AIM L ` Cellar Win Sill AIM, L Docr fR -, A!M L C &Sash AIM L C Docr Casing AIM L Cal Win Fram A/M L Door Jamb r AIM ILL-'! Cellar Win SIII p M L Threshold j.�:t AIM L C Cal Win Sash AIM`'" L K;ckp late '` AIM L lCel Win Frame AIM Stcrm Door AIM L Cellar Win Sill AIM Cocr AIM L C Cal Win Sash AIM L C Cccr Casing �,j AIM L Cal Win Frame AIM L DocrJamb ti AIM L Cellar Win SIII AIM L Threshold AIM L C Cel W ash AIM L K dcplate t AIM L el Win Frame AIM L `a Door AIM L Foundation C Docr6a4jQ9 AIM L Bulkhead G!� AIM L Docr Jamb v AIM L Fences A/M L Threshold A/M—L Shutters Docr L Newel post 0,G AIM L C Docr Casing AIM L Railing Cap E AIM L no,C mb AIM L Handrail �f, AIM L Threshold AIM L C Balusters D AIM L IWndowSill � 4/M I � Lower Rail �� I M"" I- � C J1Vui Casing ®r a AIM L Treads C-A 6 AIM L Window Sash O,a AIM L Risers �n AIM L Window Silt cp 0 AIM L Sw%fi" .,,o C Win Casing 4 r 8 AIM L Window Sash . "O AIM L COMMENTS: EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD C (MORE THAN 1440 SCI.IN.) DATE METHOD C MORE THAN 1440 SO.IN.) DATE 1Mc-THO0 C C C C C C Y�a� f4 t4Avtij�S .���f�� ' 12.L/f"l Page �� of�- Inspector(print) J Ltc# Signature Date Address of Lead Inspection ?` ter.° '�,R, ) 4 - Apt#' -4 city 1 EXTERIOR SIDE LOCATION( LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAO DELEAD SIDE LOCATION/ LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD B I SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD B SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD Siding L Window Sill AIM L Comer Boards L 8 win Cdsing�t. AIM L B Lower Trim .T L Window Sash A Upper Trim L Window Sill L Win above 5' �—�"' L B Win AIM L Porch above E L Window Sash AIM L Storm Door / AIM L Cs L Door AIM L r� :^�r ;�� B Cel Win Sash V,0 AIM L B Door Casing AIM L Cal Win Frame v Ar`M L Door Jamb �{ AIM L it,s,.,yFA »�t� Ceilar Win SIH AIM L Threshold U AIM L B Cel Y-RrSash, AIM L Kickplata , f A/M L Cal Win Frame L Storm Dw AIM L Cellar Win Sill A/M AIM L B Cal Win Sash AIM L B Door C AIM L Cal Win Frame AIM Door Jamb AIM L Cellar Win Sill L Threshold A/M L B Cal Win Sas AIM L la� L n Frame AIM L Door A/M Foundation. , B Door Casing L Door Jamb AIM L B Fences f�. A/M L Threshold AIM L �- B 10AIM L Newel post AIM L 0asing AIM L Railing Cap AIM L amb AIM L Handrail AIM L old AIM L B Balusters AIM L (Window Sill i� A/M L Lower Rad AIM L r B Win Casirg 8 a AIM L Treads AIM L Window Sash o I A1M L Risers AIM L AiM L Stringer AIM L B win Casing AI wind AIM L COMMENTS: EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT OELEAO DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD OELEAD B (MORE THAN 1440 SQ.IN.) DATE METHOD B (MORE THAN 1440 SQ.IN.) DATE METHOD B B B B B B dat V�� � �C{ .�- $x ` ^7Z Inspector(print) r/F Lic# Srgnature Date Address of Lead Inspecton Apt# ,ray City ,9 � PORCH i`�Lf � ✓ 4� SIC, LOCATION! L.AD TYPE OF Cq� MEFITS EAO DELEAD SIDE LOCATION/_ LEAD TYPE OF CwM=NTS DELEAD DELEAD c I SURFACE t ! HAZARD IDEL DA TE METHOD SURFACE HAZARD DATE Side L ^ Support Ckrm S' D I AIM Comer Beards l Upper Trim L : Rai Aim L CeJLN L /,�""° handrail 3 A/M L CS- Joist L I Bakuters (71,,7 AN LAOr �, I KM L I d r7 (' r`J L.awerRail ,toe f AAA Storm Door I lU I Alhl L Treads I f �a A/M L DcorCasing (,...� A/M L y �` Risers AA,I L r, DOOr Jamb /Q AR.I L - Threshold ' AIM L I ( tow Wab I A1M L Kck�tara di O I AIM L AN L I Low Trim L Storm Doa AIM L Floor k L Door Casing Door Jamb L 7hzshc A/M L late AIM L window Sill d� O AIM L I I Win Casing b�0 L `Nindow Sash p. A/M L mulkms Ndow Sill AIM L Win Cash A/M L Window Sash A/M L I Mull'bru I L Window Sill A/M L,, Win Casing AN L Window Sash A/M Mullions L Window Sill '`AIM L Win Casing AIM L Wind ash AX L I uns AIM L MMENTS: ) r ; COMMENTS: vy EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. S;C'-1 LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELLAO DELEAD (MORE T'riAN 1460 SO.IN1 DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 1440 SO.IN.) DATE METHOO Page of Inspector(print) l.lc# Signature Date/ ,l Address of Lead Inspection w�x.: r� �C'` Apt# City t t EXTERIOR SIDE LOCATIOW LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE I LCCATIOW LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD A SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD A SURFACE I HAZARD DATE (ME HOD S d rig L . W ndow Sly AIM L Comer Boards L A WarGasj{q_. AIM L A LcwerTdm ~"— L v Window Sash Upper Trim Window Sill > E Win above 5' L A WIn Casincy A/h{ L �► Pcr.h above.5' L dow Sash AIM L `* "' I N,,., Cellar Win Sill A.^.:1 L �--` Docr .. Ll AIM L A*'GeLft Sash A/M L A Docr Casing ' AIM L I CeI Win Fame AIM L Coor Jamb r, , A/M L Cellar Win Sill I AIM L Threshold ? Nt A/M L A Cel Win Sash '�.. A/M L Kid;iate ,/ AIM L Cel Win Frame I A1M' L Storm Door AIM L Cellar Win Sill A/M `r AIM L A Cel Win Sash 'M L A Coor-Casng AIM L Cal Win Frame AIM L CocrJamb AIM l Cellar ill AIM L Threshold AIM L A 13,0IrWin Sash ( AIM L Kiczplate L Cal Win Frame AIM L Door A/M L A Foundation AjkF L ! A CocrCasing L N Bul CoorJamb A/M L A Fe Threshold AIM L Coor AIM L N A Coor Using AIM L RaddirrgaC Xr Jamb J'AIM L Handrail Threshold AX L A Balusters A/ht k U-3 Window Sill r A/M L Lower Rai.' A It A Win Casing F,y A/M L Treads A/l41 L Window Sash AIM L Risers AIM �Slll A/M L A Win Casing Win A/M L COMMENTS: 5V A V u� Pt- �ll EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAO SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD A (MORE THAN 1440 SO.IN.) . DATE METHOD A (MORE THAN 1440 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD A A A A A I LA Page i� of c . Inspector(Pint) w Lic ar &gnature Da4e Address of Lead Insp .-tion -7 'TY'« l���E� Aptl# �+�r� Olty �/o�cf'4 Avh� aJ PORCH SIDE I LOCATION! LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELFAD DELEAD SIDE I LOCATION1 M LEAD c OF COMMENTS DELEAD(DELEAD SURFACE, I HAZARD DAi� METH00 SURFACE HAZARD , DATE METHOD L ! r t Support Glrrw 13,Cr Comet5car�s --I L - UpperTrm L I Cr e°'!' }t.r`D Ceil'u�g ----'"I L I ,�; , ? .Hands I .-_�R j�I AIM Jc,ts I ,.—.) L F ,<s ,`_ ? 6alustem 4;,0 All, !L Door I�rC I AIM L I Laver Rail T,q I AJM �'I? ISAG r6ear•—r-` hm "--4, Treac+s Orp AIM CoorCasirg Mr�y( AIM L Rtsem 0 AN L DoorJa.—,,b ,y nL:`I AIM L Thrashed ,. AIM L I Lay Walls AIM L K oc a s I ,C I AIM L Lat ice. 5-o AIM !L Mb AIM L Low Trim L L I AIM L ,Ian I AN L window Sill 0',0 I AN L win Casing o.c I AIM L window sash I 'AIM L, Window Sill I AIM L win Casing AIM L w2 Sash I AIM L Mulkrs AIM L Window Sill L Win Casing � ' Window Sash I AIM L� Mullioru I "" L Window Sill I AIM L Win Casng AIM L Wind ash AIM L ulkas I AIM L .LOMMENTS: COMMENTS: EXCLUDED SURFACES: Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. DELEAD DEL.EAD SIDE OELEAO DEL.EAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAlN7 LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT (MORE THAN 14l0 So.IN.) DATE METHOD( MORE THAN 1440 SO.IN.) DATE Mr I i0D i}'i�l'✓ (h��+r�ld= /`l�h ��2�/d/ Page z of Inspector(print) 1 Lic# Sgnature gate Address of Lead Inspection S"Z (a F f��}a•' �' APt# �j4,,JZ City RDOM - A6g•vvj tr-� SIDE I LOCATION! LAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SID= LOCATION! LEAD Type OF COMI�CNTS DELEAD OELEAD SURFACE I HAZARD DATE IM_-THOD `I SURFACE HAZARD I DATE (METHOD Up wale AIM L r ''.»: 'I Lox W2Ls Base a /C C Win Casing - �t AIM L raic.raa. in Md�AA r'kxx ( AIM L Win Int Sash h1] Alhl .L I ~ CeUing Ito AN. L Extesi�8 m��� Door i L Cs'8 Q�i`. Lo bhp Part Bead hUl L I -----. _ � qI},{ L ,ElindStap�=d- Door Ca-sing 3 j CoorJamb * I AN L I tlin-Ext'Sash 9;� 7bre Wvidcw Sill I Mfl AIM L Coor ; AIM l ,aq7�► � y.J� �Fvn AN L Door Caslrg E, L Win . AIM L Door Jarrb r. A/M L WLnHeader W AIM L ; { L I Int Sbps hN .... Docr I AN L r.•"'' Win Int Sash w Aim Casing " L ExtarV SO I W L Coor Jam AN L I Part Bead I MJ1 L Threshold AIM Blind.stop w L Door °� I W Sash I MI1 L Door Cali I AIM L Closet Door AIM L IDdamb AIM L acing AIM L Threshold A!M L I Ck�et ar AIM L w AIM L Cbset Walls AIM L ZRran CI Baseboard AIM Win casing {� � � L Closet Pole W n H ivU1 Ck set Shelf AIM L +° tnt•Stops M,r4„• E.A.�...�.,.�.* .,. CI Supports '� AIM L Win Int Sash Mll AIM L Ckt 'bor L r�- e zteraa�SU6.� 'bse t Casing L edf 4;Stop. COMMENTS/: v^ '.vac LAJ EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD Page of 3 inspector(print) ] Lic# Signature Date Address of Lead Inspection z" t ;'� '�' Apt# , City 1 ��' I~` '►" _ ROOM lZ, SIDE I LOCATIOW LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATIOW LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAO DELEAD SURFACE HAZARD DA it METHOD SURFACE FlA?ARD GATE METHOD Up walls v AIM L W'ufdcw Sig AUl AAa L {}1 Low wail r; KM L A;X= AX L 11a,41oart3 A/M L Win Casing rn r AAvt L Win Header 7 I W AN L Radate�r—^� ••. A�AL.� .�..�.-�•�• IntSSspa aR,} W AIM L Floor a: A/M L Win Int Sash 10,0 1 W AN L Ceiling ;; AIM L Exterior Sig S W L AIM D= S^0 L I ,1j•y Part Bead Mn L L Door Casing D,71 AM L Blind Snip ,, W. L b CoorJamb 4T A AIM L I Win Ext Sash .fl✓ W L AIAAs Window Sig ( W A/M L 6� ' Door A/M L AX L Casing AIM L Win Case AIM L �, ~ Door AIM L Vin Header AIM L Threshold AIM L Int Stop I MII L Door A/M L Win int Sash M1 KM 1 Door Casing L Exterior SID M/I Door Jamb A .(°�L Part Bead L Threshold A/M L Blind Stop hUi L Door AIM L Door d,ii AIM L Closet Door r;;.s�. A/M .L 0 or Jamb AJM L Cl Casing AIM L c Threshold AIM L ClosetJambx �. AIWA L Windowsill MA AN L CbsetWallsr AjM L Apron �r p AIM L C1 Baseboard :',v A/M L 6,0 0 CS>Vb Win casing 0,1 AIM L Closet Pole Da a ( AIM L Win Header Q W AIM L Closet Shelf �;y AN L Int Strips D,0 Mil A/M . L CI Supports AIM L q > Win Int Sash 0 ,0 Mn AIM L Closet Floor g t o L Exterior Sig r O Mn jCbset CeUfrg L Part Bead W L Blind Stop °;ED Mil L. 1! (.0 , Win Ext Sash f MII L COMMENTS: EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIGE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT OE...AD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE LOOSE PAINT CELEAD I ELE4D (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE ME i HOD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD AC n.Jfl� .►,_1 �_ � t�/�?- t!) J Page of l� Inspec o Uc# Signature Gate Address of Lead Inspection ��! ,�c_ . ';r�„a 4 Apt nom?p. City 1 e y _ F ROOM 1111E LOCATION! LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAO.DELEAD SIDE LCCATIOW l FAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DEL-AO. DELEAO SURFACE },�qRD DATE MLTHCO SURFACE HA?ARD DA i METHOO W A/N L L A'r°" s�r J L asebca^ +� 7� AX L ! t win Cas:ry (' L AN L C7r�OL` W AN L =d ar A/M L !nt StDps !� 7 I 91 AN L rCO Ira �i Y,'i A/M L r,Int Sash y w AIM L i Ceuing I o r n AX L + Exterior Su! AUI Coon Dt p AIM L ( Part 6aadI v? M l L Door Cas ng 0 o AX L BEnd strap �"�� MA L E-vud Door Jamb Z AN L Lrx ` Win—r-t Sash I `-f �{1 L T r, wmcw siu MA AIM L Cxr A/M L + A/M L r ;ng AIM L win Calf ' AM L Door Jamb AN L I W61 Header W/1 AM L TTY%sroVd I AIM L I Int Stops ABM L Door & L ( Win Int Sash � � w Coon Casing L I Exterior ST L CoorJamb AIM L I Part Bead W L Trr° AW `L Bled Sln I MII L ✓Doo�"�`�-�•� AR.t L W-0 7z Sash ( W L Door Casing ,. C'cset Door 0,7-1 A1M L I `� Door b» AIM L Cl Casing Or 4 AIM L hresrAld AIM L Gre ! et Jamb r AIM L W ndcw Sill ' W AIM L Chset Walls P AN L Apron AN L CI Basaboard . '� ( AN L Win casing '�f AIM L C Win He.&Jer (� ,Z, M11 AIM L f.r6 Closet Shelfsv AN L int Stops , W A/M L ,r Psi ..'n CI Supports xq ( AIM L Win Int sash �� Mn AN L Ckmet Floor ' ; L rBLrid rior Slit MA Ckset CeJuig I r 0, L Bud MI! Sbp MA L �•.. t C n I Ext Sash 1,7 w L COMMENTS: I . I EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in ti^ese boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SiCE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DE1.._A0 SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DEt.EAD CELEAD (MORE THAN 28S So.IN.) OATS MMOO (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOC he— i pane of Inspector(phnt) LIc Signature r %Date Address of Lead Inspection r I,r r' ��" Apt Z"�� City VOL ROOM 4 /Q SIDE LOCATIONI I LEAD TYPE OF C0;;1MEN i S I RELEAD I DEIEAD SIDEJ LCCA T ION! LEAD TYPE OF . CO�rIM�NTS DELFAD DEt EAp SURFACE HAZARD DAT: h iH00 SURFACE I }{AZARD I DATE ME i H00 Up w-.lLs 10,0 I . ARd L Wi„,or Sw W AIM L Law Walls 1,6,P Axt L A4XW KM L I . ?asebaa�s 10j?I AN L I I Casn4 I KM L W n er 1.41 A,'M L Int Stops M11 KM L I Floor �} AM L I I Win Int Sash MA AM L L I I Exter or Sig w L I Door L { G a..,* I Part lead ON, L I f tZ Doer Ca--rg I ; AN L I Bland Stop Mn L C Door Jamb 14+ AIM LE * g eEa� win Ell Sash M!1 w nd4 Sig ran AN L Door A/M L Apmn I A1M L Do\casing AM L Win Casing ( my Coor AN L Win Header I MR A L Threshold AM L Int Sups �;111%4 L ' Door I AM L win Int San ( Mn AM L Doer Casing L Exterior SO f MJI L Door Jamb I " AN PartEead M/t L Threshold A L I Elin p i W L Door I AIM L I `\ " in Ext Sash I h41 L Door Casinj AM L I Ctcset Door I�: e AM L �y-CJt3. Door mb ( AN L ( CI Casing fi.,� AM L I Threshold AM L Closet Jamb I AIM Lem WindowSJl I(9, I W AM L I I CloWWalls p,o I AM L Apron Ia AIM L I CI Basebcati AM L Win Casing © AM L C Win Header MA AM L Closet Shelf I.0 "} I I aE y.r AM L Int Stops I(1�� W AN L I Cl Supports IN AM L Win Int Sash W AIM L Closet Floor p t� L Exterior S11 S6 MJ1 CksetCe�uig �r L Par;Bead I S'p M1 L <4M 6 .i O Elind Stop Win Ext Sash. t w L l� COMMENTS: I I EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in tt;ese boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT OELEAD DE7L SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAO DEL.EAD (W)RE THAN 288 SQ.IN.) oA` w `H0o (MORE THAN 288 So.IN.) DATE METHOD Z Page of j inspector(print) LIc# Signature Dat/ /id Address of Lead Inspection ^� `� > I Apt# Z).t City BATHROOM SIDE 1 LCCATIONI I LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAO DELEAD SIDE LOCATION/ LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SURFACE I HAZARD DATE METHOD SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD Up wai s 10 (ol 10(o AIM L Lcw Cab Fram AIM L 1�1, ILCW Walls c J AIM L Door AIM L Baseboew �� AIM L Low Cab y�lalb AIM L 14 Lcw Cab Shly AIM L Ra.w.- t e0�„ Supports AIM L Fbcr •� L Drawers "-,,AIM l Ceili;g lF s� L lclicset Door "NL Coset Casing A/M Door Casing �` AIM L C;awt Jamb 4A L Door Jamb cj,?— AIM L Coset Wafts AIM L esAob� CI Baseboard �/' AIM L Door AIM L 4Ce et Pole AIM L Door asi e t elf A IM L Door Jamb A1M Supports AIM L Id A!M L t Floor L Windcw Sill 10,c I WI AIM L Closet Ceiling L Apron y,n AIM L Win casing 1610 AIM L &„r.Win Header 'p MII AIM L Int Stops 16, 0 W AIM L Win Int Sash ® W AIM L Exerorsill ys MII AJM L Part Bead 10,ol M/I AIM L Win Ext Sash 10,o I MII AIM l Up Cab Frame AIM L Cab Doan Up Cah isrs L Supports AIM L Comments: Comments: EXCLUDED.SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DEL LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT FILET) (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 268 S0.IN.) DATE . METHOD 1✓ 4-4L— l? E-i�-,�e lt�� { f p� .2 9 Page Z� of Inspector(print) ,TLic# Signature 'Date Address o`Lead Inspection i"7�r f. _'��` Apt# I-Aj; City BATHROOM SIDE I LOC.AT IOW LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATIOW LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SJR=ACE HAZARD DATE METHOD SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD Up wale AIM L low Cab Fram AIM L �Ct� Lcw Wall AIM L t5v Ca AIM L aasebcards d AIM L Low Cab fts, AIM .L Low Cab ShNs AIM L --- - - -- Support L Pecr r.0 L Drawers L Ceinng Pro L Closet Door AIM L Door Sn AIM L _ ,, *; Closet Casing AIM L r� Door Casing 01D I A/M L C;set Jamb L j✓ Door Jamb f AIM L {, —ms Closet Walls AIM L aid--�• Cl Baseboard A1M L Corr AIM L Closet Pole A!M L Corr Casing AIM L cIosetP4 A!M L Ccc;Jamb L C Support AIM L ° Th3,e AIM L Closet Floor L Wirr�cw Sill M/f AIM L I Closet Ceiling L Apron !U AIM L Win casing AIM L Win Header Pt MA AIM L In AIM L Win Int Sash r r W AIM L P W iim&Sash . k j W AIM L Frame AIM L Cab Door Up Cab Shlvs AIM Support AIM L Comments: Comments: EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only b a licensed deleader, SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DEL_AC SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT OELEAD DELEAD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD i Page Inspector(print) ljc# Signature [)die Address of Lead Inspection Apt City '��ar�YFQyhr1� q [ V ROOM L . SIDE LOCATIONI LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SiDE LOCATION! LAD TYPE OF CO({M`NTS DELEAD DELEAD SURFACE HAZARD DATE V-7TiCD SURFACE HAZARD DATE ME7HO0 UP walls 6 ,n AM L Window Sill W AIfN L , f, i1 Low Walls 0,o L AX .L . easebcar_s (1 p A!M L W AN L I l Win H er W A V L �--- (nt Stop W AIM L F'aor lot o A/M L Win Int Saah W AIM L AX L i ExtewSW 1,/I L Door 5ra A!M L ;%� Part Bead ( A41 L t� DwrCasing AN L Bend Stop �Vt L DoorJarnb -z'4 AIM L am_ , Win ExtSash M'� L T•hmS ':. window Big + lVl 1�1M L Door a tt� AIM L C`r'y e✓� ( f r Ap= L �f Door Casing t AN L lry�fl Eo�nJ-d Wk Casing AIM L Door Jamb ern AIM L C�v O Wit Header M11 AJM L` Int Stops I W AIM L Door AN L Win Int Sash I M1 ARA �[ ^9 AN L Exterior So W. L Door Jamb AIM L Part Bead Ml1 L Threshold L I. Blind Stop L . Door Win Ezt Sash Mn L Door Casing AIM L closet Door . ' AIM L Door J AIM L Cl Casing AIM L mShold A/M L ClosetJamb AN L Window Sal e .W AIM L &-V 7 Cbs8tW39 ,41M L Apron S�rO AIM L G Q�b ns6 Cl Sayfoald AM L Win casing I� cy AlM L (�� t Pole kV L Win Header ,0 W AIM L lasetShed AIM L intStnPs �,0 hVI AN L ,� C!Supports AIM L 'n-Int Sash W AIM L Ck:et Fbor L Exterior Sig MJI lClaset CeilLv L Part Bead FM F \ Bond Stop k- w Win Ext Sash I Z r f TvVi L COMMENTS: EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only b a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE LOOSE PAINT OELFAD DELEAD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD yt-- �,,,,AJl !�r �t�—V /r 2...:�0 Page ZZ of 3 Inspector(print) Q lic# Signature Date / --__ Address of Lead Inspection - City o ROOM SIDE LOCATION! LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DE's SIDE LOCATION{/ LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DEL"-AD SURFACE HAZARD DATE �V--THCO , . SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD U:walis Q AJM L W'v�dar SJl MA AIM -L Q�` Lew We'a ale A/M L L . 3as2bca�s a A M L f-s e!$Z% �?R Wn AN L r U 1 Wn H W AN L M'1 ,kW L Floor AIM L I Win Int Sash MA AN L Ceui,g AIM L ExbaWS41 INW, L ,r Part bead Ml L Door Casing 7r� AIM L 4-a..Tj rU�j SUM Stop MA [ Door Jamb r 0 AIM L mss", _Nb W n E�!Sash M/! L r°stAd W"irs Sill I W A1M L L..._._.._ LY 13 ' Apron AM C Doa Casir� S r L7 Ant L Cr Win Casing I AX L Coon Janb 3,7 AIM L &--,e 44 Wui Header I 91AX L Int Stops AJM L Coon AIM Lam- If Win Int Sash i 99 AIM L Door Casing I L Exter a Sill W. L Door Jamb AIM L Par Bea . I M/I L T h;2shold ! . AJM L �, (. 8104top . w L . . Door AJM L I n Ext Sash Mll L Dosar Casing AIM L Closet Door . I AIM. L Doer Jamb kM L CI AR.1 L Threshold I KM L ClmetJamb I AIM L window Sill .W AIM L L j5 �� Ckset Walb AIM L Apron Sr D AT L Cram y ^/1? CI Baseboard AN W n asing Rio A/M L Cbsat Po{e 14cw L WnHeader W A/M L � ,� Closet Shelf AIM L Int Staps 5-16 Mil A/M L CI Sup A/M L Win Int Sash ro W A/M L C„-zrp �.a ,�u+} t Floor L E,-L-6or Slll f w Ckset caul q L Part Bead 1`,v7 MJI Blind Stop SU hkf Win ExtSash Mn L COMMENTS: EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be rnade intact only by a licensed deteader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DEL FAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE'LOOSE PAINT DELEAD OELEAD (MORE THAN 258 SO.IN.) DATE MET HCO (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOC ltiNd' y Page �. of'7"Z" y} ' Inspector(punt)'• � Lic# . Signature Date < Address of Lead Insaection t# t, Ap 2....•%..rJ'J City r"�i4�'? ?Z� rt.1 ROOM SIDE I LCCA itN'u' I LEAD( TYPE Or CNh{Eg-,S IDELEA01 DELE ID SIDE I LOCAT10tU LEAD TYPE OF COMb{ENTS DE ETC) DELEAD SURFACE I I HAZARD DATE ILEMOO I( SURFACE HAZARD DATE IMETHOO UpwalLs ARV .AM l 1h'6�dcw$U (��� Mil AN! L pp Il Lcv Wall �d e A M l D � L G r u �—Ir (. - Basebaa�s J " A M L w '� win c ; I " t win Header »'i p MA AN L Int Stc�p ISO 91 A1M L I A Fl= AN L Win Int Sash 0,� MA A1M L CeJirl AJM L ' Extew SW I'' � I MA (� Door ,°l L Cs �, rte Part Bead '�. Cas ng 5 r G Al.l L +f• P, Blind Stop h :v t Doorjamb 3r� L W n Ext Sash �r� Mn L Windt Sill I Mr? AN4 L poor AIM L I AAA 'L �,,•^`01 ng AIM L Win Casit°>g�y AM L D=iamb ( AX L ' Wh i Header MI! AM L Threshold A�?A L I Int Sbps I MA L Door I I Arh''r.l 'ffut Int Sash w 901V Door CasLN I. AIM L i E Tw—Sm L. Door Jamb I A/M d (I .,� Part Bead I W L 4' Threshold .. L I °` Blnd Step i` MA . L. Doer I AIM L. ``� Sash hul L Door Casing AJM L Closet Door 3 c1 AIM L ! Goer^ m5 A.kM L CI Casing �� A M L hreshcld ) ,LM L I ClmetJamb (M i AIM L Wirdcw Sidi r�j W AIM L CksetWalla p I AIM L Apron 7 AIM L 6 v®y I Cl Baseboard $ A/M L Win rasing I2, L &"6 AN L WnHeader SU MA AN L C Closet Shelf (9r� AIM L Int Stops p W AX L &0 ob , I Cl Supports �„� � A1M L Win Int Sash ID,( W AJM L Closet Floor L ExtarorSil 5-(0 w Closet Cevvv 6>r© L I Part Bead ro M 1 BtindStop 15-1L7 W L Win at sass 12I w L D COMMENTS: I EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DElSAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE_-LOOSE PAINT DELEAD OELEAD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE M—E,HOD DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 288 SQ.IN.) /vtt�' �,. �•-• 4j �� �`��� G+ f��....�!.;/ r Page lnspec,or(print) (,� Lic# Signature D.ate Address of Lead Insaecbbn � fr "` Apt# /i� ' City 0 0 ROOM �p SICE I LOCATION LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS IDELEAD DEV D SIDE i LOCATION! LEAD iYPE GEMS DELEAD OELEAD SURFACE F;A7�1RD DATE 1.L�iliCO SURFACE + FIAIARD I DA i +MEr HOD Upwalls L W'vtidow.SG 7.�.A41 AN L : ! k rr t L Low Walls N1 t� (� All Anon j 3 AA,1 : ' Base�xards 3;� AIM L Crcro l� c.� h win.� .,a AN L r f'o Win Header S,Q A41 A1M L a" L f� Ir,t S ops L Cr2�a Hoar e1 AIM L Win Int Sash © W AN L I . Ce�irg AITI L + , I ExtEry SN � 1 1,41 Doer 1,. AIAt L ( ..p Part Bead g`,0 w � I Door cos rig 13 r 1 AN L G b Blind Sbp µ Mri Ooar Jamb AIM L v O C;0', Win Ext Sash A41 L r.Ttiaaskio kQ1-- "°. WrcbwSw ( M4 IVM L Door kU L ( ° Apal-1 _. AX L Casfrg A/M L I W4 Casing AN L Dc�r J kM L I + Win Header A)M L Threshold A1M L 11,000, + Int Sbps MR A14{ Door L ( I Win Int Sash MA L Door Casing A/M L Exterior SiG L I Door Jamb . AIM I Part Bead W L Threshold A/h4 L ( I BI'u�d L Door I AJM L I a � n E� Sash I w L Door wing I A/M L I I Closet Door °, All L ^� Ccor Jamb AV L Cl Casing "`� I AIM L 1 Threshold ( I /4M L I ClGSetJamb gr ( A/M L r ,� V W ndcw Sal 2, I Mll A1M L I ,• r Cksat Walls 1� I XM L Apmn y,i. AN L C-�t� � � CI Baseboard I S,� AIM L Win rzsing � 1411 Ley Closet Pole C I AIM L Win Header ?r ' W AN L 1 1?_Y 1 Closet Shelf �'d I AIM L rIrit Stops � MA A/M L rf fir, rF I Cl support �,4 I AIM L Wo Int Sash �Z, MA AN L Closet Floor L Exterior SIG r Ml1 lo lCloset Ceii'eig �Q I L Part Bead Blind Stop Q .w Win Ext Sash MA L r: 4 a ,.. / • COMMENTS: EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. S i 0 E LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT OELE AD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAO DELEAD (MORE THAN 29 SO.IN.) DATE MET HOD (MORE THAN 288 So.IN.) DATE METHOD rVl r-r�°; -- } , e ��fit' l�f?` � 1 IM z,,z-16 Page of Inspector(print) LI Uc# Signature /Date Address of Lead Inspection a � 1 b` �. f�IFj z City � I 1 HALLWAY Z, SIDE LOCATION! TYPE OF COMMENTS I DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION! LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD gLl—:'SURFACE HAZARD DAit METr00 SURFACE HAZARD DATE 1 Up wails pry I AIM L Wndow Sig W AN L Lcw Wail p U AJIM L Ap<nn AN L Basebcari�s y' p AN L s Cap N Corsi g AIM L In MA AN L Int Sips W AIM L AN L Wo Int Sash M!1 AIM L Cailirq : AX L ExLriotSiU W L Door I tj A/M L �r�. nos / r Par Bead ' h41 L Door ca,-,g AIM L ,,.e � f U�:; s Blind Stop "r�Ml1 L Door Jamb 0 Al�A L t` _ �- Wh ut Sash L Tz- r Sd Clow Doan -7 M L �( CI Casing A/M\ L Door Casing ' 0 AIM L jy Closet Jamb AN Coon Jamb s A!M L �, Closet walls AN L CI Baseboard AIM L Goor f AIM L f. !�:C? Y. Cio3at Pole AR,1 L Gocr Cas ng ?i AIM L ? ' , � Ciosat Shelf AIM CocrJamb �, AN L P,�,�,� Tj Cl Supports AIM/ L 4 CksetFl= L Door AIM 'L OI Ce,&g L . Coon ng AIM L Closet Door AIM L CoorJamb AIM L Cl Casing AIM L Tnres�41d L Ciset Jamb ` AN L Ccor Closet walls AN L Cott casing AIM L Cl U"E AIM L Dd AIM L Closet AIM L Threshold AIM L CL-/t Sheft AIM L Window Sill AWI AN L `Supports AIM L A AIM L CkSet Floor L Win Cas rq_ AN L Cl Ceiung L ` Win Header AIM L Int Stops MA Win Int Sash 1WKAN L . Exterior Sill :'� W L Part MA L end S r9 M!! L Win Exi Sash M/1 L EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SICE LOCATION MEASURE.LOOSE PAINT OELEAD 0EL_,AD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD OELEAD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.1 DATE !MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE . ME-11400 Page of �7Z Inspector(print) \I—i L.Ic# &gnature Date Address of Lead Inspection 37 �i�+�}eRtl�1•'R1 S"�`��� T� �t� , IJ� City Qq�a /VA/ ROONA SID= LOCA7I01,1 LEAD TYP=OF C611MENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE f LOCATION/ LEAD TYPE Cf . COMkEN7S DELEAD I I ( 70;E-LEAD O SURFACE OAT= A�T}0D SURFACE HA?AR DATE F w m AIM l L Wale Ci I A,'M L I o A/M L Easebaards Q a AN L Wo Caung „ r AN L �� it Tau L Win Header 4,,Y�, W AIM L Radiav I GS V AIM L Int Stop 0,e W AIM L Floor AIN L ,G r r'i �Z I Win Int Sash w AN L Ceiling (?r AN L I ExtewSIU W L Door ,U' ARYL L I Part Bead I N(q.. w L Door Casing r ra AN L Blind Stop A/A I MA L Door Jamb A/M L Win Ext Sash I Nd 01 W L Kra Sill Iv, I W AIM L Goor � a A/M L I Apron I��I I AIM L poor Casing 0,0 kW L I win Casing ^e , A/M L Door Jamb $ A/M L Win Header ;� . W AN L Int Step ,�;,� h41 AIM L °~a r AN L Win Int Sash a f M/1 AN boor AIM L Ex'eriaSill b, d w Door Jamb I AIM L Part Bead w L (-Ov;z 4'."z Fh2shold AIM I Blind Slop y I. hU1 L Door L WinExtSash f Z,1 Mil L f rFjred r.-r) Door Casing AIM L Closet Door r AIM L Doorlamb AIM L Cl Casing AIM L Threshold A!M L t a Window Sul 1.0,01 W AIM L ClosetwalLs �J AIM L Apron 10,01 A,'M L CI Win casing 6 r D AIM L Closet Pole l9 � AIM L Win Header 10,a W, A!M L Closet Shelf 910 A,'M L +;. Int Stnp �r d Mil AIM L Cl Supports 0,6 A/M L Win Int Sash 0,q w AIM L Closet Floor b L ;Part Sill (� Mn U Closet Calling n,d L d w L p . w �Sash hNt L COMMENTS: . I EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD (MORE THAN 288 50.IN.) DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD Page '"�- of . Inspector(print) q-' Lic# Signature DA Address of Lead Inspection , "' —Ov'k-1. Apt K 9 l' City /%,f rq.."Oh q/ ROOM SIDE I LOCATION! LEAD TYPE OF CCMMZNT$ IDELEADIZELEAD SIDE I LOCATION! LE1D TYPE OF CO&WENTS DELEAD. DELEAD SURFACE HAZARD DATr M:THOC R SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD Up walls (J B AN L ! IWe�oow SW I A41 AIM L Lew W a is Q.Q A/M L Alt+{ L 5asebca s Q Alm L noon CON j W� AN L All Win Head W AN L Int Step M1 AIM L i Floor 10,0 A/M L Win Int Sash W AIM L Ceii N j 010 AN L E:4Z.w SIII \ L 1_ ?art Bead W L R 1 t wr Ca--ng f,q AN L + Slind Stop W L Door Jamb � A/M L � D j Win Er,Saah w T We4(:Iw Siu j M/1 ky L r KM L �„ Ap= L Door Cos ng ArM L r + Win Casing ABM L Door Jamb Tf ?y AN L j wV1 Header MII AN L -74 N Int Stops I M!1 AN L Door V AIM j W,Int h W AIM L Door Casing A)M L rr r Sip MUI l Coon Jamb 3 AIM L ry j ad ( Mll L '* op w L AIM L Sash M/l L Door Casing L Closet Door 5.01 A!M L Door J /UM L Cl casing AN L Gooi>CON i hF2stwld AN L Coset Jamb 13,,7 1 AIM L v. Window Sul ,� W AIM l �p Closet Walls O. AIM l Aprun ,9 AN L tr Cl Baseboard . 3,p5 A!M L Gppp cog O Win casing 3+3 AIM L n Closet Pole 0,51 AIM L Win Header 3 Al MA Aw L N j Closet Shed 3, APA L 00 CON Int Stops j, f Mrl A/M L N Cl Supports of tq A/M L Win Int Sash 0.0 W AIM L Closet Floor L Exter>or SN 0,0 W L Closet CeilIN 10.0 L Part Bead .. W L Bbd Stop � � W L Win.ExtSash 1,0,01 W L COMMENTS: EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deteader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT OEL EA0 DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE ME MOO OO (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOC r `'f' �c T a M .i-r'ifs � r r,-/�1 Page 16 of Inspector(print) Lic# Signature Date Address of Lead Inspection '. � Apt# Citym,2 STAIRCASE SIDE LOCA T IM LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION/ LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DE LEA D SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD SURFACE. I HAZARD DA% METHOD Up walks D p AIM L I . WC40*Sig. Mr1 AIM L A l l ILcw Wal!s �.I p I AJM L .AIM L , AIM L wining . . : AX L -A H I Win Hea MJI AN L I f Int Snips MA AN L =ioCt Ada L Wvl Int Saah I W A1M L I Ceiling AIM L Ertsea SIV '�W l Dom <`1¢ L j F,l? } Part Bead M/i�, L Door Cas N I AIM L f.- { _�°? � Btvid Step Mn L Doorjamb AN L t? Win Ext Sash I h41 r=- -- Closet Door I AR 1 L Doer AIM L Cl Casing Alfa L r Casing AN L Closet Jarrb DoorJam� AIM L Cbsatwalh L Threshold AIM L I Cl Baseboard Alhl L Door e AIM L Closet Pole AIM L Door Casing AIM L I Closet she A/M L , Door Jamb Alfa.,L Cl sup AIM L �. Threshold AIM L Clt Fbcr L Door AIM L ~, C oast Gaining L Door Casing L �� Door Jamb L Threshold AJM L HandrailE AIM L Door AIM L N., Balusters Door CazV I AIM L Lowet+Fail Doan 16b AIM L Treads S r AIM L ;;hieshold AN L Risen pr C AN L --window sill W1 AIM L Sxraga L °�" Apron Fti., AIM L Door AjM L Win Casing AIM L Door Casin L Win Header _ "M4, AIM L �°` , Door Jamb L Int Stops M!f AIRh Th reshold A/M L §' W n Int Sash MJ1 L Exterior Sig IvUI L �O Pact Eaad W L of daStop M!I L Win Ex Sash W L EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT 0ELFAD DELEAD MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD V1 A- a i —4/—Z- Page /Is- of l� Inspector(print) t Lic# Signature Date Address of Lead Inspection 3 7 PA a r'Aj 5t- 4t# �) c 7 City � a���,� /V"'i KITCHEN SIDE I LOCATIONI LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATIM LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD ( Up walls AIM L Whdow SW W AIM L W al}s I �r A/M L AN Baseboards A/M L Win AN l L Win Header W AJM L ----- Int Stops A/M L Floor AIM L a Win Int Sash w Ceiling rfii A/M L Exterior Sib w L Door AIM L ( �„ ,.� Pan Bead' hN L Casing AIM L Cs° � „ �= `Stop w L r 1 Door Jamb AIM L .43_;�y { Win Ext Sash W L Cbsat Door AIM L -0I•Casing AIM L �. Door Casing p r� A/M L Ckxiet Jambes AIM L Door Jamb ;t:} A/M L Closet Walt �"*b.� A1M L 01 Baseboard Door AIM L Closet Pole ng AIM L Closet Shelf AIM L + Door Jamb AJM L CI Support AIM L Threshold L C0eoloor L Door. A A� L Closet CeJuig L Door Casing AIM L Up Cab Frame G6 AIM L Door AIM L Cab Door O AIM L el reshold AIM L J9p Cab Walls AIM L Windcw Sill r Mil AIM L Up Cab ShM � .t AIM L Apron t AIM L Supports C14 AIM L Win casing A 0 AIM L Low Cab Fram , rt�J AIM L Win Header Z .9 W AIM L Cab Door AIM L Int Stcps 009 hVl AJM L Low Cab Walls AiM L 6 Win Int Sash t,> r r Ml1 AIM L Low Cab ShN3 Exterior SIG Mn L Supports �AlM.br Part Bead d- w L Drawers AIM L B.- Win Ext Sash ± r+ Mn L Comment: EXCLUDED SURFACES: Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DATE METHOD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) f MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) M A 14� ors 7:7 1 Cr�n� 6 ,1a -z— Page of 377 Inspector(print) Lic# Signature Da e Address of Lead Insoection �"�=1 � � t 6 ' API# 1 City t ` PAN RY 4t-- 2Z_ SIDE I LOCATION! LEAD 7YPE OF COMMENTS DELEAO DELEAD SIDE LOCATION! LEAD 'TYPE OF I COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD Up wars ui� A/M L \_Uzg b Frame AIM L Y.cw Wald p AIM L Cab Door AIM L Baseboards C r 0 K'M L I Up Cab S*s Qiba r n� Su A!M L Low Cab Frain .Jl ,Q AIM L =aor L AC Cab Door J10 AIM L Caiiirg (d�� L Law Cab Walls 010 AIM L Low Cab Shtvs 0,0 AIM L ADoer Casing 0 AIM L ( Supports 0,: AIM L Docr Jamb Q a AN L jcrawem 1 000 1 AIM L Th . AIM Law Cab Frain AIM L Door d , () AIM L I Cab Door AIM L .Poor Casing �f rU AIM L Low Cab`Y.�ls A/M L Door Jamb p..0 AJM L Low Cab ShM A/M L Support AIM L �Windcw Sill Mll AIM L Drawers A�Ih�L AIM L Low Cab Frain AIM L Apm�� Vfin cas ng AIM L ,�°' Cab Door AIM L Win Header 'v4N.,,A/M L .N' Lcw Cab P6 AIM L ~ Int Stops W Lc,�Cd ShMs A/M L ` Win Int Sash I I'VA"AN L upports A/M L Exterior Sill W AIM L Drawers AIM L Part Bea WI AIM L Closet Door ,p AN L EliadrStcp M!1 AIM L Cl Casing 0 s 1 AN d L Win ExtSash WI AIM L Closet Jamb AIM L Up Cab Frame d,p A[M L I CbsetWalb �j r t7 AIM L Cab Door U IM L Cl Baseboard 0,gs* A/M L Up Cab Shlvs f a AIM L I Clow Re Supports E)tG AIM L Closet Shelf ��r AIM L t1p.C-b�Frame AIM L ,,,�� Cl'Support F a AIM L Cab Door �. A/M L Closet Floor �r 0 L 1Up Cab Shin AIM L Closet calling .�; L PPo� AIM L p� Ccmce^,ts: j EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader, SlC_ LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAO DE'EAO SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD OELEAD (MORE THAN 288 SO.{N.1 DATE ME-THOO (MORE THAN god SO.IN.) DATE METHOC 1 i —V, - �'="i'�' ,rr✓t S Vf4"5 - Page cf 3 Inspector(print) Lic# Signature Mate Address of Lead Inspection �`)"eat-l�.+t ��1 �`, Apt# i� city 'T,t��ty►R; ;,,,�J BATHROOM 2-- SIDE LOCA TIOW LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION/ f LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SURFACE HAZARD DATE ME7HOO SURFACE I HAZARD DATE METHOD Up wad AIM L ( ""+., Lwow Cab Fram AIM L ,,, A!M L `�!r t Cati AlM L :.. �• Easebcar 3 t` AIM L r�.j4��. Low Cab Walls AIM d: t� Chair ra] A/M L '� S Law Cab Shlvs � R Supports,;,°" AIM L F cor f L W�FU {3rawers AIM L .. �- r, , Ceiiirgf t^✓ L I Closet Door AIM L Door AIM L I Clci>Gasirg A/M L Door Casing I�e rd I AIM L CbsetJamb ABM L .; Door Jamb 10,01 AIM L Closet Walls T4 L Baseboard Door AJM L Closet Pole y,. L Door Casing AIM L Closet Shelf AIM L Jamb AIM L Ctrs Su rtr AIM L Th•esho AIM L Zs at Floor L Window Sill M/I AIM L C1aset Ceiling L Apron AIM L Win asing Win d n Heer I W L int Stops- WUI AIM L Win int Sash WUl AIM L Exw^ iU W AIM L art 3ead WUl AIM L Blind Stop WUI AIM L 'rVn Ext Sash WUI ARv4 L `ter• Up Cab Framel AIM L Up Cab Shlvs Su AIM L Comments: Comments: EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD GELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD CELEAD'� (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 2a8 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD ,...7 1 9 �I�' �o ZZ Page of Inspector(print) Lic# Signature gate Address of Lead Inspection n .�,�J �� Apt# City K.)o,el�i� BATHROOM SIDE I LOCATIONI LEAD TypE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION! LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD IUD wal s A/M L Low Cab Fram AIM L 1 jilcw Wa 413 A/M L t:Ar . o'�d Ga V, AIM L Baseboards �,o AIM L fir,/Lf ..e� �_� ,j., LowCa`blalls A/M L A 1� Chair call 3,J1 AIM L .r ��� Fes: Low Cab Shly • AIM L I Radiator v o AIM L _ _ Supports `' AIM L Floor �'t� L ) a Drawers AIM L Ceiling L Closet Door A!h' L l0 Door AIM L Closet Casing AIML Door Casing AIM L Closet Jamb 1 L Door Jamb AIM L CiosetWalls AIM L Threshold Flo CI Baseboard fir°' A/M L Door A/M L Closet Pale Alm L Casing A/M L ClosetShe`!f A/M L Door Ja`mta AIM L ClQAuppert3 A/M L Threshold A/M L Closet Floor L Window Sill ( M/I AIM L Closet Ceiling L Apron A jM L Win casing A!M Win Header W AIM L Int Stops W A3fg`L Win Int Sash W-AJM L Ex',eror Sill M/I AJM L Part Bead :.' MII AIM L Blind Stcp Mn AIM L �, V/in Ext Sash W A/M L me AIM L Cab Door L Up Cab Shlvs L �uPPr AIM L Comments: Comments: EXCLUDED SURFACES: Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only b a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT OELEAD DELEAD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD N,-3 7:746-� 19MA � Z d / Page � of Inspector(print) V Lic# Signature /Date C Address of Lead Inspection 3 �.! f,�N Apt# r� City 161ell PANTRY. SIDE I LOCATION! LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD! DE�� SIDE LOCATION LEAD TYPE Or COMMENTS DELEAD OEL�D SURFACE HAZARD DATE MET}i0O SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD Up walb 6,0 AX L 77 Up Cab Frame A/M L All/Low Walb 6,0 AIM L yy M Baseboards lord A/M L Up Cab ShN3 L A/M L AIM L Low Cab Fram A/M L 'poor Y.,40 Oc(? L Cab Door 0,0 A/M L Ceiling L Low Cab Walls A/M L Door y% AIM L Lo rte- _Al1A...x . 'J.Dwr Casing 5� A/M L -- DoorJamb A141 Drawers r° AIM L T Low Cab Fram A/M L �r Door .� A/M L Cab A/M L Door Casing A/M L Low Cab Wat ° AIM L Door Jamb ! A/M L Low Cab ShM A/M L T Supports Window Sill MA AIM L Drawers A/M L��w AFB _ AIM L Low Cab Fram Alf�`L Win casing AIM L Cab Door -A/M L Win Header INKL.AiM L Low Cab Walls ,�` AIM L IrtStops NN L Low CabSh AIM L Win Int Sash Aul A/M�L Sup por A/M L Exterior Sill MVI�' M L drawers AIM L Part Bead �✓ M/I A/M L Closet Door A/M L Blind Sto W AIM L ``C Casing AIM L R'Ext Sash W AIM L � Close b AIM l / Up Cab Frame AIM L ( Closet Walls A/M L Cab Door AIM L Cl Baseboard AIM L Up Cab ShNs O,y AIM L Closet Pole L Supports A/M L Closet Shelf AIM L Up Cab Frame AIM L CI Supports A1M L Cab Door Closet ° L Up Cab °" A/M L zGet Ceiling L f upports A/M L Comments: EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD Page /d of_3:7 Inspector(print) Lic# Signature Date /te rr�,.ra Pryor l L� t# f ) city Address of Lead Inspection Apt ` `� f KITCHEN 7 SIDE I LOCATION/ LEAD I TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD OELEAO SIDE LOCATION! LAD TYPE OF COMMENT S DELEAD DELEAD SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOO SURFACE BARD DATE METHOD BUD walls r c9 AIM L : r) c._e,-,D wr4m S18 W AIM L Al Lowwat� �, p A/M L ��„"Gb ,�� kM L Basebcards (�,U A/M L rW,., ing A/M L chair rail ` AN der W AIM L R kla a 1'vGh,AIM L F'cor AIM L ;la k,-O(:L� Win Int Sash W AN L I Exterior SW Dggr ,0 AIM L _;t;, ` I Pert Bead - Mn L 3,5� Coq+'Cass AN L t;�°t=.r z:� f:e-^a�:/r`� BIIr1d FM L Door Jamb > a AIM L ��,> of I Ext Sash w L Tnmshald I D 3 AIM L Closet Door AIM L Door �!r 3 AIM L CI AIM L Door Casing �,) AIM L Closet Jamb` AIM L Door Jamb y p AiM Closet walls AIM L hr�sho�d �r I AIM L Cl Baseboard L Goor C� AIM L Closet Pole AIM L Doer Casing AIM Closet Shelf L Door Jamb AIM Cl Support AIM L '' L. :.... Closet F L A/M L r0t C:Ukv L V Door Casing A/M L Up Cab Frame I L 9 AIM L Door Jamb .m AIM LL Cab Door , AIM L AIM L —°- Up Cab Walls r� v AIM L ylindcw Sill W1 AIM L �vrcr i % Up Cab Shlys 1,7,0 AIM L A� O AW L ? Support , AIM L Win torsi AIM L Lcw Cab Fram to A/M L n9 5�0 r Win Header 5 MA AN L �� °�t� Cab Door �,,, AIM L c,.,.++ Int Sups y MI1 AIM L g L i AN L W n Int Sash Id, 31 bUt AM L Low Cab Shhrs Exterior SIU 1,9, a 1 W Support .. Part Bead z (D Drawers Sir A/M L r Blind SLop Mn 6llt7l> Win Ext Sash qj M/I L t Ccmmznts: EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SID" LOCATICN MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DATE METHOD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DATE METHCO !MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) (MORE THAN 238 SO.IN.) ,I,•; At: . �C rAI- y? /1JEr—r 7ef6 `' �c Z_. �.r Page c! SR Inspector(print) `J lk# Signature Date Address of Lead Inspection :} t f fr r " ` Apt lot STAIRCASE 2. SIDE j LOCA T IOW LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCA71ON LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS OELEAC DELEAD SURFACE I HAZARD DATE METHOD SURFACE HAZARD DATE (METHOG Up wall ;0 AIM L Window SW MII PJM L { %1Lc*Walls r A/M L p €,• , AC+on AJM L Wh A;M L Ct4ir rail A!M Wn Haaderv,N Mrl luhl L R L Int Stop h41 IUM L �- Floor I I A/M L Win Int Sash ` VI AN L Ceiling AIM L Eztarior SW Wl'-, M L Door AN L Part Bead w `,L ` Door Casing Z `: Blind Step 6N L Door Jamb •°' AIM L 1 r! Win Ext Sash { hVl L Tcesd®Id..�. t,...�. Closet Door AIM L e% Door AIM L fe' Cl Casing NM Door Casing AIM L Closet Jamb Alltf L Jamb AIM L Closet Waii3 AIM L a Thresho AIM L Cl Baseboard AIM L Door AIM L Closet Pole AN L PC)=Casing AIM L r9` Closet ShetV AIM L o Jamb L �,�' ± C1 SuFpor*s AIM L. ahold . AIM C}dset Floor L `. pThrweshold L Casing AIM L New ... .AIM Jamb , AIM L Raiknq�ap°-.AIM, L Handrail AN L Door !` AIM L �oef Casing AIM L Door lanb AIM L Treads ,�r AIM L Threshold AIM L I Rsers d O AN L at �+ ---- window Sill M(1 AIM L S7Vlget3'++'�w°'°:• *•+-�, i Aprpn.,� AIM L Door AX L .�►-"' win Casing ` AIM L DoorTg°M AIM L Win Header -M,0� AIM L D=Jamb Int Stop Mn A/'M�.,L '® Threshold AIM t IW!n Int Sash I M!i Exterior Sill I L Part Bead Mn L Bend M/I L Li— I I I Wh Ezt Sash W L �. EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SICE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD OELE AD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD OELEAD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METH 00 (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD Page of 3�l Inspe,'tor(print) Lac# _ Signature Date t . Address of Lead Inspection J 4% r�,Y y�., _ 1 t/ r1` Apt# i IL City ROOK! j SID_ LOCe.IONI LEAD TypE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION! LEAD 7YPE OF COM4 ENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE M SUUACE HAZARD DATE +likTHOD ( SURFACE F HAZARD DATE ME HOD �Up walls L Wwcw Sill W A/M L 1 Lo-*16a0.s I D(,Dl L I i I `L 8asebodrds '3 r> AlM l Win ca_sirg A/1t L i� Cho r rah AIM L Win Header A/M L Int Sys M1 Floor 10,3 j A/M L Win Ini Sash 441 L Ca�irq a AXI L Exte iw St11 441 L Door AM L i � 4 :; + Part Bead 441 L Goer Casng (rr L (-o Via Cis 85 p 441 L Coo(Jamb yQ _ A/M L (e -s4 W n Ext Sash MA L W ndav Silt 4N A/M L n D°or 1.7 1 AIM- L ( ytiry b ( 'AA=, AX L Ocor Casing AIM L ; ;,+ .a*: + W.Cas'r AIM L v Door Jamb , AIM L a g + 1wn Header W AIM L Th 1d, Ia1Vt�'"`C Int Stop Door AIM L U�'t�r> C 'd Win Int Sash f -- Door Casing Zlkl' AN l I w Exterior so W1 L Door Jamb 3r�/ A/M L I s;..µ Part Bead WI L TrtrwMld A/Ft`r L" 8 top W1 L AIM L n Ezt Sash ( WI L Door Casing Closet Doer G I AIM L Doer Jamb .r^—'KM L ° CI Casing r� r AIM L 61-09 G Ab AIM L Closet Jamb � AIM `L Window SCI 2t7 MJI AIM L Closet walls AN L Apron AIM L v'c�sa ( Cl Baseboard AIM L rz�D p Win casing 3, AIM L �, .,, :•� Closet Po4es+� AIM L Win Header MT KM t � ' Closet Stet, I r AIM L Int Steps 57 4U1 A I M c i s upports _^,� AIM L Win Int Sash r 441 AM L Closet Floor ,, L EsteriorSlY r� MA L CksetCeling Jr� L Pert Bead 57,0 AUI Blind Stop Srd !r I Win Ext Sash r g L l9 eta CD,v COMMENTS: EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. �12E LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DEr.EAO DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAO CELEAO y (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE I MET'r?OD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD ►�f y� HA- 3 --t7 s T Z/¢ Page o,,-3j Inspector(pnnt) Lic* Signa�re Date Address of Lead Inspection 37 �N��`� S"� API Pad City 041-i,+"a �vy ROOK! z SIDE LOCATIOW LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION! LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD I DELE,AD SURFACE HAZARD DATE 1,4ETHW SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD Up walls Zf� AW L W xv_$i!J Z.,y .W IVM L , �3"CV Cc9 p� AN L Apron 57r 11111 `L (.se9o9 e-tw 9asebcards I`1� L Grta f Win Casing 7, )W L crier b Win Header C/r ZI W rte{ L � o -. . LU L Int Slops 3 111 ,01 L C-*z r` D ar- ) Ficar r1a AIM L Win Int Sash O r p I w KM L Ceiling 15,,. AIM L Ertas Siu 'Q w Dom Cit{ AIM L Part Bead �, Y., C �' D=Casing tt rN AJhI L r^ Blind Stop I L" I M/l / Door Jamb tt AN L , q e ' Win u Sash I0 r`1f I w L Window Sill ( W AIM L Door AIM L n AIM L 06ar�Casing " L Wvt ing I Alhl L Door Jamb AIM. L Wn Heade ( W AJM L Threshold �`� AN L IntStcps I M/i AN L Goor "' L Win Int Sash XW AN L Door Casing Exterior S➢ L Door Jamb ,, A"N L `�� Par,Bead I W L Threshold AJM t BI'u�d Stop Door AN L IftlExtSash I W L Door Cat rg AIM L Clcsat Door I AIM L �. r Jamb AIM L Cl Casing AIM Threshold AIM L C'csetJamb L NndcwSiil 'Z�y w AJM L T CbsetWalb jf AIM L AIM L t CI Baseboard AN L Apron :s-�,3� �- Win casing AIM L y.1,11 Closet Pole tr AIM L Win Header ? W W M L �,�,� � . � Closet S`aff 1 AIM L Int Stops Sr"O W AIM L CI ppors I AIM L Win Int sash Mn ARN L f 2&t Floor L Exterior SIu Mn .' Closet Ceumg ( L Part Bead I 0,S w L 5tind Stop 5 V .hU1 Win Ext Sash ' 7 M/1 L COMMENTS: EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces Csted in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIZE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAO SIDE LOCATION MEASURE LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD leg !� p j Page �°" of —�- Inspector(print) V Uc# Signature bate Address of Lead Inspection PtAlu 61" S�Lnr Apt# � � City 04+Z 14-► k ROOM, SIDE I LOCATION/ LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS OELEADI DELEAD SIDE. LOCATION/ LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SURFACE BARD DATE METHOD SURFACE HAZARD DATE METHOD 1�Iupwalls Q.Q AJM L Wlnda Sill AIM L GOO pnl t Lax Walls AX L Apron f) AIM L a Baseboards �,? ARA L t, C ilAl Win Casing o2 A/M L h kit Chair call AN L Win Header ' 7 W AX L k Int Stops a W AIM L u FW O p�i L Win Int Sash w AIM L Ceiling AIM L Exterior Sill 0,01 Ml1 L . Part Bead 0.01 MA L Door Casing t.''j AIM L Goo-> CON P Blind Stop Q.C) WA. L f Door Jamb j,3 A� L Lo QC Win Ext Sash �,D MJ1 L Wvidow Sw MA AITI L AN .L Door Casing ,r.� L 9,06 p Covb Win C ing AIM L Door Jamb , AIM L Win Hea Mll AIM L �Z dll G°AN4 Threshold '"°"°"`` Int Stop M/1 AN L ��.. AIM L Win Int Sash w AR,{ L Door Casing-�, AIM L Exterior Sib N w L Door Jamb "®A!M L Part Bead L Threshold AIM Y-L. Blind Stop M!1 L R --m L �. Win Ext Sash W L Casing .�'� " L Closet Door Jmb AIM L CI Casing L shold AIM L Closet Jamb L WindowSUl �, W A/M ClasetWalls AIM .L Apron j ARM L (200pto N r CI Baseboard AIM L Win casing AIM L &bob .WD Closet Pois AIM L .:ii Haadsr �' Mn AM I lck=t Shelf AN L Int Steps W AIM L CISuppor j AIM L Win Int Sash W AIM L C bor L Exterior SIII d L t CeRN L Part Bead 010 Mri L Blind Stop 0.0 w L. Win Ext Sash 0.0 Mn L COMMENTS: EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAO DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE ME7HO01 (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD m v—vrr_-K, a f A4At r�x--s T/1 ,,9 � Page of Inspector(print) Lic# Signature ate Address of Lead Inspection 3 7 Apt# ¢- City 0,C STAIRCASE ' SID"e I LOCATIOW LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAO SIDE I LOCATION/ LEAD TYPE OF COtdMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SURFACE HAZARD GATE M.RHCC SURFACE HAZARD DATE (METHOD Up walk �,a A/1+1 L W'uidow SW MII AIM L }� Lax Waib v, AIM L Apron AIM L EaW boards W Casing AIM L Chair :�M--c- w�H W AiM L Rad' ' �- Int SmGs W AIM L Floor . , ARr1 L Win Int Sash 6U1 AIM L Ceiling e C AIM L Ezterior S1Y L Door kot. AIM L Part Bead W L Door Casing ,:µ AIM L Blind Stop W L Door Jamb X AIM L yylo Threshold _ r AIM L Closet Door AIM L Door AIM L Cl CAN ,�; Door Casing AIM L Closet Jamb k`M L �. Doo amb AIM L Closet Waits L Thmshol\ AIM L CI Baseboard AIM L Odor AIM L �/'' Closet Pole AIM L Door Casing 4 AIM L Closet S A/M L Door Jamb AIM L Cl�u ports ARd L. ThreshAd XN L loset Floor L Door L Closet Ceiling L Door Casing AiM L Newel Post AIM L Door Jamb AIM L Railing Cap G AIM L Threshold t L Handrail AIM L Door �AM L Balusters AIM L r Casing AIM L Door Jamb AIM L Treads AIM L Threshold AIM L Risers AIM L Ctrirn _ Apron j AIM L Alai L Win Casing D, 0 AIM L pppr Cog Win Header p o W AIM L Doorjamb AIM I AIM L AIM L wn Int Sash M/l AIM L i'a_rt_6ea L.---- _BliodStop A n Wi Exi Sash �, W L EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD (MORE THAN 298 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD 6,/2 Page of lnspector(print) Lic# Signature bate Address of Lead Inspection -37 C-a A-k k�i nr� Apt* I City WAY SIDE LOCATION LEAD TYPE OF COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SIDE LOCATION/ LEAD TYPE OF . COMMENTS DELEAD DELEAD SURFACE HAZARD DATE METriOD SURFACE I HAZARD DATE METHOD t 1 Up waLs KM L - W-ndcw Sib I f.4+1 AIM L I ILOW waI13 a.0 . L I A/M L 16&wbcards X2.5 A/M L wn C43:-g AIM L ,. �� wrt�Header Mn AIM L : IntS ` AN1 AN L `r I. 10. AN L Wn Int Sash MIl A/M L Ceiling A/M L Estericr Si—g\AMII L Gocr AIM L Part Bead w L coo(Casing AN L Blind Stop 6V1 L Docr Jamb a s AIM L I WWo Ezt Sash W L Threshold d AIM L I Closet Coon A/M L Door ro A/M L 6a� , CI Casing ,A/M L Corr Casing 2-1 AN L Closet Jamb L r Door Jamb L CfOV ID C-C.43> CImet WalI3 L Thresha<d�°"' A'I1C — CI Basebcani km Y G -- ClosatPce A/M7'L Door L Closet Shelf A4?A L r.' Door Jamb AIM L Supperts AN L Hhrastrcld"°"m L L CI CBhnq L Corr Cal rites AIM L Clc sat Door AN L Door Jamb L ClCasng A/M L Thrpshcld AIM L CbsetJamb/' A/M L Doorel'' L Clcset Wallis AIM L Dcar Casing AN L CI B&V&ard A/M L D=J AIM L C tpole A/M L h a ( AN L 2&tSheff A/M L 7W;InHeader CI Supperta AIM L A/M L Clcset F)= L A/M L CI Cez)g L� a W A/M L b,o M!1 AIM L Mll L Wn Est Sash , AUI L I EXCLUDED SURFACES:Surfaces listed in these boxes can be made intact only by a licensed deleader. SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAO SIDE LOCATION MEASURE:LOOSE PAINT DELEAD DELEAD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD (MORE THAN 288 SO.IN.) DATE METHOD Page of 3 /' EXPLANATION OF LEAD INSPECTION REPORT FORM COLLTMNVS This document is intended to provide general information needed to understand the inspection report. However,you should always speak with the inspector if you have any questions before you delead your home. ^' "�� • Refers to A,B,C,or D side of the building or room. See the diagram on the cover sheet.The"A" side of the S1DE' - building or room is the side facing the street which gives the property its address(usually,it is the front of the building).Keeping your back to this street,from the"A"side move clockwise to the"B"side on your - left,the"C"side opposite you,and the"D" side to the right. Refers to the building component(s)being tested.Generally,each separate component is considered one s,SURFICE' r surface. Some surfaces may be made up of more'than one part.For example,"Baseboard"may refer to four separate pieces of wood (one running along each wall),but is still considered one surface. The actual lead result.Each surface tested must have a result recorded in the"Lead"column. '� • A number shows that the surface was tested with an XRF analyzer.A number(or average number) more than 1.2 mg/cm2 is a dangerous level of lead. • A"pos" or"neg"shows that the surface was tested with sodium sulfide."Pos"means that there is a dangerous level of lead. • "N/A" means that the inspector was not able to test the surface.'Unless the owner can get a sample to test,the inspector must assume the surface contains lead and require it to be deleaded,If necessary. "Metal" means that a metal surface was not tested and only needs to be intact.If the surface is a metal ~` handrail,metal window sill,or metal railing cap,it needs to be deleaded if it is more than 1.2 mg/cm2, "pos," or is"N/A," T�IPE�OR Not all lead paint must be deleaded.This column tells you IF and W]EIY a surface needs deleading. 1 IAZARD "M/I"circled means that the surface is a moveable/impacted surface and must be deleaded in its - entirety. � Y� r • "A/M"circled means that the surface is"accessible mouthable"and must be deleaded to a minimum of ' five feet high,four inches in from the edge or corner. ,at"L" circled means that the surface is loose and must minimum ,be made intact. _:' • If more than one choice is circled,the rules for deleading may change depending upon what method of • _ deleading you choose.Speak to the inspector for more information. `; • "N/A" means the inspector was unable to determine if the surface was loose or intact.The person doing r, the deleading must check this surface and follow all the rules for deleading.Speak to the inspector for more information. • If nothing is circled or marked"N/A" then it is likely the surface does not need deleading.Speak to the F` inspector for more information. „,COMMENTS> Any additional observations or test results made by the inspector that affect the inspection or deleading. tom= OE�F ` The date that the lead inspector checks the surface and finds that it has been successfully deleaded and L=DAT passes reinspection. DELE7D The kind of deleading done to bring a surface into compliance.Refer to Deleading codes in the Key on the cover page of the inspection report. M.F, SCTRE The amount of loose paint on a surface as measured by the lead inspector."N/A" means that the inspector 4LOQS, was.not able to measure the loose paint,but has determined that it is more than the cut-off. Surfaces listed PAIN (.�M here,whether with a measurement or with an"N/A" notation,can only be made intact by a licensed F_X... deleader. Note that there are still other low and moderate-risk deleading activities that may be done by SURF someone who is not a licensed deleader. . t PACUPPtiommon\Explanationpage 214100 INSPECTION HISTORY PAGE Pie?—vt ?z Property Address: , (St-) �f A�F�lf gal �`F� (city) t-jQ L tL n, 6*j _(Apt/Floor)i4�(Zip) oloto s INSPECTION ACTIVITY KEY PASS OR FAIL EXAMPLE BOX 1.Reocc.Reinspection 6.Interim Control P Pass 2.Reinspection 7.Recertification F Fail inspection activity number 3.Dust Taken 8.Post Compliance Assess.Determ. pass or fail 4.Dust received 9.Maintained Comp 5.Full Delead.Compliance 10.Restored Comp Inspector Inspector Lic# Lic# Inspector Inspector Lic# Lic# Inspector Inspector Lic# Lic# Inspector Inspector Lic# Lic# Inspector Inspector Lic# Lic# Wspector uspector. Lic# Lic# Inspector Inspector Lic# Lic# DATES . ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE SERVICES, INC. Lead Inspection Report Pager o1- Method Used: 588 Silver Street Agawam, MA • 01001 NaiS Exp.Date 413-789-3530 FAX: 413;789-2776 �R'X-Ray Flourescense Model V i `otl erial# �?9a Address Apt.# City Zip Code FFT7 3'9 Owner Name: 77„4O�.t Wr.4 Owner Address: -7 -SeNw A ��._h4�-2&yV AkAp Single Family Multi-Family Q Client Name(if different from owner): #Units Condominium[3 Client Address: Daycare KEY: Inspection Deleadin Other Cornments: AIM Accauibld Mouthable CAP Capped CAP Capped COV Covered COV Covered DIP Dipped L Loose ENC Etxaprulatad M1 Moveablalmpaa•d Na Made law ET M Metal .-. . PRE Prepared NA NotAo ibls REM Removed NC No Coating REB Rcplaeed NEG Negative REV Reversed POs Positive SCR Saaped to Bue VR Vinyl Replao®ent Subeuam W'indo. .VR V'myl Replao ment . a Floor,, ,C Floor# �-�'� C � 1 :=,-�. �:�"�`�'` : . . . � '� cam' ..• .. .. . ..1'►: •- . Bk:�j 't�� { D B .' D . . . .:• .... .. } A(street side) A(street side) Pb (lead) more than 1.2 mg/cm'with x-ray fluorescence or positive with NaZS is Dangerous. INSP.DATE Lead Hazards? (Y or N) Inspector (phut) Signature Lie.# Table 2 Lead-Based Paint Abatement Summary 37 Franklin Street Northampton, Massachusetts Room(s) Component Abatement Method Authorized Deleader All Baseboard Crown Molding Remove, surface prep to receive new molding Moderate Risk All Baseboard Crown Molding Replace with specified new molding Low Risk All Baseboard Inside Corners Scrape 4"back and feather to blend with new paint High Risk All Window Sashes Remove Moderate Risk All Inter. Window Frames Remove Moderate Risk All Window Trough and Jamb Remove and/or make intact,for replacement Moderate Risk All Doors and Door Frames Remove Moderate Risk All Closet Shelves Remove Low Risk `•- All Closet Shelve Supports Remove Moderate Risk Bathroom#1,2 Lower Walls Remove as Specified and Make Intact Remaining High Risk Kichen#1 Lower and Upper Walls Remove as Specified and Make Intact Remaining High Risk Staircase#2 Lower Walls Make Intact and Cover Mouthables as needed Moderate Risk Basement Cellar Window Units Remove Sash and Frame Entirely Moderate Risk Exterior Foundation Make Intact High Risk Exterior Upper Trim along Roof Lines Make Intact High Risk Exterior Shingle siding under vinyl Remove as needed Moderate Risk Exterior Doors and Door Frames Remove Moderate Risk Porch#1,2 All Remove High Risk Definitions: Lead-Based Paint=XRF reading of greater than 1.2 mg/cm2 or a non-accessible surface or component Interior Window Frames=refer to casings,stops,aprons, sills, and headers Window Jamb=refers to parting bead and blind stop Door Frames=refers to casings,jambs,stops,headers, and thresholds Authorized Deleaders=Authorized persons to handle Lead-Based Paint in accordance with Department of Public Health Regulations under 105 CMR 460.175 and Department of Labor and Workforce Development Regulations 454 CMR 22.00. Notes: 1. If the surface or component did not contain Lead-Based Paint,then it can be handled by a General Contractor in accordance with Lead in Construction OSHA regulations under 29 CFR 1926.62 . 2. The majority of Exterior Window Sills(Troughs)have been previously covered. If the covering is removed to allow for the new window,then the surface must be rendered in tack by a Moderate Risk Deleader. 3. Exterior Surfaces greater than 10 SF in area, if made intact,must be performed as High Risk Deleading activities 2 } � ( \ Z � 2 � j \ _ }7 \ 2 U) ) f ) ) } > d & « / a $/ [ ƒ / ƒ ) {CO $ ) (% D.co q) \ o / \ { } RRo cL § mo = c // < ,: 5 kk \ \ j \ \ \ \ \ \\ - ) � L \ o ! § \ j � o L ) Lil mw v d LL m m O N N N N m QI d E U U U U d Od0 D O m U c c � d - J 2 O L Z N N N m m d m L � L � O m O O O O N O lL O W W C W L Ul U d m LL % O % W d d N N W U) W_ m m m m O a C L 1 L in m °d <n a o a. o a a m w N N a N a N yj 0 D. C m N N O N C O a O O p O L ° m m > m Un w _ m rn fn V7 ❑a a dudm i _ U O` L ` o_ ` ` ` ` m d U.o ° o b m o o ° U rn n q o m mc x U, (n o c=x o m mLN $ a = °' C O d cn a N U)w o W oU a -05 m°a- ❑`0 v U'aa E o f 2U m iU U U U U E n w a c°3 E x w m E w ° p a o �) o V N N ❑O d a a D m O a d c 0 C W m W E z ' W L o 0 o o E E m E E a E vi ° vi 0 m. ❑a 0 c m w O m m m m N m a ° a❑ 0 m N N m N - - O CL a m m U) E n E y ` O0 O O a ca ca o o c CO 0 3 m m o U) 0 0 ° o D ° O OQ 0 ° 0 a. N �U o o 0 o g 0 m c ° ° c- 0 0 a 0 o o O o c 0 o o ❑ c O 0 O O p O a 0 m 0 0 O O O w 03 0 ° v° C5 y -v° 3 0 ° `0 a� m o m `o m ° x o �° .°. g� C C = `p C ° ° J O C N O d O d y W m C E t 3 0 3 C U ❑ N 2 ❑ 2 ❑ 2 2 W. 2 3 m s E U c 3 U a o o m m m o oN 0 �j o `o mU mU m � a Z a U a U U U U Q d a 0 o 0 a a a tq d -OO �° N m in Y m c 3 c 3 0 0 0 0 C_ j C a 'I> > > U q U m U ❑ U U ❑ U U U U U m U U U U ❑ ❑ ❑ m ❑ R U m ❑ m ❑ m U m m Q Q Q ❑ ❑ ❑ m Q U U ❑ U m m m m u m m Q m Q as CO m m U m m m m m m Q m of m Q Q U Q U m J Q Q Q ¢ Q Q Q Q Q ¢ Q Q Q Q Q E # # # # # # # # # # C C# i0 # (N(pp d N m m N i0 0 IEaD 01 Of p� 0 0 0 N N 0 m 2 2 2 Y Y Y Y a � m m mm 0 00 . O m m a N N m N m d C Q Y � C d � LL N � Lead Containing Paint Handling Document No. 21631 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 13 F. Contaminated Debris: In particular, the Contractor shall separate, label and containerize the following: 1. Components with LCP (except for metal components, See Section 3.07) and Paint Fragments 2. HEPA vacuum contents, filters, body suits, and respirator cartridges; paint chips or other abatement debris on plastic should always be HEPA vacuumed prior to picking up the plastic. G. Polyethylene Sheeting: The Contractor shall clean surfaces and equipment and containerize large debris. Prior to removing any sheeting, the Contractor shall lightly mist the sheeting in order to keep dust down, and remove and containerize any debris and fold the sheeting inward to contain debris and to form tight bundles to containerize for disposal. The Contractor shall place all plastic sheeting in six-mil polyethylene bags, and seal. H. Liquid waste: The Contractor shall contain and properly dispose of liquid waste, including lead- contaminated wash water. I. Approval of Disposal Facilities: The Contractor shall submit to the Owner the manner and locations of any disposal facilities or transporters to be used for the transportation and disposal of lead-containing waste or hazardous waste. Information shall be provided to the Engineer or Owner at least 10 business days prior to the planned commencement of any waste shipments. The Owner reserves the right to reject any facility or hauler if appropriate licenses,permits and certification cannot be demonstrated. J. Waste Manifests: The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of any manifests necessary for the disposal of project-related hazardous wastes. The Owner will only sign a manifest or manifests for project-related hazardous wastes defined as those wastes present at the site of project initiation. Disposal of any hazardous wastes generated by the Contractor shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 3.08 RECYCLING OF METAL COMPONENTS A. General.: The Contractor shall not dispose of LCP painted metal components as construction waste. Instead, the Contractor shall send these materials to a scrap :recycling facility. Provide proof of transfer of these materials to the Owner. B. Storage Requirements: Metal components shall be kept inaccessible to persons other than Contractor personnel. This waste shall be kept segregated from non-metal,painted materials. Lead Containing Paint Handling- Document No. 21631 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 12 and debris shall be accomplished with a HEPA vacuum or wet methods. The debris shall be misted with water with an airless type sprayer and collected with a mop or broom. C. Dust wipe sampling, reinspections, and Post Abatement Compliance; Letters will be performed and prepared by a Licensed Lead Inspector or Risk Assessor in accordance with 454 CMR 460.000 and applicable guidance documents. These services must be performed by a third party not affiliated with the General Contractor or Deleading Contractor. 3.07 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL A. General: The Contractor shall contact the regional EPA, State and local authorities to determine disposal requirements for construction and demolition debris that contains lead containing paint coated debris. The requirements of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) shall be complied with as well as applicable state solid waste plan requirements. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to separately handle debris which has been identified as possible hazardous waste by virtue of TCLP Lead results greater than 5 parts per million and store these components in a secure, lined dumpster. It is recommended that representative samples be taken by the contractor of the suspected waste stream, prior to the commencement of work for analysis by TCLP. This will allow for the separation of hazardous waste from suspected non-hazardous waste as the waste is being generated. B. Storage Requirements: Any items found to be hazardous by way of testing shall be kept in a secured area or lockable container that is inaccessible to all persons other than abatement personnel. All hazardous waste shall be labeled"Hazardous Waste", and include the date that the Contractor began to collect waste in that container. Hazardous and non-hazardous waste shall be kept in totally and completely separate containers. C. Disposal Packaging: Any hazardous or potentially hazardous waste shall be stored in US Department of Transportation (DOT) approved containers and properly labeled and stored in a secure manner. D. Waste Transportation: The Contractor shall employ a Massachusetts DEP, US DEP, EPA certified Hazardous Waste Transporter for the disposal of hazardous wastes. E. Cleaning Materials: The Contractor will place disposable cleaning :materials in six-mil plastic bags if, after testing,those materials are determined to be hazardous waste. Lead Containing Paint Handling Document No. 21631 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 11 3.04 WORK PROCEDURES A. General: These procedures detail generalities of component work procedures. Resulting bundles of "containers" of removed components and/or debris shall be carefully handled to reduce the potential of ripping, bursting or otherwise diminishing the integrity of the bundle or "container". Care must be taken so that leaded materials are neither burned, nor dusted, nor result in further exposure to workers, residents or observers. Paint chips shall be contained either in the HEPA vacuum or in approve six-mil polyethylene disposal bags. B. Adequate environmental controls shall be used to contain or cont.Tol the release of airborne concentrations of LCP or materials with LCP. 3.05 AIR SAMPLING-CONTRACTOR A. Personal Exposure Monitoring: When work practices may cause disturbance of LCP potentially resulting in airborne concentrations of lead at or above the Action Level, the Contractor shall perform personal exposure sampling to monitor personal exposure levels to airborne lead. Samples shall be taken for the duration of the work shift or for eight hours, whichever is greater. Personal samples need not be taken every day after the first day if working conditions remain unchanged, but must be taken every time there is a change in the removal operation, either in terms of the location or the type of work. Sampling will be used to determine eight-hour Time- Weighted-Averages (TWA). The Contractor is responsible for personal sampling as outlined in OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1926.62. Air sampling results shall be transmitted to the Owner and individual workers available at the job site in written form no more than forty-eight (48) hours after the completion of a sampling cycle. The reporting document shall list each sample's result sampling time and date, personnel monitored and their social security numbers, flow rate, sample duration, sample yield, cassette size, and the analysts' name and company, and shall include an interpretation of the results. Air sample analysis results will be reported in micrograms/cubic meter B. Laboratory: The Contractor's testing lab shall be AMA accredited for heavy metals. Contractor shall submit for the Owner's review and acceptance the name and address of the laboratory, certification(s) of AIHA, accreditation for heavy metal analysis, listing of relevant experience in air lead analysis, and presentation of a documented Quality Assurance and Quality Control program. C. Frequency: Air monitoring frequency will be established in accordance with the requirements set forth in 29 CFR 1926.62. 3.06 CLEAN-UP PROCEDURES AND CLEARANCE A. When work in progress, the work site shall be cleaned at end of each day's activities. The building shall be secured to prevent entry by any person after termination of work day. Durable equipment, such as power and hand tools, generators, and vehicles shall be cleaned monthly. B. Equipment shall be cleaned by HEPA vacuuming. Surfaces shall. be maintained as free as practicable of accumulations of lead containing dust and debris. Clean-up lead containing dust Lead Containing Paint Handling Document No. 21631 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 10 American National Standard(ANSI) Publications: A288.20-80 Practices for Respiratory Protection C. Signage: Prior to the preparation for work which will disturb lead containing paint, the Contractor shall place warning signs immediately outside all entrances and exists to the area, warning that deleading work is being conducted in the vicinity. The signs shall be at least 20"x 14"and read: WARNING LEAD WORK AREA POISON NO SMOKING,EATING OR DRINKING ALLOWED IN TIME WORK AREA The signs shall be in bold lettering not smaller than two inches tall. Should personal exposure monitoring results indicate that exposures to lead are below the Action Level, then signs will not be required. D. Access to Work Areas: It will be the Contractor's responsibility to allow only authorized personnel into the work area. Barrier tape shall be used to limit access to exterior work area. Contractor shall maintain a bound log book in which any person entering or leaving the lead work area must sign and enter the dates and times of entry and departure. Should personal exposure results indicate the exposures to lead are below the Action Level, then a log book will not be required. The Contractor or competent person will not allow anyone access to the work area unless they have successfully passed an approved training program, and have been fitted and wearing a properly fitted respirator. Dumpsters used to store hazardous waste shall be DOT approved, solid enclosed containers and locked and secured at all times. The location shall be designated by the Owner. E. Decontamination Unit: The Contractor shall construct a three-stage decontamination unit if the PEL is exceeded. This unit shall be in the vicinity of the work area for the decontamination of workers contained with lead. The decontamination unit shall consist of an equipment room, dirty room, and wash area in series. The Contractor shall ensure that employees enter and exist the work area through this unit. F. Exterior Work: For exterior work, the Contractor shall prepare the area as follows: 1. Plants and Ground: The ground and any plants or shrubs in the area in which exterior work is occurring shall be covered with a minimum of 6 mil poly sheeting; and weighted at all edges as to prevent blowing. Such covering shall cover the side of the structure to a point at least twelve (12) feet away from the structure. The covering shall be taped or otherwise attached to the structure. 2. The sheeting shall always be in a manner that traps all debris and water. This is best accomplished by elevating the edges. The waterproof canvas tarp shall be properly disposed of and not re-used. Lead Containing Paint Handling Document No. 21631 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 9 exposures at below the PEL at which time the Contractor has the option to continue to or discontinue the use of personal hygiene facilities. These practices shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. No eating, drinking, smoking, or applying of cosmetics in work area. The Contractor will provide a clean space, separated from the work area, for these activities. 2. Workers must wash upon leaving the work area. Wash facilities will be provided by the Contractor. This wash facility will consist of, at least, running potable water, towels, and a HEPA vacuum. Upon leaving the work area, each worker will remove and dispose of work suit,wash and dry face and hands, and vacuum clothes. 3. Disposable clothing, such as TYVEK suits, and other personal protective equipment (PPE) must be donned prior to entering work area. A clean room will be provided for workers to put on suites and other personal protective equipment and to store their street clothes. Disposable suits shall be used once, then property discarded. 4. A lavatory facility must be provided and located adjacent to the work area. The eating and drinking area, clean room, and the lavatory must be maintained in a clean and orderly fashion at all times. The Contractor will provide portable lavatories when needed and disinfect them daily. 5. If air monitoring data gathered by the Contractor shows that employees' exposure to airborne lead exceeds 50 µg/m3,the following conditions apply: a. Showers must be provided. Shower water must pass through at least a 5.0 micron filter before returning to the public waste system. b. Workers must shower upon leaving work area. c. Three-stage decontamination unit must be established consisting of an Equipment Room, Shower, and Clean Room in series. 3.03 WORK AREA SETUP A. Site Safety: The Contractor is responsible for all safety at the work site. This includes, but is not limited to, electrical safety, mechanical (tool) safety, fire safety, and personnel protective safety. Safety requirements are, for the most part, common sense and sound business practice; however, the Contractor is advised that federal, state, and local regulations exist which govern safety on the work site. Therefore, in addition to the following, the Contractor is responsible for adhering to the most stringent requirements if effect. B. Safety Regulations: The following area applicable Federal Regulations. Occupational Safety and Health Administration 29 CFR 1926 Construction Industry Standards Lead Containing Paint Handling Document No. 21631 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 8 2. REMOVAL METHOD • The surface shall be thoroughly wetted to minimized dust generation. Periodically re-wet the surface necessary during scraping. • Scrap all loose and peeling paint from the surface so that any remaining paint is intact and well adhered. • Scraped paint shall be contained on the disposable drop cloths. The CONTRACTOR shall prevent the removed paint from contaminating the surrounding floor or soil. 3. CLEAN-UP • Vacuum all interior surfaces exposed to deleading with a HEPA filtered vacuum. • Mop or wash said surfaces with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate(TSP). • Re-vacuum said surfaces with a HEPA vacuum. • Dispose of all plastic/drop cloths/PPE, cleaning supplies, etc. in accordance with this specification 3.02 WORKER PROTECTION A. Initial Determination: The Contractor shall determine, through personal exposure monitoring on the job site or through relevant documentation from other similar jobs, where workers will be exposed to airborne lead at or above the OSHA Action Level and Permissible Exposure Limit. If exposure at or above the action level are documented, appropriate health and safety procedures identified herein shall be followed. If levels below the action level are documented, the Contractor shall exercise and appropriate level of care to ensure that exposures above the action level do not occur. Whenever there is a chance of equipment, process, control, personnel or a new task has been initiated that may result in additional employees being exposed to lead'.at or above the action level or may result in employees already exposed at or above the action level being exposed above the PEL, the Contractor shall conduct additional monitoring. B. Biological Monitoring: Until a negative initial determination is achieved, any worker has the potential of lead exposure must have baseline blood level screening; determined by the whole blood lead method, utilizing Vena-Puncture technique. This test must be performed before workers re-enters a lead contaminated work area. A worker will be removed from the job if his blood level is 40 µg/dl or greater. The Contractor shall be responsible for medical surveillance and record keeping. C. Personal Hygiene Practices: Where exposures to airborne lead above the OSHA PEL occur or may be expected to occur, the Contractor shall enforce and follow good personal hygiene practices. These practices shall be performed until personal exposure sampling indicates that Lead Containing Paint Handling Document No. 21631 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 7 2. REMOVAL METHOD • The CONTRACTOR shall properly remove lead paint materials being careful not to disturb this paint beyond the restricted area. • The CONTRACTOR shall collect all waste materials including wipes, PPE, paint chips and water,etc. either by a HEPA filter vacuum or into 6 mil polyethylene bags. • The CONTRACTOR's workers shall fully decontaminate themselves before removing protective equipment. 3. CLEAN-UP • Maintain surfaces of lead control area free of accumulations of paint chips and dust. Restrict the spread of dust and debris; keep waste from being distributed over the work area. When the paint or component removal operation has been completed, clean the area of visible lead paint by vacuuming with HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner, sweeping, etc. and washing all surfaces and equipment used in the lead removal operations with a cleaning solution. • Final inspection shall be performed only after all waste is packaged and removed, but before dismantling any barrier, decontamination facility, or protective covering. Cleaning shall be subject to the approval of the Lead Inspector and shall be based on a visual inspection. At a minimum, the clean up shall be to a level of no visual debris. The facilitate scheduling of inspections, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER and CONSULTANT ENGINEER of the anticipated completion of the component removal 48 hours in advance. • If the Lead Inspector finds that the level of cleaning is unacceptable, the CONTRACTOR shall perform additional cleaning and decontamination, and the above inspection and tests shall be repeated. • If the inspection is acceptable, the OWNER or LEAD INSPECTOR shall give approval for the CONTRACTOR to remove all protective coverings which comprise part of the work area seal,protective cover, or decontamination facility. • Workers shall wear approved respiratory and personal protective equipment throughout the cleaning, component removal and waste disposal activities. C. WET SCRAPING(including making surface intact) 1. WORK ARE PREPARATION • Work area preparation shall be the same as that required in Section C, to the extent applicable. Lead Containing Paint Handling Document No. 21631 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 6 The minimum respiratory protection required for this project is as follows: 1. Negative pressure, half mask, air purifying respirators, equipped with HEPA filters initially and for airborne lead dust levels not in excess of 500 µg/m3 (10 X PEL). 2. Full face piece, air purifying respirator, with HEPA filters for airborne dust levels not in excess of 2,500 µg/m3 (50 X PEL). 3. Pressure demand, full face, supplied air respirators for airborne lead dust concentrations are expected to meet or exceed 50,000 µg/m3 (1000 X PEL). Workers inside the work area will wear the proper respirator for the: lead dust level generated. Workers must be properly trained in the care, use, and maintenance of respirators. A formal respiratory protection program must be implemented in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.103. Respirators will not be removed until the worker enters the washing area of the decontamination chamber. PART 3.0 EXECUTION SCOPE OF WORK A. Identified LBP components shall be entirely removed as detailed in the enclosed Lead Inspection Report forms. Unidentified or inaccessible components will be asswned to contain LBP unless proven otherwise. B. COMPONENT REMOVAL 1. WORK AREA PREPARATION • Openings in floors, walls and ceilings within the controlled area shall be sufficiently taped or plugged. • A waterproof surface consisting of 6 mil polyethylene or equivalent shall be placed around the surface impacted and for 12 feet away from the surface. These coverings shall be taped or staked to secure them to the ground or floor and pitched so that water runoff does not occur. • All air vents and hatches within the controlled area shall be sealed with 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. • If roof edge is less than 12 feet from the removal area, then subsequent controls shall be extended for an aggregate of 12 feet at ground level. • Any plants within 12 feet from the removal area shall be sealed with 6 mil polyethylene sheeting. • All entrances to the buildings just below the removal area shall be blocked and appropriate signage shall be used to prohibit entry or exit. Lead Containing Paint Handling Document No. 21631 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 5 2. Department of Environmental Protection, Massachusetts Hazardous Materials Regulation at 310 CMR 30.00. 3. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration Title 29 CFR 1926.62. Regulations by the above and other governing agencies in their most current version are applicable throughout this project. Where there is a conflict between this Specification and the cited federal, state or local regulations or guidelines, the more restrictive or stringent requirements shall prevail. This section refers to may requirements found in these references,but in no way is it intended to cite or reiterate all provisions therein or elsewhere. It is the Contractor's responsibility to know, understand, and abide by all such,regulations, guidelines and common practices. PART 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING A. Coveralls (whole body protective coverings): Disposable full-body coverall and disposable head covers shall be worn by all workers exposed to LCP in the work area until exposure monitoring results indicate exposures to be below the PEL at which time the Contractor has the option to continue or discontinue the use of coveralls. Sleeved shall be secured at the wrist and pant leg at the ankle with tape. In heat-stress conditions, breathable clothing, such as cotton coveralls, shall be provided. Where non-disposable coveralls are provided, these coveralls shall be cleaned after each wearing. Cleaning of coveralls and other non-disposable clothing shall be in accordance to the provision for cleaning in 29 CFR 1926.62. B. Boots: Work boots with non-skid soles shall be worn by all workers and where required by OSHA, safety boots (Steel toe or steel tow and shank) shall be worn. C. Other Items: Whatever other items of protective clothing and safety equipment are required, shall be provided by the Contractor, including but not limited to goggles, ]heavy gloves, hard hats and protective clothing. D. Pumps and Filters: Personal sampling pumps, and filter cassettes shall be provided by the Contractor to carry out the air monitoring program. E. Respiratory Protection: The Contractor shall provide workers, foremen, and superintendent exposed to LCP in the work area a minimum of properly fitted half-face respirators approved by NIOSH and MSHA. These respirators shall be worn until personal exposure sampling indicates that exposures are below the PEL at which time the Contractor has the option to continue or discontinue the use of respirators. Authorized visitors (i.e. Federal, State, and Local inspectors) must provide current health and medical report certifying them as approved to wear half-face respirators. When respirators and disposable filters are employed, sufficient replacement filters will be provided by the Contractor for the workers and any visitors. Lead Containing Paint Handling Document No. 21631 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 4 C. Specified Supervisor Qualifications: The Contractor shall specify an on-site Supervisor or Competent Person who is fully qualified in all aspects of safe work practices and procedures with lead containing materials, and have (or will have) completed a training course within the previous year prior to the commencement of lead related work. The lead training course will cover all topics required by 29 CFR 1926.62 as well as training in relevant federal, state and local, regulations, requirements, procedures and standards (including 454. CMR 10.00), supervisory techniques, and proper disposal procedures. D. Site Specific Written Compliance Program: The program will be evaluated to ensure the elements required by 29 CFR 1926.26 (e)(2)(11) (A)-(I) are specified to the conditions at the job site. E. Respiratory Protection Program. The contractor must provide for review a written respiratory protection program in accordance with 29 CFR 1920.103 if respiratory protection is to be worn during this project. F. Fit Test Records: If respiratory protection is to be worn as part of this project, records of successful respirator fit testing performed by a qualified individual within the previous six months, for each employee to be used on this project with the employee's name and social security number with each record. G. Medical Surveillance: The Contractor shall provide biological monitoring to workers who have the potential of a lead exposure above the Action Level. This monitoring shall be performed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62. If workers are expected to exceed the action level for more than 30 days in consecutive 12 months of the contractor shall institute a medical surveillance program in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62. Blood lead sampling and analysis shall be conducted by a laboratory approved by OSHA. H. Analytical Laboratory: The name and address of Contractor's Analytical Laboratory(for analysis of personal air samples)including certification(s) of AIHA accreditation for heavy metal analysis. 1.08 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Work shall conform to the standards set by applicable federal, state and local laws, regulations, ordinances, and guidelines in such form in which they exist at the time of the work on the contract and as may be required by subsequent regulations. B. This project is subject to compliance with 29 CFR 1926.62, and 29 CFR Part 1926, "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction." C. In addition to any detailed requirements of the Specifications, the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of federal, state, regional, and local authorities regarding handling and storing of lead waste material. D. At a minimum, to be in full compliance with all aspects of the following regulations: 1. MADPH Lead Program Regulations (See 1.02,A) Lead Containing Paint Handling Document No. 21631 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 3 Contractor shall be responsible for costs for licensing requirements and notification requirements and other fees related to the ability to perform the work in this Section. The Contractor shall be responsible for securing necessary permits for work under this Section, including removal, materials usage, or any other permits required to perform the specified work. C. Post Deleading Reinspections: The contractor shall pay for reinspections, dust wipe sampling, and Post Abatement Compliance Letters. Reinspection will be performed in accordance with 454 CMR 460.000. The cost of additional reinspections as a result of failed dust wipe sampling results or visual clearance will also be born by the contractor. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Pre-Construction Submittals: Prior to the commencement of the required work, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with copies of the following: 1. Copies of certifications,notifications and all applicable licenses. 2. Written Respirator and Hazardous Communications Programs 3. Copy of Training, Fit Test and Medical Surveillance Records, as applicable 4. Written Lead Compliance Program in accordance with OSHA 29 C:FR 1926.62. 5. Name and qualifications of bidder's chosen laboratory for personnel exposure monitoring, subject to Owner's approval. 6. Any additional information required by the Owner or Designer. B. Post-Construction Submittals: Final payment to the Contractor shall not be made unless the following items are submitted to the Owner. 1. Original Copy of the Waste Disposal Manifests acknowledging disposal of hazardous and non-hazardous waste material from the project showing delivery date, quantity, and appropriate signature of landfill's authorized representative. 2. Copy of Personal Air Sample Results 3. Original Bound Log Book. 4. Deleading Certification Statement 1.07 QUALITY CONTROL/ASSURANCE A. Licensing Requirements: Workers must be licensed as a Lead-Safe Renovator or as a Deleading Contractor and appropriate Deleading supervisors and workers with MA DLWD/DOS for Moderate and High Risk deleading activities. Workers performing Low Risk deleading activities must be authorized by MADPH. B. Training Requirements: Workers who will or may have the potential of lead exposure above the Action Level shall have proof of successfully completing a training; course which covers the topics required by 29 CFR 1926.62. Contractors are also advised that training in other areas may be required and are responsible to ensure that all training requirements for appropriate trades and procedures are met. Lead Containing Paint Handling Document No. 21631 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 2 E. Disposal: The Contractor shall dispose of the scraped paint and demolition debris in accordance with the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and Massachusetts Solid Waste disposal requirements. Once generated, painted wastes do not have to be characterized for hazardous waste by the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedures prior to disposal. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Action Level: Action level as defined by OSHA 29 CFR 1926.62 shall refer to employee exposure without regard to the use of respirators, to an airborne concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air (30 gg/m3) calculated as an 8-hour-time-weighted average (TWA). B. Competent Person. Competent Person shall referred to a person who is capable of identifying existing and predictable lead hazards in the surroundings or working conditions and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. C. HEPA filter. HEPA filter shall refer to a filter capable of filtering out monodispersive particles of 0.3 microns or greater diameter from a body of air at 99.97 percent efficiency or greater. D. Lead Based Paint(LBP). LBP shall referred to a dangerous level of lead in paint as defined by> 1.2 mg/cm2 or as defined by MADPH. E. Lead Containing Paint(LCP). LCP shall refer to paint found to contain lead in any concentration or paint assumed to contain lead. F. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL): PEL shall refer to employee exposure, without regard to the use of respirators, to an airborne concentration of lead of 50 micrograms per cubic meter of air (50 gg/m3) calculated as an 8 hour time-weighted-average. 1.05 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A. Notifications/Approvals: The Contractor shall make, it proper and tirnely fashion, any necessary notifications to relevant Federal, State, and local authorities and shall obtain and comply with the provisions of all permits or applications required by the work specified, as well as make all required submittals required under those auspices. The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner, their representatives and agents from, and pay for claims resulting from failure to adhere to these provisions. The costs for permits, applications, and the like, are to be assumed by the Contractor. B. Fees, Permits and Licenses: Contractor shall pay licensing fees, royalties, and other costs necessary for the use of any copyrighted or patented product, design, invention, or processing the performance of the job specified in this Section. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for costs, damages or losses resulting from any infringement of these patent rights or copyrights. The Contractor shall hold the Owner and Project Designer harmless from any costs, damages, and losses resulting from any infringement of these patent rights or copyrights. If the Specification requests the use of the product, design, invention, or process that requires a licensing fee or royalty fee for use in the performance of the job, the Contractor shall be responsible for the fee or royalty and shall disclose the existence of such rights. Lead Containing Paint Handling Document No. 21631 37 Franklin Street January, 2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 1 SECTION 02090 LEAD CONTAINING PAINT HANDLING. PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Supplemental Instructions, General Provisions, and other divisions apply to the work of this section. 1.02 LEAD BASED PAINT SURVEY A. A comprehensive lead paint inspection was conducted by Environmental Compliance Services, Inc. (ECS) on June 22, 2001in accordance with the Massachusetts Department of Public Health (MADPH), Lead Poisoning, Prevention and Control Regulations (105 CMR 460.000). Painted or coated building materials were tested in the field for the presence of lead with the use of an x-ray florescence (XRF) spectrum analyzer. B. The Lead Inspection Report forms, Lead-Based Paint Summary—Table 1, and Lead-Based Paint Abatement Summary—Table 2 are enclosed with this Section. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The contractor is responsible for compliance with all aspects of the new Lead Poisoning Prevention and Control regulations effective July 20, 2001, Deleading Regulations 454 CMR 22.00 effective July 23, 1999, and Occupational Lead Poisoning 454 CMR 23.00 effective September 1, 1993. The goal of this project is to properly remove, LBP components. If any components were not identified due to inaccessibility, these components shall be presumed to contain LBP. B. General. The contractor is responsible for compliance with OSHA Lead in Construction Regulation 1926.62 and this section if one of the below activities is performed during the specified roof restoration. OSHA regulates activities which disturb the lead paint by the use of manual techniques. Regulated activities include abrasive blasting, welding, cutting burning on structures, manual scraping or sanding, and manual demolition of structures. The work practices described in the following sections are intended to adequately protect the workers from exposure to lead containing paint (LCP), provide a safe workplace, and protect the environment. C. Materials and Equipment. The work of this Section, without limiting the generality thereof, includes the furnishing of labor, materials, tools, equipment, services and incidentals necessary to safely accomplish tasks which will disturb lead containing paint. D. Approval and Inspections. Temporary facilities, work procedures, equipment, materials, services, and agreements must fully comply with EPA, OSHA, and.NIOSH recommendations, standards and guidelines, as well as any other applicable federal, state and local regulations. Where there exists an overlap of these regulations and guidelines, the most stringent shall apply. Sen= 8y: ; 9324857; Jan-3-02 12:29; Page 212 ProScience Analytical Services„ Inc Client l: 110 Batch: B 12056 Chant Project: 1430$ Date Sampled: N/A Client Reference: 37 Franklln St., Northampton Date Received; 9/3/2002 Client Name: Envlronmental Compliance Services, Inc- Date Analyzed: 1/3/2002 Method: EPA/600/R-93/116 Date of Report: 1/0/2002 ASBESTOS LYON- SAT LAB[D !Arta)ID (valor CUR AMn CFtU ACT THE ANtow�G �&N �L HAR SYIN OTH NUN RI 15556 Exi. 2 Gra 3U 0 0 0 0 4 0 4 0 0 0 70 Description Transits-Like Siding Location: Extartor Comments Analyzed: Yes Asbestos Codes: CHR=Cbrysohlc AM4=Atmasite C:RO=Cmcidolite ACT=Actinolite TR.L-Trcmohtc A,YT'=Anthophyllits Non-Asbestos Codes: FDC=Fiberglass NINW—Mineral Wuul Ct L-Cellulose HAR—hair SYN=Synthgtip 0TH=Qther NON=Non-Fibrous Minerals *till f8 its 8 Pt GA C h ehnel Manning,Analyst Page 1 of 1 ProSe ence Analytical Services Inc Chris Godfrey January 03, 2002 Environmental Compliance Services, Inc. 588 Silver Street Agawam, MA 01001 Dear Chris Godfrey, The enclosed analytical results have been obtained by using the EPA/600/R-931116 method. The "Visual Estimate" quantitative method is generally used for determining the percentage of asbestos and other Components of the sample. "The Point Counting" method may also be used upon client request or at the analyst discretion. The Point Count method is usually recommended when the sample contains less than 101% asbestos by Visual estimate. Asbestos content less than 1% is recorded on the report as TR(trace). The Quality Control data related to the samples analyzed is available upon Client's written request. ProScience Analytical Services inc., assumes no responslbiiity for potential sample contamination that may have occurred during the sample collection process or erroneous data provided by the client. The enclosed results may not be used under any circumstances as product endorsement by any US government agency including NIST/NVLAP. All Laboratory records are retained for at least three years unless otherwise: directed in.writing by the ciisnt. The actual samples are retained for a period of three months and written request is nemssary in order to be retained for a longer period of time. All analytical results and records are considered strictly confidentlal and will not t)e released under any circumstances to anyone except the actual client. The analytical results included in this report apply only to the items toasted. If you have any questions please contact the Laboratory Manager or the Laboratory Director. Sincerely, Valerica Stance, Qp6ctal Asbestos Manager Adrian Stanca, Laboratory Director Enclosure: LAB BATCH ID: 8 12056 CLIENT PROJECT ID: 14308 Client#: 110 NVLAP 10#200090-0; CT ID# PH-0209; MA 10#AA000155; ME ID# 1-15-05;a; ME IN LA-056; AIWA IQ# 102754; VT ID#AL016876; PH ID#216(TEM,PLM); FLAP ID# 11632; RI ID# 186. 22 Cummings Park• Woburn, Massachusetts• 01 FOl •Phone(781)935-3212 • Fax(781)9324857 LF/$ abed -Aq ;uag Sent By: ; 9324857; Jan-3-02 12:28; Page 1 /2 ProSclence Analytical Services, Inc Client#: 110 Batch; 56925 Client Project: 14306 Date Sampled: N/A Client Refsrence: 37 Franklin,Northttampton,MA Date Received: 6125/2001 Client Name: Environmental Compliance Services,Inc. Date Analyzed: 6/2712001 Method: EPA/6001R-931116 Date of Report: 6/29/2001 A,S�ESTOS NON.1S�iBSr`OS LAB LD Field ID Color CHR A:MO CRO ACT TRE ANT C. MNW CEL HAR 5YN GM LYON B84t33 22A Green 20 LO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 80 Description bray-white transits Siding LCcatlan: Exteor,rear porch Comments AhAlyt9tf: Y95 :ASBESTOS NON-ASBESTOS LAB ID Meld Ill Color CHR AMU CRO A THE ro—T FRG MNW CK1. AR YN OTH NON BSal34 23A 81ack 0 0 0 0 0 30 0 1 5 1 0 0 1 0 65 •Dnsulptlan slack ssphalt shingle Locatlon: Roof,pose Comments Analyzed: Yes Asbestaa Codas,. CHR=Chrysatile AMO=Amosile CRO=Crucidatita ACT-Aetinolite TR F=Trcmolfte AN,r=Anthophyllite Nan-MbeSttls Codes: FBG a Fibergims MNW-Mineral Wool CF_I.=Cellulose HAR-Hair SYN-Syulbrtic IDTH=Other NON=Non-Fibrous Mincrais * A.il ragWts a in pe Mich3ti Ma�trLiiLg,Analyst. Pace 6 of 6 Sent By: ; 9324857; Jan-3-02 12:25; Page 6/11 ProScience Analytical Servicesy Inc Client#: 110 Batch: 88925 Client Project: 14308 Date Sampled. N/A Client Reference: 37 Franklin,Northhampton, MA Date Received: $12512001 Clifqnt Nam& Environmental Compliance Services,Inc. Date Analyzed: 6/27/2001 Method: EPA/600/R-931116 Date of Report: 6/29/2001 AmeSTOS NON,ASBESTOS LAR ID Field ID Color CHR AMU CRO ACT TRF ANT FBG DrtNVY CEL HA S1N R;E� 984127 18A MI.Clrs, 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 50 0 0 Desalptlon Arown with whits Acaks knolcum backing LocaEonti 2nd Floor Comments Analyzed: Yes ASBESTOS NON-ASHEST05 LAB ID Field In Color CHR AMO CRO A(T 1'RE ANT FBG ddNW Pq2 HAR ,VN OTH NON D8412$ 19A Pink 0 0.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 98 Description fink 9"x9"flMr file Locadon: Znd Floarbuthru nt CornMe Sts Analyzed: Yea AS$8J'TOS NON-ASBESTOS LAB In Flold.t.D C610r CHR A%10 CRO ACT THE ANT FBG >1dNR' CEL HAti SYV I OTH NON B94129 J 20A Black 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 40 1 0 0 1 0 60 Descriptlon 0lack aephalt shingle Lwadon; 2nd Floor roof,Icft Comments Analyzed, Yes ASBESTOS Nolv AMESTOS I.AB 10D �Zi ID Color Chit AMO CRU ACT' THE ANT PUG 1fVW (EI. HAR 9YN dTH. NON 1384130 A Tan TR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 100 Description I3cigc window glaring Location. Ist Floor band room Ccmmenta Analyzed: Yes ASBESTOS NON-ASBESTOS LAB ID Field ID Color CHR AMO CHO A(=1' THE ANT FRG OIYN' L HAR 9YN 0TH ON ti84t�'1 2V Tan 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 98 Oa4eripdon Beige window glazing Location; Ist Floor porch Comments Analyzed: Ye9 dSS�STfas NON-ASBESTOS LAB ID Field ill Color CHR av1U C1t0 ACT THE . A2171' FRO 1INW CEL HAR SYN OTH NON BU132 I 21C. Tan TR 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 100 Description Beige window glaring Lumllon: 2nd Floor bed Comments Analyzed: Yes Page 5 of 6 Sent 5y: ; 932485'; Jan-3-02 12:24; Page 5 ProScience Analytical Services, Inc Client#: 110 Eatch: S$925 Client Project: 14308 Date Sampled: NIA Client Reference: 37 Franklin,Northhampton,MA Date Received: 6/25/2001 Client Name: ;environmental Compllance Services,Inc_ hate Analyzed: 6/27/2001 Method: EPA/600/R-93/116 Date of Report: 6/29/2001 ASBESTOS NON-ASBESTOSS .1 LAS ID Field M Color CHR Ai4f0 :CRU ACT TAE: ANT FHC ?vM-W Eao EL HAR SYN ft, (YON I3gsi2t 12A MI Ctrs_ 0 0 0 Q 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 20 bosaiption Crcvtil linoleum basking Locodon: I at Fluor punch,adjut:ent w kitc:heu Comments Analyzed: Yes ASBESTOS NO*ASBF_yW S I,At3 lU Field li? Color MO ACT THE ANT F9G .'rINfV (TI, HA R SXN OTII NON 1384122 13A Mf, Glrs, 0 Q 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 0 0 0 1 30 Description Blue-brown linoleum hacking Location; Ist ploor dining rtwtn clusat Comments Analyzed: Yes ASBESTOS NO-MASSESTOS i,Ag[p Field]D Cetar C U CuU ACT THE ANT FSG ,VIIYW C-h 1_ HaR SYN OTII NON 094123 14A M1. Clrs. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 45 0 0 0 55 Deecription Cray linoleum backing Locetion: lst llxn kilchcft%,left Loia Comments Analyzed; Ya9 ASBESTOS NON-ASIRSTOS LAB ID Field M Color CHH I AMO .CRO ACT TAE ANT Flit; ,TgNW I CEL HAR SYN I OTH NCIN B8e i Z4 15A Brown 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 95 0 4 0 5 Description Whiic 1'x V cRiliile tiiu Location: tat Yhwr kitchen,left Comments Analyzad: Yes ASBESTOS NON-ASBESTOS LA$III Field ID Color CIIR AMO .CRO ACT TIZ ANT FHG MNW CEL 14AR SYN OTH NON . .... ..... .. $$4t25 16A MI,Cirs. 34 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 1 0 50 Description Green linoleum yacktng Location; t st Mor batltraem Comments Analyzed: Yes Ai N'CSTOS NON-ASBESMIS LAB ID Field II) Color CHR AMO C70 At-T TKE APiT FHG 1!.tYW CEL HAIL 9Y1Y OTH NON 118at2b 17A t Brown 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 40 0 0 0 10 Deacription (Tray blown-in Piro proofing Location: N/A Comments Analyzed: Yes Page 4 of 6 Sent By: ; 9324857; Jan-3-02 12;24; Page 4 ProScience Analytical Services, Inc Client#: 110 Batall: 88925 Client Project: 14308 Date Sampled: NIA Client Reference: 37 Franklin,Northhamptcn, MA Date Received: 0/25/2001 Client Name: Environmental Compliance Services,Inc. Date Analyzed: 6/27/2001 Method: EPNBCOIR-931118 Date of Report: 6/2912001 ASBESTOS NON-ASBESTOS LAB ID Field Ill Color CHx AMU :CRO I ACi TItE ANT FHG •M[Nw CEL HAR SYN GTli NUN B84115 07CB Grey 0 0 0 I o 0 1 0 0 4 a 10 0 0 90 Description ease Goat plaster Gvm gory-whi1C aS rn coat ptascer Location: 1s(Floor kitchen,left Comments Analyzed: Yes ASBESMS NOIi-ASBEiSTW LAD-ID meld ID Color CHIR I Ah1U 1:=ACT ACT THE I ANT FRG INW CEL BAR SYN OTH NON 884114 08A MI.Gkrs. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 60 0 0 0 40 Description Cray dimpled linoleum backing Location: )n Flour bathruum Comments Anaty ; Yes .............. ASBESTOS NON-ASB w7w ,. LAB 11) Field W Color CIIIi AMO CRO ACT THE ANT FBC: .MINw CEL IL4R SYN OTH NON Hx411'! 09A JML Clrs.1 0 I 0 0 0 -F--6--T 0 0 0 65 0 '0 0 35 Da;crlptton white-green linoleum backing l.ocapon: let Roorlci hen Comments Analysed: Yos .ASBESTOS MOIY_ASB STOS LAS ID Field ID Color CIIR AMU .CRO ACT THE ANT FBG MIN W CEL 8AR SYN OTH NON 884118 l0A white 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 98 Desalption White jointwmpamd Location: lit Floor hand room comments Analyzed: Yes ASNEST0.S NON-ASBESTOS EfRIJ Field 1D (:olor CIIR A14f0 '.CRO A(<I' t'xLr ANT FBG M:N1V C IL HAR SYN OTH NON 11A Ton 0 D : 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 90 Description Yellow VBB mastic Location: lot Floor?an try Comments Analyzer' Yes rlSBEST`OS NON-ASRESMS LAB ID Fltld ID Color CUR AMO CRO nCT THE ANT FBG M'.Nw CEL EAR SYN (YrH "t ON 684120 11$ Brown 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 95 Description Yellow VBFI mastic Location: I it Floor kitchen,ictt unit Commen# Analyzed- Yes Page 3 0f 0 Sent 9y: ; 9324857; Jan-3-02 12:24; Page 3 ProScience Analytical Services., Inc Client#: 110 Batch: 8 8925 Client Project: 14306 Date Sampled: WA Client Reference: 37 Franklin, Northhampton, MA Date Received: W2512001 Client Name: Environmental Compliance Services,Inc. Date Analyzed: 6/2712001 Method: EPAJ600/R-93/116 Date at Report: 512W2001 ISBES OS NON-ASBESTOS LAUD Field ID Color CI#1t AMO CRO ACT THE ANT FBG MANW CFA, HAR SYN I (1TH NON B84109 06; Brown 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 95 0 0 0 5 Nscription fimwn fiber board Location: l st fluor sttirwell Lntu basement Comments Analyzed: Yes ASBESTOS N N.ASBBSTAS LAS ill Field ID Color CHR AM.b C HO AC.7 THE AANT FBG 141NW CEL HAR�SYN OTH NON �eatlo 07A5 White 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 98 Dos&ptlon Gray-white skim coat plaster Location: lst Flvvr awir++.:ll from b;wment Comments Analyzed: Yes .ASBESTOS LYON-ASBST(?S LAB ID Feld ID Color CHR AMU CRO ACT THE ANT FBG !KIN W CEL HAR SYN OTH . NON A84111 07AB Grey 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 1 0 1 95 Description Banc coal plaster from gray-white skim cost pla9tt:r �pcatlon: Ist Floor stairwell from basement Comments Analyzed: Yes ASBESTOS NON-ASBESTOS 1 >H tD Field ID Color �_T CHMO :t Q ACT THE AIV'I` FBC ?i4NW CEL fIAR 5YN OTH NON B84112 0783 white 0 0 0 0 0 Q 0 0 TR 0__L 0 1 P 140 Description Gay-white skim catt pl"tcr Location: 2nd Flour {i4ftlrrletnts Analyzed: Yes ASBESTOS NONvl31iEST05 L AA tI) Field M Color CFtH AM ;ISO ACT THE ANT FRG A4N W CEL HAIL �SIYIN OTH NON 0789 Gra 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ei8�ti1 0 0 5 0 95 Description Base coat plaster loom gray•white skint coat plaster L=lon: Ind Floor Comments Analyzed: Yes AsaESro�s NON-ASBESTOS LAD ID Field ID C:ulor C1IH AMO CRO ACT THE ANT FHG LINWI 7CEL HA R SYN OTH NON 07C8 White 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 Description Gray-white skim coal plaswT Lrcauon: is[Floor kitchcn,tell Comments Analyzed,. Yes Paget 2 of 6 MW Sent 6y: ; 9324857; Jan-3-02 12;23; Page 2 ProScience Analytical Services,, Inc Client#_ 110 Bstch: B 9925 Client Project: 14306 Date Sampled: N/A Client Reference: 37 Franklin,Northhampton, MA Dote Received: 6/2512001 Client Name: Environmental Compliance Services. Inc. Date Analyzed: 6/27/2001 Method: EPA1600/R-931116 (?ate of Report: 6129/2001 ASBESTOS NON-AS007M I.AR ID F181d ID Color CIIR u1i0 CRO I ACI' I TILE I ANT F11 NNW CEL !AR SYN I ()TH I NON 1334103 01A MI. Cirs.1 0 1. 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 45 1 U 1 0 1 0 1 55 De3Crlpti0n Baiga Lila puttum liuuleurn backing LOCMIOW Basement Comments Analyzed: Yes iSBESTOS NON-ASBESTOS LAH ID Field 11) Color CHR AMO CRO ACT THE ANT FHG MW CEL HAR SYN ()TH NOIN B84104 02A Grey 0 0 0 0 L 0 1 0 0 0 ? 0 0 0 1 98 0asar1pdan rKay flue-ins Location: basement,right Side chimney Comments Analyzed: Yes ASBESTOS NON-AS B OS LAD M Field ID Cvior CHR AMO CRO ACT TMF AN FBG M,NW ('ICL HAR SYN OTH NON x�4los 028. Grey 0 0 0 0 0 a a o 2 0 0 0 913 Doscriptlon Gray flue ins Location: Lett sit1,;-;bii)uLCy Comments Analyzed: Yes ASBSSTUS NON-ASBESTOS U3 ED Field ID Color C14R AIM CRO ACT TRK kN FBG M1tW CEL IIAR SYN ()TH NON 77177 1584106 03A Grey 10 U 0 0 0 0 0 Q 0 0 0 0 90 Description Oray builar motor packing Locabon: ➢asenVnt,old FHAbuiler Comments Analyzed: Yes ASBESTOS NOfY•ASBFSTC75 LAK ED Field 11) Color 011R AMO CRO I ACT THE ANT FOG [!qo -tsjo(I'L HAIR P90 OTH NON stsa101 04A Brown 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 85 D"Oriptton White boiler bluck Location: Dusement,old FHA Comments Analyzed: Yes ASBESTOS NON-,ASBESTOS LAB ID Field ID (dolor CHR Af CRC) ACl' THE I ANT FBG M1Y CEI. MAR 3Y'N OTS NON B1841 Mt 05A Grey 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 30 0 0 0 70 Description (iraygypsunlboard LcCatlen� Rasemcnt Comments Analyzed: Yes Page t Of 8 Sent 8y: ; 9324857; Jan-3-02 12:23; Page 1 fAy- Number of pages including cover shoot TO, l V, FROM. F"roScience-Anavicai Services, Inc. 22 Cummings Park Woburn, MA.01801 Sender: �rlC�Icf�, I yyJ�1417 Phone Fax Phone Phone 781-935-3212 Fax Phone 78.1-932-4857 CC: REMARKS: Urjnett. Q.. For your roviow ,. [} Roply ASAF' Q Pleaso Comment vti5 P V�,V l d 4 � ' �rA�G� •.• �?Qf't�v. �'f '( Yr�f� �/ � v �Y✓��, The documents accompanying the FAX transmission contain information which is Eonfldentlal or privileged.The ir1fortn2tion is Intended for the use of the Individual or entity named on this transmission sheet.if you are not the Intended recepient,be aware that any disclosure,copying,distribution or use of the cdntOnt$ of this FAX information Is prohlbited,IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED THIS FAX IN ERROR,PLEASE CALL(7$1)935-3212. Table 1 Page 1 of 1 Materials Tested Positive for Asbestos 37 Franklin Street Northampton,Massachusetts Sample ID# Sample Collection Location Approximate Description PLM Result Condition Quantity 03A Old Forced Hot Air Boler 5 SF TSI boiler motor packing 10%Chrysotile Fair 16A 1st floor bathroom 12 SF Green linolum flooring 30%Chrysotile Good EXT-1 Exterior '150 SF Transite like siding material 30%Chrysotile Good Notes: SF=Square Feet LF=Linear Feet Observations were limited to accessible areas,non-destructive sampling was performed. This table lists only materials containing 1%or greater asbestos. All materials sampled are detailed in sample logs. =Estimated quantity that may be disturbed during renovation project. Actual quantity is estimated at approximately 2,500 SF,only limited observations of this material was made as it is located under vinyl siding. Window glazing compound did contain a trace concentration<1%asbestos through confirmatory TEM analysis. All quantities represented are estimations and should be verified with the abatement contractor prior to abatement. Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No. 21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 28 concentration of the five outside containment air samples and average asbestos concentration of the three field blanks is below the filter background level of 70 structures per square millimeter (70 s/mm). Not meeting the above TEM air clearance criteria shall require the Abatement Contractor to reclean the designated worksite followed by a repeat of the final clearance testing. Cleaning and testing will be repeated until the TEM air clearance criteria is complied with. All TEM final clearance samples shall require minimum volume of 1,200 liters,but should not exceed 1,800 liters. B. Methods of Measurement: All determination of airborne concentration of asbestos fibers during the project will be made by the membrane filter method using phase contrast illumination and 400-45OX magnification, with sample mounted in high viscosity solution of membrane filter material in accordance with NIOSH P & CAM 239 and 7400 Methods, USEPA document 600-4- 85-049 (Nov. 1995) and USEPA publication 560/5-85-024 (June 1984). Final air clearance testing to be performed by TEM analytical methods shall be analyzed in accordance with Appendix A of USEPA 40 CFR 763 Subpart E. C. Posting of Air Sample Results: Air sampling results will be posted no more than 24 hours after the completion of a sampling cycle. The document shall list each sample's results, sampling time and date, exact location of where it was taken, flow rate, microscope field area, fields counted and cassette size. Air sample analysis will be reported in fibers per cubic centimeter. Samples shall have a chain of custody record. END OF SECTION Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No. 21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 27 1. Background Samples: Air samples (as necessary) will be taken to represent conditions before the Abatement Contractor starts masking and sealing operations. At least two samples may be taken inside each proposed regulated area. These area samples shall require enough volume of air to assure a lower detectable limit of no greater than 0.005 fibers/cc. 2. Area Samples During Removal: During removal area samples may be collected outside major openings, at the discharge of negative air filtration units, in the clean room, at other critical points outside the work areas. Furthermore the Project Monitor may take samples as necessary to monitor and document air quality outside of the asbestos worksites and/or upwind and downwind during asbestos related work with at lease one location between the work area occupied portions of the sate. Outside containment samples shall require sufficient volume of air to assure a lower detectable limit of 0.005 fiber/cc by the NIOSH 7400 Method. 3. Post-abatement Clearance Air Monitoring: Post Abatement clearance air samples will be taken from containments twenty-four (24) hours after cleaning; of surfaces is completed, a visual inspection by the Project Monitor detects no visible debris and surfaces are encapsulated (if warranted) and dry. All final air clearance samples will be collected in accordance with AHERA final air testing/clearance requirements. The worksite must have containment barriers, HEPA filtration system and the decontamination unit remaining in place and functional. a. Phase .Contrast Microscopy (PCM) Clearance Testing: PCM testing will be performed for background (if applicable), area(if applicable), and final air sampling. All samples should not exceed a concentration of 0.010 fibers/cc or the background levels previously detected. All final clearance samples shall require sufficient volume of air to assure a lower detectable limit of 0.005 fibers/cc by NIOSH 7400 Method. b. Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) Clearance Testing: TEM clearance testing may be performed to confirm the completion of removal, encapsulation or enclosure. Areas requiring TEM clearing air sampling shall be required to pass PCM clearance air sampling prior to the collection of TEM clearance air samples if the job site outside the contained work area is visibly dusty. The contained worksite must not be wet and a fan or leaf blower will be blown against walls, ceilings, floors, ledges, and other surfaces to circulate air and simulate real conditions for at least 5 minutes per 1,000 square feet. Stationary fans shall be directed towards the ceiling and operated on slow speed. One fan shall be used for each 10,000 cubic feet or work area. A minimum of five final clearance air samples will be collected inside the contained removal worksites or regulated area and after the clearance or visual inspection criteria. Additionally, five clearance air samples will be collected at the same time outside of contained removal worksite or regulated areas. These outside containment samples shall be representative of the snake-up air entering the containment or regulated area. Work in the contained removal worksite or regulated area shall be considered complete when the average concentration of asbestos of the five inside containment air samples is not statistically different, as determined by the Z-test calculation found in Appendix A of 40 CFR 763 Subpart E, from the average asbestos NNW Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 26 3.08-QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING A. Review of Work Practices: The Project Monitor may review the Contractor's work practices prior to the start of removal in each work area and will report any Specification violations to the Owner. Removal of ACMs may begin with the approval of the 'Project Monitor once the deficiencies are corrected. If the Contractor fails to correct deficiencies in a timely manner, the Owner will be notified in writing. The Project Monitor may review containment structures and negative air conditions before work begins and after the Abatement Contractor Site Supervisor has give approval. If at any time the results of any area air sampling from the interior of the building work area perimeter or negative air filtration unit exhaust exceed 0.03 f/cc work will be stopped until the source of the elevated fiber counts can be determined. At no time during the course of this work should the airborne concentration of asbestos fibers exceed 0.2 fibers per cubic centimeter (<0.2 f/cc), 8 hour TWA, inside a containment structure as measured by daily personnel monitoring. If fiber levels exceed this level, stop operations and contact the Project Designer to determine additional procedures to minimize fiber release. B. Air Sampling Equipment: 1. Cassettes will be loaded with the filters under clean laboratory conditions. A 5.0 micron pore-size cellulose ester backing filter will be placed behind the collecting filter, followed by the cellulose support pad and the cassette base. A metal cowl or an electrically conductive cowl will be used in conjunction with the sampling train. 2. The filter assembly will be upstream of components in the sampling train except for an optional size selective inlet or wind and rain shield. The air flow measuring device will be downstream of the filter and the pump assembly, or integral.with the pump assembly. 3. The air flow measuring/metering device will be a high quality rotometer,mass flow, dry gas meter or critical orifice. Measuring devices shall have a range of at least 1.5 times the desired flow rate and be readable to at least 0.1 of the desired flow rate. It will be calibrated against standards of higher accuracy before and after sampling for each asbestos project. The calibrations will be recorded. 4. Sampling for analysis by phase contrast microscopy shall employee cellulose ester collection filters with 0.8 micron pore size. 5. Sampling for analysis by transmission electron microscopy shall employ 25 mm diameter polycarbonate collection filters, preferably with 0.4 micron pore size. Cellulose ester filters, preferably with 0.45 micron pore size can be used if significant levels of contaminated organic material are present in the air. Organic contaminants will be identified and reported. C. Air Sampling Requirements: The following minimum schedule of samples will be required by the Project Monitor, during the abatement process. Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 25 owner/operator within 45 days of the date of waste was accepted by the initial transporter, the Contractor shall immediately provide the Owner with a copy of the report sent to the EPA regarding the status of the Waste Shipment Record. G. Manifests: A qualified person must sign all hazardous waste manifests.. 3.07-OTHER TRADES A. When other trades personnel (electrician, plumber, etc.) are required to enter the contained asbestos removal areas to perform emergency work the following procedures will be followed: 1. Sign in and out of the bound log book and enter the date and time. 2. Wear a NIOSH/MSHA approved respirator as required by these specifications. Fit test and medical surveillance records shall be provided to the Owner prior to entering containment. 3. Wear disposable full body protective clothing as required by these specifications. 4. Full shower and decontamination procedures will be followed, along with the proper decontamination of any tools or equipment brought into the work area. 5. Respiratory protection and protective clothing to be provided by the Abatement Contractor,unless otherwise agreed upon. 6. Personnel entering the regulated, contained work areas must have the required training and possess a valid workers license as required by Commonwealth of Massachusetts DOS/DLWD regulations. Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 24 3.06-DisPOSAL A. General: The Contractor will be responsible for asbestos disposal, which will be done as soon as possible. Procedures for hauling and disposal shall comply with 40 CFR 61 Subpart M, Federal Emission Standards and other applicable state,regional and local government standards. B. Waste Disposal Sites: Waste disposal sites for asbestos materials will be in accordance with 40 CFR 61.25, Waste Disposal Sites. The Contractor shall provide and submit to the Agent or Owner and Project Monitor written evidence that the site is approved for asbestos disposal by the EPA, State and local regulatory agencies. C. Daily Disposal: At the end of each work day the Contractor shall remove the debris accumulated during that days work activities using procedures outlined in the Specifications. The Abatement Contractor shall provide a daily tally of all quantities removed. D. Temporary Storage of Waste: An area for temporary storage of asbestos waste must be approved by the Owner. Asbestos waste may only be stored in a restricted area or enclosed container which is posted and secured whenever not in use. Asbestos waste material shall be loaded into a waste transportation vehicle/dumpster and hauled away as soon as there is a sufficient quantity available for direct transportation to the approved disposal site. Vehicles hauling asbestos waste materials will be covered to prevent emission of asbestos in route to the disposal site. E. Labeling of Disposal Containers: Warning labels having waterproof print and permanent, waterproof adhesive will be affixed to bags, drums (lid and sides), and other containers used for asbestos waste. Labels will be conspicuous and legible and legible and shall contain the following warning: DANGER CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD A DOT "class 9" shipping label and DOT mark shall be applied to or be printed on each packaging of asbestos containing materials. The AAC is directed to property label waste bag in accordance with the latest NESHAP standard Section 61.150, with the following information: Asbestos Abatement Contractor's Name SITE OWNER'S NAME SITE NAME F. Contractor's Responsibilities: The Contractor shall fulfill waste generator responsibilities as specified by 40 CFR 61, Subpart M,Federal Emission Standards for Asbestos, revised November 20, 1990,and other applicable state, regional and local government standards. The Contractor shall maintain Waste Shipment Records and shall provide a copy of the Waste Shipment Records and shall provide a copy of the Waste Shipment: Record, designating the number of bags or cubic yard(s) of asbestos waste. This record will be provided to the Owner or Project Monitor and signed by all transporters and the designated disposal site owner/operator. If the completed Waste Shipment Records is not received by the Contractor from the disposal site Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No. 21632 37 Franklin Street January, 2002 Nort5ampton,Massachusetts Page 23 E. Prefilters: Prefilters will be changed frequently during removal (at :least once per hour under heavy removal conditions). They will be changed before air-flow is altered to drop worksite air exchange below four air changes per hour. F. NAFU Exhaust: HEPA air filtration units will be exhausted outdoors and at least fifteen(15) feet above the ground whenever possible. At no time shall the negative; pressure ventilation unit exhaust within 40 feet of a receptor or adversely affect the air intake ports, louvers, or entranced of the building or adjacent buildings. NAFUs which are exhausted to the building's interior shall be monitored during abatement work by the Project Monitor. 3.05-CLEANING AND ENCAPSULATION A. Amended Water: A fine spray of amended water will be used to keep top layers of asbestos in the waste bags and containers damp to minimize potential asbestos dust release. Wetting of asbestos is to be done with low pressure spray equipment, using water amended with a wetting agent/surfactant containing fifty percent (50%) polyoxyethylene ether and fifty percent (50%) polyoxethylene ester, or the equivalent mixed one once to five gallons of water. B. Removal of Waste: Containerized waste will be removed from the work area through the decontamination chamber or waste load out. All tools and equipment will be removed from the work area and decontaminated in the decontamination chamber. Cloth, mops, and other cleaning aids will be disposed of as asbestos-containing waste material. No final inspection or testing can be performed with contaminated materials of bags of asbestos waste on site. C. Encapsulation: Prior to dismantling primary and secondary containment barriers, a bridging encapsulation/lock-down sealant will be applied to polyethylene surfaces. The chosen encapsulant must be compatible with the replacement materials and must conform to the proper edition of applicable fire and electrical standards. These does include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. National Fire Prevention Association- Codes 90a 2-1.3.1 through 3-3.8.1 2. National Electrical Code - Code 300-21. After removal and disposal of secondary polyethylene sheeting and clearance of the visual inspection, a bridging encapsulant/lockdown sealant will be applied to remaining surfaces in direct contact with removal operations, polyethylene sheeting and on any porous surfaces within the work site. Final air clearance samples will be taken after the containment is dry. D. Removal of Containment Barriers: After successful clearance air monitoring, the isolation barriers will be removed in conjunction with the use of a HEPA vacuum. E. a2ills: The Contractor will be responsible for necessary precautions to prevent pollution by spillage during the performance of services and shall assume full responsibility for caused spills, which will be cleaned up at the Contractor's expense. low Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 22 D. Protective Equipment: Workers using glove bags shall use disposable full body protective clothing and a minimum of a half-face air purifying respirator with HEPA cartridges as outlined in these specifications. A central shower and clean-up facility on site,must be designated. At the end of the work by glovebag, the protective suit must be removed inside-out and the worker shall proceed directly to the shower and clean-up facility. 3.04-HEPA FILTRATION REQuiREMENTS A. General: After masking and sealing is completed and the asbestos worksite is contained and before work begins, the Abatement Contractor and Project Monitor shall smoke test to confirm negative pressure inside the contained worksite. The volume of air within the contained worksite should be changed at least four (4) times per hour or once every fifteen (15) minutes. If the Project Monitor determined that the requirements compromise containment integrity, the capacity of the NAFU system may be reduced. B. Testing Requirements: The Contractor shall be responsible for the use of negative air pressure with continuous recording charts to confirm a negative air pressure of at least 0.02 inches of water column per full containment. Equipment used for producing a negative pressure shall have a filtering device in conformance with ANI SI A9.2, and shall operate 24 hours a day. All pressure measurement and recording is subject to confirmation by the Project Monitor. All HEPA filtration units utilized will be DOP tested within the last six (6) months. Certificates of testing for each identified unit will be provided to the Project Monitor upon operation of the units. C. 2000 CFM HEPA units inside the work area during abatement. The additional unit will be utilized upon failure of any operation units. D. NAFU Equipment Requirements: The HEPA filtration units will be equipped with the following: 1. Magnehelic gauge to monitor the units' air pressure difference across the filters and be able to interpret magnehelic reading to cubic feet per minute (,--FM). 2. An affixed label, clearly marked and conspicuous, showing the most recent installation date and hour reading of the primary internal HEPA filter. Hourmeter, to record unit operation time. 3. Automatic shut off for filter failure or filter absence. 4. Audible alarm with or without flashing red light for unit shutdown. 5. Amber flashing warning light for filter loading. 6. Must have safety system that prevents unit from being operated with the HEPA filter backwards 7. All flexible ducting, vent tubing, adapter plates and other equipment used for the passable of filtered air will be undamaged and free of air leaks at all points. Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 21 7. The Abatement Contractor shall provide a minimum of one water heater per work area decontamination chamber. Wastewater will be filter by 20 micron and 5 micron filters in a series prior to discharge. F. Change Rooms: Mini-Containments require the installation of a single stage change room constructed on one layer of six-mill polyethylene sheeting. The change room shall be sealed and attached to the mini-containment to provide an intermediate area of lesser asbestos pollution for decontamination or personnel. Workers leaving the work areas shall remove and dispose of their protective suits in this room and either proceed to the remove decontamination unit of conduct a thorough washing of the hands and face. G. Waste Load Out Enclosure: The waste decontamination enclosure system when under full containment shall consist of two totally enclosed chambers and shall also comply with the following requirements: 1. The washroom will be constructed with an airlock to the work area and an airlock to the holding area. 2. The holding area will be constructed with an airlock doorway to the washroom and a lockable door to the outside. 3. The water shall pass through shower filtering system and will be filtered down to five (5) micron particle size. 4. These chambers will be constructed with impermeable barriers at exterior walls and doors will be secured at the end of each shift. 3.03-GLOVEBAG REMOVAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: Glovebag removals shall be performed in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.1101. All persons expect those directly involved in the glovebag operation shall be excluded form the work areas. Physical barriers shall be used, where necessary, to limit access to the work area for the duration of the glovebag operation. All moveable objects shall be removed from the work area. Non-movable objects remaining in the work area shall be covered completely with six (6) mil polyethylene sheeting securely taped so as to prevent their contamination. Objects which have already been contaminated shall be thoroughly cleaned with a HEPA filtered vacuum or be wet wiped before they are moved from the work areas or covered in place. B. Installation: Glovebags must be installed to completely cover the pipe or other structure where asbestos abatement is to be done. OSHA requires that a HEPA filtered vacuum be attached to one side of the bag(s) while also having a port for make-up air on the other side of it. The vacuum shall be left running during the removal process. C. Removal: The removed asbestos material from the abatement area that has fallen into the enclosed bag must be thoroughly wetted with a wetting agent. The wetting agent is applied with an airless sprayer through the pre-cut port provided in most glovebags or applied through a small hole in the bag. After removal of the layer of ACM, the area from which asbestos has been removed must be thoroughly cleaned with a wire brush and wet-wiped with a wetting agent until no traces of the ACM are observed. Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 20 D. Emergencv Exits: Whenever possible there will be emergency exists from containment which are sealed but labeled and can be easily opened to allow workers to exit directly out of containment in case of a life threatening emergency. E. Decontamination Chambers: 1. It is the Abatement Contractor's responsibility to provide Decontamination Chambers consisting of an equipment room, shower and clean room for personnel involved in asbestos removal under full containment. The Chamber shall be masked and sealed with layers of six-mil polyethylene sheeting with flaps between each room. 2. Each of the three rooms will be of a sufficient size to accommodate contaminated personnel and related equipment. The rooms will be framed, masked, sealed and attached and sealed to the entry/exist ways of asbestos worksite. The three rooms together will be referred to as the Decontamination Chamber. A Decontamination Chamber will be required for each separate contained removal worksite. Equipment rooms, Clean Rooms, and Showers may be part of the existing space with the approval of the Owner. Adequate heat and light will be safely provided. 3. Decontamination Chambers that are constructed on the exterior of the building shall be free standing and framed with 2" x 4" studs with plywood walls. Exterior Decontamination Chambers shall be weather resistant and secured with locks when not in use. Masking and sealing requirements remain the same as those stated above. 4. Equipment Room: The Equipment Room shall provide an intermediate area of lesser asbestos pollution for decontamination of personnel and removed asbestos-contaminated materials. This room will be periodically vacuumed and washed in order to prevent asbestos dust and debris accumulation. It also serves as access areas to the shower for personnel leaving the work area. Workers leaving containment shall remove and dispose of disposable protective suits and wear only respirators into the shower. 5. Shower Room: The Shower Room shall have a continuous supply of cold and hot water, and be suitably arranged for complete showering during decontamination. The Shower Room with curtained doorways will comprise an airlock between contaminated and clean areas. All showers shall have a two stage filtering system for wastewater connected immediately off the drain pipe or sump pump outlet. The first stage shall efficiently filter fibers down to twenty (20) microns in length, and the second efficiently down to five (5)microns in length. 6. Clean Room: The Clean Room shall store asbestos worker's street clothing, clean protective clothing and clean respirator equipment. It shall have lockers or shelves, and clean sealable plastic bags for storage of street clothes. Contaminated clothing, respirators, tools, equipment, or other materials shall not be allowed to be introduced into the Clean Room or into unmasked areas. The Clean Room will serve as an access for personnel entering the work area, and for the donning or respiratory protection and protective clothing. It will be equipped with a lockable door- to secure the work place during off-shift hours. Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No. 21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 19 3.02-PREPAPUTION A. Critical Barriers: 1. Prior to masking and sealing operations which will designate the asbestos removal work area, windows, doors, openings, ducts, drains, and vents will be masked and sealed with a minimum of one layer of six mil polyethylene sheeting. Voids in the walls, ceilings, or roof systems will be sealed with fire retardant spray foam. 2. Windows and doors along the exterior of the building will remain closed for the duration of the asbestos abatement project. 3. Large accessible openings such as a roof access way will be sealed with permanent, solid construction materials and made air tight in accordance with DLWD regulations 453 CMR 6.00. B. Full Containments: 1. Full enclosure procedures as defined by 453 CMR 6.14 will be required for the work site. 2. Prior to the asbestos removal, all windows, doors, openings, ducts, drains and vents will be separately masked and sealed with a minimum of one 6-mil layer of polyethylene completely edge sealed around the opening. Shut down any local ventilation into or out of the work space, other than the HEPA filtered system. Large openings to be occupied areas, such as open doorways or passageways, shall be sealed with plastic. 3. Post the work area entrances outside the actual enclosed with Asbestos Hazard warning labels and barricade tape with imprinted labels notifying public of asbestos hazard. 4. If containments are warranted, completely isolate the work areas from other parts of the building so as to prevent asbestos-containing dust or debris from passing beyond the isolated area. Clean all surfaces in enclosure with HEPA vacuum or by wet wiping prior to the installation of plastic sheets. Provide mechanically supported plastic sheet barrier between work area and all other sections of the building. Floors shall be masked and sealed with two layers or six mill plastic sheeting with a minimum overlap of two feet at seams and up walls, if applicable . Walls shall be covered with two layers of six mil polyethylene sheeting, arranged so each layer overlaps on the outside of the respective layer of floor polyethylene sheeting that has been run up the wall. 5. Should the area beyond the work areas become contaminated with asbestos-containing dust or debris as a consequence of the work, all work will stop, and cleaning those areas will continue after a decontamination plan is presented by the Contractor and approved by the Agent or Owner and Project Monitor. Perform all such required cleaning or decontamination at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Alternate Methods: Alternative masking and sealing methods, procedures, and design will be considered if any elements of proper and safe procedures to prevent contamination and exposure can be demonstrated. Any alternative methods must be reviewed and approved by the Project Designer and appropriate regulatory agency using variance procedures. Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 13 PART 3 ExECUT1ON 3.01-ABATEMENT PROCEDURES A. The abatement of regulated ACM includes the removal of friable ACM or Category I nonfriable ACM that has become friable when removed by cutting, sanding, grinding or abrading. 1. The removal of regulated ACM, in the form of TSI boiler motor packing located on the old forced hot air boiler shall conform to the requirements of this section, and may be abated using glovebag methodologies utilizing wet methods prior to and during removal, all ACM and glovebags shall be placed in adequately wet leak-tight containers. 2. If ACM in these forms can not be abated using glovebag; methodologies then full containment methods must be used. 3. If an alternate approach is requested it must be first approved by the Project Designer prior to commencement. 4. Limited demolition by the Abatement Contractor may be required to access, and/or remove ACMs. 5. The removal of regulated ACM in the form of linoleum flooring shall conform to the requirements of this section and shall be abated using full-containment methodologies. 6. If removal of more than one ACM occurs within an area, then the more conservative containment measures shall be required. 7. Exterior non-friable transite like siding materials are to be handled and disposed of in accordance with applicable regulations. At a minimum, no visible or particulate emissions are allowed, adequately wetting ACM during the removal process, isolation of the work area, drop clothes beneath work areas, appropriate containerization and disposal of ACM. If any cutting, grinding, sawing, penetrations, or other means that may make the transite like materials friable, are planned to occur, then full-containment abatement methods are to be employed. Either of these operations are to be performed by the Asbestos Abatement Contractor. 8. After abatement of transite like siding materials, all edges along/adjacent to the removed materials are to be encapsulated. 9. ACM debris will be remedially cleaned prior to glovebag, and/or full containment techniques. 10. All Non-movable objects are to be covered per applicable regulations. 11. Floors (if applicable) and walls are to be covered per applicable regulations. Floors and walls are not to be damaged. Water is to be vacuumed off of any floor/wall coverings in a consistent and repeated manner as not to allow seepage on or within existing walls or flooring including carpeting. 12. Waste will be removed and placed into a lockable and approved on-site container for transport and disposal. 13. It should be anticipated that other Contractors will be working in proximal areas. 14. If other unknown suspect materials are encountered/disturbed appropriate response, handling, and/or disposal actions may be required. Suspect materials should be considered to contain asbestos unless laboratory analysis proves otherwise. 15. Any equipment, supplies or other items necessary to complete abatement is the responsibility of the abatement contractor. Any equipment, supplies or other items located on-site or owned by others should not be assumed to be available for use. Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 17 2.08-RESPIRATOR SELECTION A. Choose from the following the appropriate respiratory protection: Respirator Fit/Protection Factor Half-face Air Purifying Negative Pressure Respirator with HEPA filter. 10 Full-face Air Purifying Negative Pressure Respirator with HEPA filter. 10-50 (protection factor dependent on manufacturers data and recommendations) Powered Air Purifying Positive Pressure Respirator(PAPR),with half face mask. 100 Type C Supplied Air Continuous Flow Half or Full Face Respirator. 1000 Type C Supplied Air Pressure Demand Regulated Full Face Respirator. 2000 B. Other types of respiratory protection only on prior approval of the Project Monitor. Conditions requiring the use of higher degrees of protection are not allowed under this contract. C. eration: Maintain respirators in complete accordance with the manufactures recommendation and applicable standards. Maintain all respirators in original, unmodified condition. Maintain full inventory of repair parts and extra filter canisters for each brand of respirators used. Substitution of parts between Manufactures brands of respirators is strictly forbidden. Replace respirator filters at least once each 8 hour period,whenever resistance to normal breathing is encountered, or according to manufacturers specifications. Keep on hand at least one spare of the appropriate type of respirator beyond anticipated needs for the use of the Agent. D. Fit Testing: All workers using respirators shall be fit tested at least once every year procedures detailed on OSHA 29 CFR 1926 and 1910, Respiratory Protection; Final Rule (January 8, 1998). Certifications for each workers signed by the tester are to be maintained on site during the course of the work. now Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 16 2.04-DECONTANIINATION FACILITY A. Three Chamber decontamination Facilitv: Provide full decontamination unit consisting at a minimum of three separate chambers, the equipment room, the shower, and the clean room. Water for the showers shall be tempered. Filter wastewater through OS micron filter before disposal. Provide an adequate supply of disposable bath towels at all times. Provide liquid soap from dispenser in the shower area. 2.05-DECONTATMINATION A. The removal or disturbance of any asbestos-containing material will be conducted only after a thorough soaking first with amended water or a penetrating encapsulant. Submit manufacturer's information on all fiber control compounds to the Agent before the start of the work as part of the Hazard Communication/Right To Know Program. 2.06-PROTECTIVE CLOTHING A. Coveralls: Provide and require that disposable full-body,coveralls and disposable head covers be worn by all workers in the work area. Provide sufficient number for all required changes, for all workers and visitors to the work area. Coveralls to be securely taped to protective boots worn on job site. B. Goggles: Provide .eye protection as required by OSHA for all workers involved in scraping, spraying or any other work which may potentially cause eye injury. C. Gloves: Provide work gloves to all workers and require that they be worn at all times in the work area. Do not remove work gloves from the work area and dispose as asbestos-contaminated waste at the end of the work. D. Boots: Provide appropriate sized work boots that are to remain within the containment structure during the course of the work. Do not allow street shoes to be used on the work site. Boots are to have steel toes. Thoroughly decontaminate work boots at the end of the work. 2.07-ELECTRICAL PROTECTION A. All electrical circuits used on the job site will be protected by a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI). Each GFCI must be tested so as to confirm proper operation. Any existing circuits or outlets not so protected are to be locked out or sealed off as appropriate. B. Where modifications to existing electrical panels are required for operation of equipment by the Contractor, have all such modifications and the removal of such modifications conducted by a licensed electrician. Secure permits form the Electrical Inspector as required. MW Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No. 21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 15 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01-PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS A. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for any patent payments due for equipment used on this project at the time of the project or as the result of any future court action. B. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, the Owners Consultants and agents and employees of any of them, and the Project Monitor for any lawsuit resulting from the Contractors choice of variable air system or equipment. Nothing in this specification shall compel the Contractor to infringe on patents held by G.P.A.C.Corp. or any other patent holder. 2.02-VARIABLE PRESSURE A. All negative air pressure units must be in full operational condition. Damaged or bent units will not be acceptable. Maintain each unit complete with original filtration system, consisting of coarse and fine prefilters and HEPA filter. Maintain gaskets, gauges, and safety devices as per original design. B. Each unit will be equipped with a Magnehelic gauge or manometer and an audible alarm to indicate filter plugging or unit malfunctioning. C. Each unit shall be operated with a recording meter indicating differential pressure across critical barriers. Chart output shall be time and date stamped and saved as part of the project record. 2.03-CONTAINMENTS A. Polyethylene Sheeting: Double polyethylene film in the largest sheet size possible shall be used as necessary to minimize seams, 4.0 or 6.0 mil thick as required, and clear in color. Material is to be fire resistant and so labeled. B. Duct Tape: Provide duct tape in 2" or 3" widths with an adhesive; which is formulated to aggressively stick to polyethylene. Enhance adherence of duct tape to substrate with spray adhesives if necessary. C. Construction Fencing: Provide heavy grade orange plastic fencing properly installed with posts and stakes. The fence should stand at least 4' high. This may be required. by the Owner or Owners Agents at any time for access and safety related issues for any areas deemed necessary. D. Scaffolding: if used, must be constructed in accordance with applicable OSHA regulations under 29 CMR 1926. E. Lumber: Must be adequate to provide containment durability and effectiveness throughout the duration of containment. Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,'Massachusetts Page 14 Fitting: Includes seams,joints, unions, couplings, elbows, and tees. Abatement of a fitting is defined as the removal of 1 linear and/or 1 square foot of ACM regardless of the number of fittings within that area. Friable: Easily pulverized,crumbled or crushed by hand pressure. H.E.P.A.: High Efficient Particulate Air Hygienist: Certified Project Monitor under MA DLI Regulation 453 CMR 6.00 I.H.: Industrial Hygienist N.I.O.S.H.: National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health O &M: Operation and Maintenance O.S.H.A.: Occupational Safety and Health Administration P.C.M.: Phase Contract Microscopy P.E.L.: Permissible Exposure Limit,0.2 fiber/cc air, 8 hour TWA S.T.E.L.: Short Term Exposure Limit T.E.M.: Transmission Electron Microscopy T.W.A.: Time Weighted Average Window/Window System: Single or double window system (regardless of size) located on interior or exterior portions of building includes all building material layers (front, back, and interior) (glues, adhesives, mastics, caulkings, glazings, etc.) to masonry substrate. Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No. 21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 13 2. Debris from selective demolition which is not ACM or is not contaminated with ACM shall be left in the building or removed and disposed of properly off site, at the contractor's option. Any such material left in the buildings must be neatly stockpiled in such a way that it does not create any hazard or encumbrance to subsequent demolition work and which does not inhibit collection of this material for recycling. D. Store flammable or hazardous waste in metal containers and remove from the work site daily. E. Electricity and water will be available. F. The Owner shall provide water for the use of the Contractor at designated locations. The Contractor is responsible for conducting that water through leak-tight conduits to the sites where it will be used. Excess water consumption may be cause of restriction by the Owner if it is being wasted in the opinion of the Owner. G. Hours of Work: Hours of work are weekdays from 7:00 a.m. until 5:00 p.m. H. Use of on-site dumpsters: The contractor may not place any debris into any on-site dumpsters. I. Condition of Buildings: Contractors should assume that any existing appliances, fixtures, or equipment will remain in place. The contractor will be responsible for moving and replacing these items as required to perform the work. 1.14-STOP WORK A. If the Owner, Owner's representatives, any inspector from the offices of the Massachusetts DOS/DLWD, the DEP or the U.S. EPA, or the Project Monitor present written or verbal stop orders, immediately and automatically stop all work. Do not commence work until authorized in writing by the Owner. 1.15-ASBESTOS ABATEMENT DEFL TTIONS A.C.B.M: Asbestos Containing Building Material A.C.M.: Asbestos Containing Material A.H.E.R.A.: Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Action(1986 for Schools) Air Sampling: Method of quantification of airborne asbestos at a particular time. Decontamination chamber: Area of clean room and showers through which one enters and exists the abatement area. D.E.P.(NIA): Department of Environmental Protection Door/Door System: Single or double door system located on interior or exterior portions of building includes all building material layers (front, back, and interior)(glues, adhesives, mastics, caulkings, glazings, etc.) to masonry substrate. D.O.S. Department of Occupational Safety D.L.W.D. (TNIA): Department of Labor and Workforce Development D.O.T.(US): Department of Transportation Contractor MA Licensed Asbestos Abatement Contractor Encapsulation: Application of liquid sealant to asbestos materials. Enclosure: Isolation of asbestos by wrapping and sealing air-tight. E.P.A.(US): Environmental Protection Agency Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 12 1.11-NOTIFICATIONS A. Notifications are to be submitted to the following agencies with waiver requests: 1.) Department of Environmental Protection, P.O. Box 4062, Boston, NIA 02211. Use the transmittal from provided by the DEP for Permit Application and Payment. All fees are to be paid by the Contractor. 2). Regional DOS/DLWD at 399 Washington Street, 5'Floor, in Boston,NIA 02108. B. Notification Posting: In clean room of personnel Decontamination Unit, post a list at least 8"by 10" in size, consisting of emergency telephone numbers and locations of emergency services, not limited to fire, ambulance, doctor,hospital,police,power company and telephone company. C. The General Contractor and Owners Representative (ECS) is to be notified,not less than seven (7) days before commencement,of the start of the work. 1.12-PROJECT SCHEDULE A. The schedule for asbestos abatement is to be determined by the General Contractor. B. Pre-Construction Conference: An initial progress meeting recognized as "Pre-Construction Conference" shall be convened by ECS prior to the Start of the work. This is an organizational meeting, to review responsibilities and personnel assignments and to ;locate the containment and decontamination areas and temporary facilities including power,light,water,etc. At this time ECS will also review the HASP for the entire site with the Abatement Contractor. C. Work to commence by others prior to and/or during asbestos abatement work may include demolition activities, and the removal, collection and disposal of various regulated materials. 1.13-CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES AND CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORK A. Confine operations at the site to the areas presented during the pre-construction conference. Portions of the site beyond areas on which is indicated are not to be disturbed. The building may be occupied and not available to the contractor in its entirety during the work. B. Keep existing driveways and entrances to the site clear and available to the Owner and the Owner's employees or representatives at all times. The parking lot may be used by the contractor for essential equipment and storage units. However, the contractor may not park personally owned vehicles in this lot. Access to the dumpster serving the building must be maintained at all times, and as many parking spaces as possible must be maintained for use by authorized building staff. Sidewalks and public ways are to be kept clear and unencumbered. C. Selective Demolition Debris: 1. Selective demolition is to be done so as not to damage or degrade the structural or the watertight integrity of the building. Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 11 fl Documentation of Contractor compliance with the following: Initial inspection Setup and removal of plastic barriers Each stage of the work as it proceeds Waste removal g) Equipment maintenance procedures. h) Final inspection,clearance air monitoring results. Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 10 f). The design of the Variable Pressure System for review. Do not being work until a copy of the submittal approved by the Project Monitor. At a minimum, include in the submittal: 1. Number of negative air machines required and calculations used to determine such. Provide sufficient number of negative air pressure units to maintain at lease one air change each fifteen minutes throughout the work areas. 2. Locations of machines and exhausts. 3. Pressure differential across enclosures anticipated. 4. Description of projected air flows throughout the work areas. g.) Hazard Communication/Right To Know Program to include MSDSs for all chemicals and potentially hazardous materials used or stored on the site during this project. E. Submittals as Available: 1.) Unusual Event Reports: When an event of unusual or significant nature occurs at a site (examples: failure of variable pressure system, rupture of temporary enclosure), prepare and submit special report lists chain of events, persons participating, response of Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. When such events are known or predictable in advance advise Project Monitor and Owner in advance at earliest possible date. 2.) Accident Reports: Prepare and submit reports of significant accidents, at site and anywhere else work is in progress. Record and document data and actions, comply with industry standards. For this purpose, a significant accident is defined to include events where personal injury is sustained, or property loss of substance is sustained, or where the event poses a significant threat of loss or personal injury. 3.) Monitoring Reports: Personnel air monitoring reports are to be taken at least once a day in each containment area during the course of the actual abatement. Monitor at least one person per shift, and at least one third of all contractor's employees on the job who work within the containment structure. F. Submittals at the Conclusion of the Work: 1.) Asbestos Disposal Reports: Receipt from the ultimate disposer of each load of asbestos debris showing the location, number of bags, drums or cubic yards, data, name of recipient's representative, and certification of proper disposal method according to NIOSH. Submit copies of all manifests and landfill receipts to the Project Monitor on a weekly basis for on-going projects. If waste is accepted by local community landfill, include documentation of the amount paid for disposal at the local landfall. 2.) Dailv Log: Maintain within the Decontamination Unit area a daily log documenting the dates and times of all significant events during the course of the work, including, but not limited to the following: a) Meetings-including purpose, attendees and brief discussion summary. b) Visitations,names, authorization,purpose. c) Personnel entering and leaving work area. d) Special or unusual events. e) Air monitoring test and results Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No. 21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 9 constructions submittals (under B, C, and D) should be made in a timely manner to allow ample time for review before the start of the work. B. A Copy of the contractor's and superintendent's certifications from the Massachusetts Department of Occupational Safety/Department of Labor and Workforce Development(DOS/DLWD). C. A copy of notification forms to Massachusetts DOS/DLWD, Massachusetts DEP, and Environmental Protection Agency (if warranted). A copy of the completed forms must be submitted to the Project Monitor before the start of work. D. A copy of medical examination certification of workers and worker's respiratory training certificates for each worker including the following: 1. Name, Social Security Number and photostatic copy of current Asbestos Abatement Worker Certification. 2. Physicians Written Opinion including at a minimum the following: a). Whether the worker has any detected medical conditions that would place the worker at an increased risk of material health impairment from exposure to asbestos. b). Statement that the worker has been informed by the physician of the results of the medical examination and of any medical conditions that may result from asbestos exposure. c). Statement that the worker is able to wear and use the type of respiratory protection proposed for the project, and is able to work safely in an environment capable of producing heat stress in the worker. d). Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) forms as per the OSHA Hazard Communication Standard for all chemical compounds used at the work site. Maintain a copy of forms on site as required by OSHA. Provide a list of products proposed for use during the course of this work. At a minimum submit MSDS for the following products used on the work, including: 1. Surfactant 2. Bridging Encapsulant 3. Penetrating Encapsulant 4. Lock-down Encapsulant 5. Pigments mixed with any of the above 6. Cleaning Agents 7. Solvents e). Health and Safety Plan/Contingency Plan shall be written that described in the plan should be clearly defined. It is recommended that all worker practice carrying out their roles in simulated emergency situations. The contingency plan should include planned responses to the following possible situations: 1. loss of negative pressure atmosphere 2. fiber counts above regulated maximums inside or outside of containment 3. injury to one or more workers 4. worker collapse 5. fire or smoke in the containment area 6. any other situation that would disrupt the plant of work Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January, 2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 8 C. Workforce: The Contractors shall maintain sufficient trained removal workers, through all phases of the project, as needed to meet the timetables as agreed upon with the Owner. If the Contractor falls behind on the timetable, and the Owner or the Agent determines additional manpower is required, the Contractor shall provide the additional trained and certified personnel as required to meet the contract completion date. D. Identification Cards: All persons engaged in asbestos abatement on the job site shall keep their certification identification card at the job site and shall be present: it to the Agent, IH or representative of any state or federal regulatory agency upon request. No person is to enter the job site unless this card is present. E. All work shall be performed in strict accordance with the Specifications contained herein and with the regulations cited in the following paragraph. The following Federal, State and Local Standards and Regulations, by reference, shall be made part of this section and shall be complied with. Whenever regulations are conflicting,the more stringent shall be complied with. F. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the following regulations, and maintain a copy of each at the work site: 1. U.S.Department of Labor, OSHA Asbestos Regulations(29 CFR 1926.58) 2. U.S.Department of Labor,OSHA Respiratory Protection;Final Rule dated January 8, 1998 (29 CFR 1910 and 1926) 3. U.S.EPA National Emission Standard for Asbestos(CFR Title 40 Subpart M) 4. U.S.EPA AHERA Final Rule(40 CFR Part 763, Subpart G) 5. U.S.Department of Labor,OSHA Confined Space Standard(29 CFR 1910.146) 6. Massachusetts Department of Labor and Workforce Development(453 CMR 6.00) 7. Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection(3 10 CNIR 6.00-8.00) 8 All local ordinances, regulations or rules pertaining to asbestos, including its storage, transportation and disposal. G. In addition,the Contractor shall be familiar with the following: 1. Northampton Municipal and Zoning Ordinances as they affect the work. 2. Massachusetts State Building Code(780 CMR). 1.10-SUBMITTALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, submit special reports directly to the Project Monitor within one day of occurrence requiring special reports, and within seven (7) days of all other reports becoming available to the Contractor. Send a copy to any other persons affected by the occurrence. Pre- Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 7 B. Maintain on site a certification from a physician that each individual worker is physically able to work safely with a negative pressure respirator before issuing this type of equipment to workers. 1.08-RESPIRATORY PROTECTION A. The Contractor must assure that each worker involved in asbestos abatement or maintenance and repair is trained in proper respiratory use and require that each worker wear a respirator, properly fitted on the face in the work area from the start of any operation which may cause airborne asbestos fibers until the work area is completely decontaminated. Use respiratory protection appropriate for the fiber level encountered in the work place or as required for other toxic or oxygen-deficient situations encountered. B. Standards: Except to the extent that more stringent requirements are written directly into the Contract Documents, the following regulations and standards have the same force and effect (and are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference) as if copied directly into the Contract Documents, or as if published copies were bound herein. Where there is a conflict in requirements set forth in these regulations and standards,meet the more stringent requirements. 1. OSHA- U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Safety and Health Standards 29 CFR 1910 and 1926, Respiratory Protection; Final Rule (January 8, 1998). 2. CGA- Compressed Gas Association, Inc., New York, Pamphlet G-7, "Compressed Air for Human Respiration", and Specification g-7.1, "Commodity Specification for Air". 3. ANSI-American National Standard Practices for Respiratory Protection,ANSIZ88.2-1980. 4. NIOSH-National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health 5. MSHA-Mine Safety and Health Administration 1.09-ADNM%ISTR4TIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General Superintendent: Provide a full-time General Superintendent who is experienced in administration and supervision of asbestos abatement projects including work practices, protective measures for building and personnel, disposal procedure, federal and state regulation, etc. This person is the Competent Person as required by OSHA 29 CFR 1926 for the Contractor and is the Contractor's representative responsible for compliance with all applicable federal, state and local regulation, particularly those relating to asbestos-containing materials. This person must have completed a course at a Massachusetts D.LW.D recognized training center as a job supervisor and hold a state certification as a supervisor/foreperson. This person must also have a minimum of two (2) years on-the-job training and meet any additional requirements set firth in 29 CFR 1926 for a Competent Person. The General Superintendent is to be accredited as an asbestos Abatement Supervisor in accordance with the AHERA regulations 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E, Appendix C. The General Superintendent shall also be trained in 40 CFR Part 61,the NESHAP Revisions. B. Workers: Removal workers will have successfully completed an EPA approved asbestos training course within one year prior to the commencement of the work. Each removal worker shall be certified as required by Massachusetts Department and Labor Industries Regulations 453 CMR 6.00. Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No. 21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 6 absence of visible debris in accordance with ASTM standard E1368-90. All post removal and contaminated surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and dry prior to the visual inspection. A certificate of visual inspection will be signed by the Project Monitor and the Site Supervisor after final inspection clearance. The certificate will be part of the Owner's documentation. The Abatement Contractor will be responsible for the costs of visual inspection and testing required for any work that fails clearance air quality criteria. If the Abatement Contractor and Project Monitor disagree on the asbestos content of debris found in the area, a licensed Inspector shall collect and analyze samples of such debris at the Contractor's expense. Once the work area has passed the visual inspection, the Contractor shall encapsulate the exposed surface areas with an EPA approved encapusulant and shall leave removal surfaces in a condition that is ready to receive replacement materials. K. Disposal: All waste will be disposed of in accordance with all applicable local, state, and federal regulations. 1.05-WORKER PROTECTION A. This section does not include respiratory protection. B. The disturbance or dislocation of ACMs may cause asbestos fibers to be:released into the building's atmosphere, thereby creating a potential health threat to workmen and building occupants. Apprise all workers, supervisory personnel, subcontractors and consultants who will be at the job site of the seriousness of the hazard and of proper work procedures to be followed. Full notification of all interested parties and isolation of the work area remains the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Where in the performance of the work, workers, supervisory personnel, subcontractors, or consultants may encounter, disturb, or otherwise function in the immediate vicinity of any identified asbestos-containing materials, take appropriate continuous measures as necessary to protect all building occupants from potential hazard of exposure to airborne asbestos. Such measures shall include the procedures and methods described herein, and compliance with regulations of applicable federal, state and local agencies. 1.06-WORKER TRAINING A. All workers must receive training in accordance with the 29 CFR 1926 and 453 CMR 6.00. Documentation of such training in the form of current and valid Massachusetts Department of Occupational Safety (formerly Department of Labor and Industries) certification with picture I.D. must be on site whenever a worker is conducting asbestos associated work. 1.07-MEDICAL EYAMINATIONS A. Provide annual medical examinations for all workers who may encounter an airborne fiber level of 0.1 f/cc or greater for an 8-hour time weighted average. In the absence of specific airborne fiber data provide medical examination for all workers who will enter the work area for any reason. Examination shall as a minimum meet OSHA requirements as set forth in 29 CFR 1926. In addition, provide an evaluation of the individuals ability to work environments capable of producing heat stress in the worker. Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 5 for all remedial cleaning activities prior to full containment or other removal methodologies (i.e. glove bags). D. Critical Barriers: The windows, doors, opening, ducts, drains, vents, pipe and conduit penetrations and other major opening of the buildings shall be masked and sealed in accordance with Part 3.02 of this Section prior to covering the floor and walls. E. Containments: Unless otherwise specified in Part 3.01, the Contractor shall remove ACM within full containments, with attached three stage decontamination chambers. Work areas will be masked and sealed in accordance with Part 3.02 of this Section. F. Decontamination Chambers: For the removals conducted under full containment, a single means of decontamination for personnel and equipment is acceptable. A decontamination unit consists of an equipment room, a shower and a clean room for personnel involved in asbestos removal in accordance with Part 3.02 of this Section. Each of these three rooms shall be of sufficient size to accommodate all of their intended functions. A decontamination unit: will be required for each separate site of asbestos removal unless these sites are connected internally. The decontamination unit shall be the sole means of egress from the work site unless an emergency is in progress. For all other work conducted, a two chamber Mini-Decontamination Facility ("mini-decon") shall be constructed in a location readily accessible to the work sites in accordance with Part 3.02 of this Section. G. Variable Pressure: The Abatement Contractor shall establish negative pressure air filtration within the containment work areas. Install, operate, and maintain a sufficient number of negative Air Filtration Units (NAFU's) to meet the requirements of Part 3.05 of this Section. The NAFUs will be positioned in the work area opposite the decontamination unit, where possible. The NAFU will be exhausted outside the building. NAFUs which are exhausted to the building's interior shall be continuously monitored at the exhaust with a direct reading instrument equipped with a chart recorder. H. Removals: Removal of asbestos containing materials, unless specified otherwise, will be performed using negative air filtration techniques, wet methods, the masking and sealing of openings, ducts and vents, and mini-contaminants for glovebag removals. Removals will be as indicated and as specified herein, and will be performed in a neat and workman like manner to the limits indicated or specified. Asbestos will be consistently and thoroughly wetted with a fine spray of amended water and will be carefully removed and immediately placed in approved and properly labeled six mil polyethylene disposal containers unless specified otherwise. After removal, surfaces will be free of visible debris and fibers and surfaces will be HEPA vacuumed clear.. I. Decontamination: State of the art techniques for asbestos fiber control will be used throughout this abatement. The Project Monitor will inspect the work site to confirm proper erection of specified containment systems, operation of equipment, and confirmatory to standards, regulations and the specification. It shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor for compliance with applicable federal, state and local laws and the abatement to the standards required. J. Visual Inspections: Work areas shall pass a visual inspection conducted by the Site Supervisor responsible for the project and Project Monitor. The criterion for this inspection will be the Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton, Massachusetts 'Page 4 containing 1 percent or greater asbestos. Suspect ACMs were listed by functional space in which asbestos was determined to exist. The location, characteristics and assessment were completed for each ACM. A material is defined as friable when it can be crushed, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure when dry. Laboratory results of ACM samples are provided in Table 1. Laboratory data indicates the presence of asbestos in the following materials: thermal system insulation (TSI) boiler motor packing located on the old forced hot air boiler; and green linoleum flooring located in the first floor bathroom. There are six minerals grouped into the term "asbestos". Chrysotile, Amosite, and Crocidolite are asbestos minerals most commonly found in building matenials. Exact sample types and compositions are included with the Laboratory Certificates. An ACM is defined as a material containing 1 percent or greater asbestos. Suspect ACMs were listed by functional space in which asbestos was determined to exist. The location, characteristics and assessment were completed for each ACM. A material is defined as friable when it can be crushed, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure when dry.Laboratory results of ACM samples are provided in Table 1 Additional information from confirmatory sampling performed January 2002. In addition, additional confirmatory sampling performed on January 2, 2002 and subsequent analysis performed on January 3,2002 of exterior transite-like siding materials(Sample ID#Ext-1) was performed. The additional confirmatory sampling data did indicate the presence of asbestos in the sample. The material is present beneath vinyl exterior siding and in several exposed areas. 1.04-ABATEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Removal Requirements: The Asbestos Abatement Contractor will keep a three-ring binder notebook on the job site at all times with records on each employee on this project to include respirator fit-test documentation, training certificates, latest medical surveillance records, a copy of the company respiratory protection program, employee qualifications, and their health and safety program. The notebook will include a section on asbestos wash and record of all asbestos waste removed from the work area. The entry will include date, time:, quantity (number of bags or cubic yards) destination of waste, name of approved hauler and EPA approved landfill and final chain of custody forms. The notebook will include copies of all permits and EPA, State and other notifications. Personal sampling results will also be maintained herein. B. Personal Air Sampling: Daily personal and excursion limit sampling will be the responsibility of the Asbestos Abatement Contractor to check personal exposure levels versus respiratory protection and to check work practices. At least 25% of the workers in each shift, but not less than 2, shall be sampled. Personal sampling pumps should have a flow rate of two (2) liters per minute and sample duration will be as close to an eight-hour workday as possible. The Contractor is responsible for his own personal sampling as outlined in OSHA Regulation 1926.1101. The Contractor shall post the personal air sample results within 24 hours. The analytical laboratory shall be A.M.A. accredited for asbestos analytical work. C. Remedial Cleaning: Limited remedial cleaning of horizontal surfaces, ledges, and equipment will be required prior to masking and sealing operations of work areas. Cleaning will be done using HEPA vacuums and wet methods. Determinations of additional remedial cleaning will be made on the basis of hazard potential to workers and the outside environment relating to setup and masking and sealing operations. Respiratory protection and protective clothing will be required Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No. 21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 3 containing materials (PACM) unless appropriate inspection and sampling analysis proves otherwise. To minimize the potential for accidentally disturbing the materials, OSHA requires the owner or property manager to: • communicate hazards to those personnel who may have contact with ACM, • provide asbestos awareness training to all custodial personnel, and • provide more extensive training (16 hours), as appropriate, to maintenance personnel or other workers who repair,remove,or otherwise disturb PACK Hazards may be communicated to employees, tenants, and outside contractors by labeling ACM, by posting written notices, or by verbally communicating information on asbestos hazards. If any operations are conducted where fiber release may be generated above the Permissible Exposure Limit(PEL), more extensive requirements apply. The EPA regulates ACM associated with renovation, demolition, and asbestos abatement projects via the National Emissions Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) regulation (Title 40, CFR Part 61). This regulation requires that buildings be inspected for ACM prior to renovation/demolition projects. It stipulates that all friable ACM as well as non-friable ACM that are in poor condition or will be made friable by renovation activities be removed or otherwise appropriately be abated before they are disturbed. Su-,N IARY-ASBESTOS On June 22, 2001, ECS personnel performed an inspection for the presence of accessible asbestos containing materials (ACM) which could be potentially disturbed during demolition or renovation activities. The inspection was performed on the interior and exterior of the residence and garage. Roofing systems were surveyed where accessible Accessible building materials suspected of containing asbestos were observed throughout the subject buildings. Various types of building materials such as floor tale and mastic, ceiling tiles, sheetrock (with associated joint compound), roofing materials, linoleum, thermal systems insulation (TSI), skim coat materials, glazing compound and various construction mastics were encountered. When these materials were identified, it was assumed that they contained asbestos unless proven otherwise by analytical laboratory testing. Approximate quantities of suspect ACM's are also provided as part of the inspection. Bulk samples were submitted to an accredited laboratory for asbestos identification by Polarized Light Microscopy(PLiV1).Laboratory testing results are enclosed with this letter report.All samples were submitted to ProScience Analytical Services, Inc. of Woburn, Massachusetts, a certified Massachusetts laboratory. Bulk sample PLM data was provided as Appendix A. In addition, based on the low percentage of asbestos detected using initial PLM analysis, one sample (Sample ID # 21B — window glazing compound) was reanalyzed using transmission electron microscopy(TEM) analysis to verify asbestos presence. There are six minerals grouped into the term "asbestos". Chrysotile, Amosite, and Crocidolite are asbestos minerals most commonly found in building materials. Exact sample types and compositions are included with the Laboratory Certificates. An ACM is defined as a material Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No. 21632 37 Franklin Street January, 2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 2 - 1.03-ASBESTOS-CONTAINING Ni aTERIALS A. On June 22, 2001, and January 2, 2002 ECS personnel performed an inspection for the presence of accessible asbestos containing materials (ACM) which could be potentially disturbed during demolition or renovation activities. The inspection was performed on the interior and exterior of the residence and garage. Roofing systems were surveyed where accessible Accessible building materials suspected of containing asbestos were observed throughout the subject buildings. Various types of building materials such as floor tile and mastic, ceiling tiles, sheetrock (with associated joint compound), roofing materials, linoleum, thermal systems insulation (TSI), skim coat materials, glazing compound and various construction mastics were encountered. When these materials were identified, it was assumed that they contained asbestos unless proven otherwise by analytical laboratory testing. Approximate quantities of suspect ACM's are also provided as part of the inspection. Bulk samples were submitted to an accredited laboratory for asbestos identification by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM). All samples were submitted to ProScience Analytical Services, Inc. of Woburn,Massachusetts, a certified Massachusetts laboratory. In addition, based on the low percentage of asbestos detected using initial PLM analysis, one sample (Sample ID # 21B — window glazing compound) was reanalyzed using transmission electron microscopy (TEM) analysis to verify initial asbestos presence. B. Laboratory data indicates the presence of asbestos (>=1%) in the following materials: thermal system insulation (TSI) boiler motor packing located on the old forced hot air boiler; green linoleum flooring located in the first floor bathroom; and a transite like; siding material located on the exterior of the building. In addition, window glazing compound that was reanalyzed using TEM analysis to verify initial asbestos presence indicated the presence of asbestos at a Trace concentration(<l%). C. Additional ACM may be present in inaccessible areas. If unknown suspect materials are encountered,materials should be considered positive until laboratory analysis proves otherwise. D. The following information was presented in the Phase I Report, Section 3.9: The United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection (MA-DEP), the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), and the Massachusetts Department of Labor and Workforce Development, Department of Occupational Safety(MA-DLWD-DOS) are responsible for regulating the release of asbestos into the environment and protecting workers for exposure to airborne fibers.The EPA and MA-DEP are responsible for developing and enforcing regulations necessary to protect the general public from airborne contaminants that are known to be hazardous to human health. OSHA and the MA-DLWD-DOS are responsible for the health and safety of workers who may be exposed to asbestos in connection with their jobs, including asbestos abatement, maintenance, and custodial activities, and renovation work. They specify requirements for the work practices and engineering controls that must be utilized during asbestos abatement projects. They also require that Asbestos Containing Material (ACM), be repaired, removed, or otherwise appropriately abated before maintenance, renovation, or demolition work disturbs them. Thermal systems insulation (TSI), surfacing materials and floor the installed before 1980 must be presumed to be asbestos is Asbestos Abatement Technical Specification Document No.21632 37 Franklin Street January,2002 Northampton,Massachusetts Page 1 ASBESTOS ABATENYiENT TECANICAL SPECIFICATION SECTION 02080 ASBESTOS ABATENIENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01-RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Phase I Environmental Site Assessment prepared by Environmental Compliance Services, Inc. (ECS) dated July 2001. The asbestos section of this report has been revised and is provided as Section 1.03 (D) in the Specification. B. Table 1 detailing Asbestos Containing Materials(ACMs)with estimated quantities is included. C. Analytical data of bulk samples collected is included. 1.02-PROJECT/WORK IDENTIFICATION A. Specifications presented in this section were prepared by Mr. Mark A. Haynes (Massachusetts Certified Asbestos Designer#AD 70963) of ECS and are dated January 2002. B. Approximate locations and quantities referenced in this specification and related documents (Table 1) are guidelines for the convenience of the Contractor and are not guaranteed to be accurate. The Contractor shall verify the scope of work and determine all quantities involved. The contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and material necessary for removing; and disposing all asbestos containing materials. It is the expectation of the Owner that all asbestos containing materials (ACMs) will receive the specified treatment in an area when the Contractor agrees to undertake such work. No credit will be given for changes in the scope of work unless hidden conditions, other than those for which allowances exist, are revealed during the construction process. If any other materials are found which are suspected of containing asbestos,immediately notify ECS. D. The Contractor should expect and it is reasonable to expect that demolition activities will be warranted to access and remove ACMs. The Contractor will perform all of their own cutting, capping, dismantling, and/or demolition to gain access to concealed materials. By way of example, the following are to be included in, but not limited to, this selective demolition: where partitions, countertops, etc, have been built on top of existing VAT and/or mastic, the contractor will be required to perform selective demolition as required to access and abate these materials. Plumbing cutting and capping required as a result of selective demolition required to access the work (e.g. removal of sinks and cabinets) will be the responsibility of the contractor. The contractor shall provide the services of a qualified and licensed electrician, as necessary, to accomplish all of the work. Section 3.09 details handling requirements for these materials. D. Consultant/hygienist services (including a Project Monitor) will be provided by ECS. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cost of further sampling, monitoring, and clearances of the post-abatement air sampling, if quantitative results do not produce final clearance. EXISTING WALL PUSHING NEWAXISTING WINDOW CASING EE INTERIOR SEALANT 2x WOOD FRAMING W/ RIGID INSULATION EXISTING INTERIOR WINDOW XIERIOR T CASING AND ROSETTES BEHIND NAIL FlN TO REMAIN — SCRAPE WEATHER BARRIER TAPE AND REPAINT VINYL WINDOW INTERIOR TRIM — TO MATCH EXISTING PROFILE INSECT SCREEN EXISTING OR NEW PARTITION — INTERIOR SEALANT SEE GEN. SHEET NOTES A-110 AT NEW OR EXISTING WALLS 2x WOOD FRAMING TYP. WINDOW HEAD DETAIL B 1 1 1/2. _ 1,_O. 0 2- 4' s" INTERIOR SEALANT EXISTING INTERIOR DOOR CASING AND ROSETTES TO REMAIN — SCRAPE AND REPAINT EXISTING WALL SHIM EXISTING WOOD DOOR FRAME HEAD TO REMAIN — SCRAPE AND REPAINT NEW/EXISTING WINDOW CASING WOOD DOOR INTERIOR SEALANT \ AT NEW OR EXISTING WALLS TYP. INT. DOOR HEAD DETAIL INTERIOR WINDOW BEHINID NAIL Fl NT ,.—O. CASING— PROFILE TO WEATHER BARRIER TAPE MATCH EXISTING VINYL WINDOW INTERIOR TRIM — TO MATCH EXISTING PROFILE INSECT SCREEN INTERIOR SEALANT AT NEW OR EXISTING WALLS EXISTING OR NEW PARTITION — TYP. WINDOW JAMB DETAIL SEE GEN. SHEET NOTES A-110 B 1 1 1/2•_ 1.-0. 0 Y 4• 8. INTERIOR SEALANT e--INSECT SCREEN INTERIOR DOOR CASING— PROFlLE TO MATCH EXISTING INTERIOR SEALANT SHIM 5/4• MDF SILL VINYL WINDOW EXISTING WOOD DOOR FRAME JAMB NEW/EXISTING WINDOW CASING TO REMAIN — SCRAPE AND REPAINT WOOD DOOR INTERIOR WINDOW APRON — �I TO MATCH EXISTING PROFILE J AT NEW OR EXISTING WALLS THERMAL BLANKET TYP. INT. DOOR JAMB DETAIL INSULATION EXISTING WALL AT NEW OR EXIS nNG WALLS TYP. WINDOW SILL DETAIL B2 , 1/2._ 1._0. 0 2• 4• r PROJECT NO. 20122 SFfEET T1Tt-E D I E T Z CAD FLE SK-3 DOOR AND PEARL REALTY TRUST By 1>02 WIDOW DETAILS sr C:.I:a cq ArcNled.trc. NORTHAMPTON MASSACHUSETTS a FkjhI'P.—d S m C Q 17 HAMPDEN ST DRAWING SPRINGFIELD,MA NONE S K 3 Architects 01103 veio2 ADDENDLM I INCORPORATED (4131 733-6798 MARK DATE DESCRIPTION 3-202 DEC K , + x12 WO TFFAMI�G 'p > 16' .C. D ER- 02 DGE -2:12 IE ■ SOUTH DECK FRAMING PLAN D r 4• a, LEO ER12x8 x6 0 FR MI FR N P RC i6' D.C. m > m 4 - 2 12 - 2 2;:12 r , 4 2 2 _ 8'MIN. CONCRETE CIRCULAR PIERS W/ MIN. 2 S0. FT CONCRETE PAD BELOW. 4'MIN. BELOW GRADE- TYP 4 LOCATIONS Cl NEW WOOD STAIRS, STRINGERS h HANDRAILS FRONT PORCH FRAMING PLAN 0 Y 4' PROJECT NO. 20122 SHEET TITLE *ET CAD FlE SK-2 SOUTH DECK AND PEARL REALTY TRUST ©�P,L12W FRONT PORCH By OMIT i Ca ArWlxla W. NORTHAMPTON.MASSACHUSETTS M Zt.R.—d FRAMING PLAN 3 s DMW74G REFERENCE: g =HADEN 4 NONE SK Architects V8102 "°°PD`s" I INCORPORATED MARK DATE DESCRIPTION nommmommow Vfm wroow SUN ROOM EXISTING WOOD PANEL-LNG EASTNG WALL CO STRUCTICN THERMAL BLAWET N9-ATCN EASTNG SONG THERMAL BLAWET NSLLATCN P,EFEA TO AB/A-�01 FOR EXISTNG FLOOR CNSTRUCTCN AOCTM]NA.IX:TAI TO RETRAIN EX6TNG CRAWL SPACE 3/4'WR PLYWOOD r TOP COURSE BRTUdNOUS CONCRETE THERMAL BLMKET NRLATCN 2 V2'BINDER COURSE PT 2.4 WOOD FRAN" UTUMNOUS CONCRETE PANT EXPOSED PLYWOOD IT GRAVEL ANCHOR BOLT r COMPACTED SIXGRACE SLL SEAL. 0 -80 ��- I—I 1111=1111=1111=III ,, III Illl 1111-II IIII,, ,I Ir,; IIII;, EXISTING PARTIAL WALL SECTION Al 1/2. _ —D. 0 1/2 1 2' SUN ROOM SK-1 SUN ROOM „+ VERTICAL 0 LIFT m Tl-ER?Ak BI.M#N.%L.ATC.N EXISTING FLOOR CONSTRUCTION It TO REMAN EVSTN'G CRAWL SPACE--( 5� 52' 3/4'WA FLYW000 X11 THERMAL BLANKET N&LATION AEFFA TO ASIA-40 FCA VERIFY ALL SHAFT O ACTLI E WITH PT 2,4 WOOD FRAARNG ADDIT10NAL CETAL VBITCAL lFT MAM,FACTLfFA SLL SEAL "'amCON R VERTICAL LIFT PLAN HAUNCH H AT AT CON(7ETE SLAB C 1 v T/4•� �•-O• 0 1' Y 4' T-a IIII=1111=IIII I � =1II IIII=IIII= f,(I I i�I I I I-III �I i(I I I IIII-1 I r R;D NSUTATCN EASTNG PER VAPOR BARER BEYOND EXSTNG TO PE?AAN-VERTICAL LFT SHAFT TO REST ON Lt0STUf8ED SOL PARTIAL WALL SECTION D I E T Z PROJECT NO 20122 SHEET TITLE CAD FILE: SK-1 VERTICAL LIFT PLAN PEARL REALTY TRUST ®c-rig12001 WALL SECTIONS By DMIZ d Cm ArcNl.cl4 4+e. NORTHAMPTOK MASSACHUSETTS Al Flol.Rb—ved 4 � ms1 C O 17 HAMPDEN ST DRAWING REFERENCF- SPRINGFIELD,MA Architects 01103 1/8/01 ADDENDUM NONE SK INCORPORATED (4131 733-6798 MARK DATE DESCRIPTION Pearl Realty Trust January 8, 2002 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 6. The Bidder represents that Bidder has, has not participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to the Equal Opportunity clause prescribed by Executive orders 10925, 1 1 1 14, or 11246 or the Secretary of Labor; that Bidder has, has not, filed all required compliance reports, signed by proposed subcontractors, will be obtained prior to subcontract awards. 8. The Bidder agrees that Bidder shall, if notified of Bid acceptance by mail, telegram or delivered notice, execute a contract in the prescribed form and furnish the required assurance of completion (i.e., either a performance- payment bond in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price or separate performance and payment bonds each in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price, or a cash escrow in the amount of 25 percent of the contract price) at on the day and at the time specified in the Notification of Bid Acceptance, such date to be not less than 10 days subsequent to the date of notification, nor more than 60 days subsequent to bid opening unless by mutual consent between Bidder and Owner. 9. The Bidder agrees, if awarded the Contract, to commence the work within 10 calendar days after the date of execution of the construction contract. 10. In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by Pearl Realty Trust to reject any and all bids; and in the event the lowest responsible bid is too high to permit the award of a construction contract, and if a reduction in cost less than one half (1/2) percent of the low bid and less than one half (1/2) the difference between the low and next lowest bid would result in an acceptable award, and acceptable reductions in the work can be identified and monetized by Owner and Low-Bidder, a deductive change order reflecting such reductions may be proposed to the Low-Bidder for concurrent execution with the construction contract. 11. The undersigned certifies that he/she is duly authorized to bind the Bidder to the terms and conditions of this bid proposal. WARNING: U.S. Criminal Code, Section 1001, Title 18 U.S.C. provides as follows: whoever, in any matter within the jurisdiction of any department or agency of the United States knowingly and willfully falsifies, conceals or covers up by any trick, scheme or device a material fact, or makes or uses any false: writing or document knowing the same to contain any false,fictitious or fraudulent statement of entry, shall be fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned not more than five years, or both. Date , 20 (Name of bidder) Official address: By Title (SIGN ORIGINAL ONLY) FORM OF BID Page 2 of 2 Pearl Realty Trust January 8, 2002 Diet!&Company Architects, Inc. FORM OF BID TO: Pearl Realty Trust P.O. Box 1494 Northampton, MA 01061 BID FOR: Pearl Realty Trust Renovations and Addition 37 Franklin Street Northampton, MA BIDDER: Name of Bidder Address City, State and Zip Gentlemen: I. The undersigned being familiar with the local conditions affecting the cost of work, and with the bid package (including Instruction to Bidders, this Bid Form of Bid Security, Performance and Payment Bond, Form of Contract, General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Technical Specifications and Drawings) and Addenda thereto, as prepared by Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. and on file at the Office of Dietz & Company Architects, Inc., hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services required to construct and complete the project, as described in the Invitation for Bids (including the contents of all documents on file),all in accordance therewith for the Base Bid price of: (Dollars in words) For the Alternates,ADD the following amounts from the Base Bid: ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION ADD OR DOLLARS IN 1 VORDS DOLLARS NO. DEDUCT One Plantings DECOCT $ Two Garage Power and Lighting DECOCT $ Three Plastic Laminate Countertops DEDUCT $ Four Staff Plumbing Fixtures DEDUCT $ Five Wood Floors ADD $ Six Gypsum Board Ceilings ADD $ Seven Rebuild South Rear Deck ADD $ Eight Additional Rece mcle Outlets I ADD $ 2. This Bid includes Addenda numbers 3. Bid Guarantee in the amount of dollars ($ ) in the form of is submitted herewith in accordance with the Project Manual. 5. Affidavit of Non-Collusive/Non-Identity of Interest as proof that the undersigned and other principals and officers of Bidder have not entered into any collusion with any person in respect to this proposal or any other proposal or the submitting of proposals for the contract for which this proposal is submitted; and that no identity of interest exists or will exist between the Bidder, Bidder's principals or officers, and the Owner or Architect or their principals or officers as a result of the contract for which this proposal is submitted is attached hereto. FORM OF BID Page I of 2 Pearl Realty Trust Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.97 In Section 09900, Painting, page 6, item 3.6: ADD: C. Concrete,Stucco,and Masonry (Other than Concrete Masonry Units): Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete,stucco,and brick masonry surfaces where specifically indicated to be painted: I. Flat Acrylic Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer. Alkali-resistant, exterior,acrylic-latex primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 1) Devoe: 1502 Wonder-Shield Exterior Latex House Paint Primer. 2) Fuller 220-17 Acrylic Concrete and Masonry Primer Sealer. 3) Glidden: Primer not required over this substrate. 4) Moore: Primer not required over this substrate. 5) PPG: 6-603 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Alkali Resistant Primer. 6) P& L: Primer not required over this substrate. b. First and Second Coats: Flat, exterior, acrylic-emulsion paint applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils. I) Devoe: 15XX Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint. 2) Fuller. 262-XX Exterior"All Surface" 100 Percent Acrylic Flat Paint. 3) Glidden: 3525 Series Spred House Masonry&Stucco Finish. 4) Moore: MoorLife Latex House Paint#105. 5) PPG: 10 Line Pitt-Cryl Exterior Water Base Paint. 6) P& L: Z/F 1900 Series Vapex Flat House Paint 1.98 In Section 1 1451,Appliances, page 4, item 3.4: ADD: All Frigidaire model numbers were taken from the Frigidaire.com web site and reflect last years numbers. Local distributors can cross reference old model numbers to get current model numbers, or call Frigidaire Customer Service at(706)860 4110. 1.99 In Section 11451, Appliances, page 7, item..3.4.1.2: CHANGE to read: Manufacturer. General Electric, GE Profile,#jE1860GB. 1.100 In Section 1 2356,Kitchen and Bathroom Casework,page 2, item 2.I.B: CHANGE to read: Casework: 1.101 In Section 12356, Kitchen and Bathroom Casework, page 2, item 2.1.6:; ADD: 4. Merillat Industries, Inc. I.IO2 In Section 12356, Kitchen and Bathroom Casework, page 3, item 2.I.f: CHANGE to read: Cabinet Specification based on Merillat, Spring Valley, oak face cabinets, with additional field applied coat of polyurethane finish on cabinet exteriors. 1.103 In Section 14420, Platform and Stair Lifts, page 2, item 2.I.F.1: CHANGE color as selected by Architect to read manufacturer's standard Stone Grey. 1.104 In Section 14420, Platform and Stair Lifts, page 3, item 2.I.H.5: DELETE reference to two hour rated shaft enclosure. 1.105 In Section 14420, Platform and Stair Lifts, page 4, item 3.4.A.5: CHANGE to read: Platform Size: 42 inches wide x 60 inches deep, clear inside dimensions, with 90 degree configuration. 1.106 In Section 14420, Platform and Stair Lifts, page 4, item 3.4.6.1: ADD to Stannah Stairlifts, Inc. Hopkinton, MA: Phone (508) 435 0416; Fax(508) 435 0417. Attachments: Form of Bid, dated 118/02 (2 pages). Specifications Sections 02080 Asbestos Abatement(38 pages); 02090 Lead Containing Paint Handling(53 pages), dated January 2002. SK-1, SK-2,SK-3 dated 1/8/02. END OF ADDENDUM No. I \\B I\d:ua\20122•pmrl realty wstlbldding\addendum_I.dx PAGE 6OF6 ADDENDUM No.1 Pearl Realty Trust Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 1.76 In Section 01732, Selective Demolition, page 2, item 1.7.C.: CHANGE to read: Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in building components scheduled to be selectively demolished. I. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 1.77 In Section 01732, Selective Demolition, page 2, item 1.7: ADD: F. The building will be unoccupied during construction. 1.78 In Section 06105, Miscellaneous Carpentry, page 4, item 2.6.A: CHANGE to read: Shelving in BF Bedroom 114: In small closet, provide five 15" deep, 1/4" MDO plywood shelves with banded edges and adjustable shelf brackets. In large closet, provide single 12" deep, 1/4" MIDO plywood shelf with banded edge and clothes rod. Provide Knape &Voight KV-85ANO Standard with ANO-KV double bracket, and #1 195 closet shelf and rod bracket 1.79 In Section 06105, Miscellaneous Carpentry, page 4, item 2.6.B: CHANGE to read: Shelving in Laundry: Provide single 15" deep, '/4" MDO plywood shelf with banded edges and adjustable shelf brackets. Provide Knape&Voight KV-85ANO Standard with ANO-KV double bracket 1.80 In Section 06105, Miscellaneous Carpentry, page 4, item 2.6.C: CHANGE to read: Vinyl Coated Wire Shelves: Provide Closet Maid vinyl coated wire shelves with integral clothes rod, mounting brackets and accessories, Provide single 12" deep combination shelf and rods at all bedroom closets, except BF Bedroom 114. At Closet 110, provide single 15" deep combination shelf and rod, and three 15" deep shelves. 1.81 In Section 06105, Miscellaneous Carpentry, page 4, item 2.9: CHANGE to read: SOUTH DECK, NORTH PORCH, RAMP AND STAIR CONSTRUCTION. 1.82 In Section 06105, Miscellaneous Carpentry, page 5, item 2.9: ADD: K. Lattice: Clear, kiln-dried, pressure treated SPF, square lattice with 1 5/8" spacing. 1.83 In Section 06105, Miscellaneous Carpentry, page 5, item 2.10: CHANGE to read: FRONT PORCH CONSTRUCTION. 1.84 In Section 06105, Miscellaneous Carpentry, page 5, item 2.10: ADD: H. Stair top and bottom rails and decorative balusters: to match existing. 1.85 In Section 06105, Miscellaneous Carpentry, page 5, item 2.1 I.A.2: CHANGE to read: Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch for roof sheathing at new roofs. Not less than A inch for roof sheathing over existing board sheathing. 1.86 In Section 06105, Miscellaneous Carpentry, page 5, item 2.1 I.A.3: CHANGE to read: Thickness: Not less than % inch for wall sheathing. 1.87 In Section 08215,Stile and Rail Doors, page:2, item 2.2.A.3: CHANGE to read: Stile Thickness: I-3J8". 1.88 In Section 08215,Stile and Rail Doors, page 2, item 2.2.A.4: CHANGE to read: Finish: Factory primed. 1.89 In Section 08520, Vinyl Windows, page I, item 1.2.A: CHANGE to read: This Section includes Residential Class factory fabricated vinyl (PVC) windows of the performance class indicated. Window types required include the following: 1.90 In Section 08520, Vinyl Windows, page 2, item 1.4.C.3: CHANGE test pressure of 53 Ibf/sq. ft to read: test pressure of 90 Ibf/sq. ft. 1.91 In Section 08520,Vinyl Windows, page 2, item 1.4.C.4: CHANGE U-value maximum of 0.44 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F to read: U-value maximum of 0.35 Btu/sq.ft.x h x deg F. 1.92 In Section 08520, Vinyl Windows, page 3, item 2.1: ADD: B. Specification based on National Vinyl Products, Prestige Series, R60 double hung window. 1.93 In Section 08520, Vinyl Windows, page 3, item 2.3: ADD: B. Provide obscure glazing at all Bathroom windows. 1.94 In Section 08711, Door Hardware, page 4, Part 2: ADD 2.7 HARDWARE FOR POCKET DOORS A. Operating Hardware for Pocket Doors: Provide Hager'9850 heavy duty pocket door kit including frame hardware and all accessories to provide a complete installation. Pocket Door kit shall conform to ANSI A156.14/Type: D867'Im D8701. Provide jump proof track, heavy duty aluminum box track,and steel clad split studs. B. Pulls for Pocket Doors: Provide Hager#2630, 2 1/8" diameter flush pulls, #330L Privacy Lock,and Hager#9884 edge pull. 1.95 In Section 08711, Door Hardware, page 6, Hardware Schedule, Heading#6: ADD: Heavy duty pocket door kit 1.96 In Section 09260, Gypsum Board Assemblies, page 2, item 2.2.13.3: DELETE: reference to foil-backed. ADDENDUM No.1 PAGE 5 OF 6 Pearl Realty Trust Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Security system provided by Owner is not yet selected, but electrician should include in pricing wiring to main control panel. All security wiring by others. REVISIONS TO THE SPECIFICATIONS 1.60 In Supplement to Instructions to Bidders: DELETE Article 6.I. 1.61 Clarification: Performance Bond and Payment Bond as required under Supplement to Instructions to Bidders,Article 7.1. 1.62 In Supplement to Instructions to Bidders, Article 8.1: CHANGE to read: Form to be used: The Agreement of the Work will be written on AIA Form as included in Project:Manual. 1.63 In Supplement to Instructions to Bidders,Article 9.1: CHANGE to read: Sales taxes are not applicable to work on this project. 1.64 Replace Form of Bid dated December 14, 2001 with attached Form of Bid dated January 8,2002. 1.65 DELETE: Bid Bond (AIA Document A310). 1.66 DELETE: Non-Collusive/Non-Identity of Interest Affidavit. 1.67 In Section 00800, Supplementary General Conditions, page 4, item 1 1.1.2: REPLACE both references to $5,000,000 Blanket Excess Liability Policy with $ 2,000,000 Blanket Excess Liability Policy. 1.68 In Section 01101, Scope of Work, page I, ADD: item 1.3 Work Covered by Contract Documents: A. Work Sequence: The work shall commence February 15, 2002 and the building is to be substantially complete and ready for occupancy by July 15, 2002. 1.69 In Section 01101, Scope of Work, page 2, item 3.3, General Interior. ADD: Existing wood bases to remain — scrape and repaint; replace existing base molding trim. Refer to Abatement Specifications. Provide new wood base and molding trim where required to blend with existing. At new walls, provide wood base and molding trim - paint all wood base throughout. 1.70 In Section 01230, Alternates, page 2, item 3.1.E: CHANGE reference from Bedrooms 201 and 203 to read Bedrooms 202 and 203. 1.71 In Section 01230, Alternates, page 2, item 3.I.F: CHANGE to read: Provide all labor and materials as required to provide %"gypsum board over existing plaster ceilings and paint. Existing acoustical furred ceilings over the plaster are to be removed prior to gypsum board installation. Reference Specification Section 09260, Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.72 In Section 01230,Alternates, page 2, item 3.1: ADD the following: G. Alternate No.Seven: Provide all labor and materials as required to provide new pressure treated framing, decking, posts, rails, and balusters at south rear deck. Reference SK-2, dated 1/8/02 for framing plan and Specification Section 06105, Miscellaneous Carpentry. 1.73 In Section 01230, Alternates, page 2, item 3.1: ADD the following: H. Alternate No. Eight: Provide all labor and materials as required to provide I I additional new receptacle outlets in the first and second floor areas: I. 2 in Bedroom 209 2. 2 in bedroom 202; 3. 1 in bedroom 210; 4. 1 in the Living Room; 5. 1 in the Dining Room; 6. 2 in the Office; 7. 2 in the 2nd floor front Hall. Receptacle outlets shown as "grounded-type"are not necessarily grounded. The intent of Drawing E-1, Electrical Scope of Work items 4 and 5 is that all boxes wired with knob and tube wiring, or poor condition romex/other that cannot be grounded with the existing circuiting shall be re-wired. Reference Drawings E-I and E-2 and Electrical Specifications Sections. 1.74 In Section 01731, Cutting and Patching, page 3, item 3.3.C.5: ADD: a. Where existing insulation is disturbed, replace with new. 1.75 In Section 01732, Selective Demolition, page I, item 1.2.13: CHANGE to read: Work to be included under this contract: ADDENDUM No.I PAGE 4 OF 6 Pearl Realty Trust Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.38 On Drawing A-502: ADD drawing title A4 Stair Section to stair detail. 1.39 On Drawing A-502,detail A3: CHANGE 1/4"cdx plywood to read: Plywood roof sheathing. 1.40 On Drawings FP-2, H-2 and E-2, First Floor Plans: DELETE third door at Vertical Chair Lift. 1.41 On Drawing FP-2, First and Second Floors Fire Protection: CHANGE all Fire Alarm outlets (3 on I" floor, I on 2nd floor)to visual alarms. 1.42 On Drawing FP-2, Second Floor Fire Protection: Relocate fire alarm outlet(now visual alarm) shown in hall outside bedroom 3, into bedroom 3. 1.43 On Drawing FP-2, Second Floor Fire Protection: DELETE Fire Alarm outlet in lower right hand corner. 1.44 Clarifications to Fire Protection Drawings: I. A system smoke detector is one connected to the fire alarm panel, whose activation will cause the fire alarm system horn/strobe (A/V) units to operate, and a call to go out to the fire dept The multiple station smoke detectors are 120 V devices normally installed in a residence. They are interconnected with each other, but not with the fire alarm system. If one of these activates, they will all sound locally only. The A/Vs will not activate, nor will the fire dept be called. 1.45 On Drawings P-I and P-2: DELETE all references to cold water lines to ice.-makers. 1.46 On Drawing P-1: The intent of Plumbing Scope of Work#I is to remove all abandoned piping, including piping being abandoned now,and piping that is already abandoned. 1.47 On Drawing P-I, Basement Plumbing Plan: DELETE all references to provide new 3" floor drain at removed toilet 1.48 On Drawing H-I, HVAC Scope of Work ADD: #12. Coordinate with GC re openings and framing for attic gable exhaust vents, kitchen and bathroom exhausts. 1.49 On Drawing H-2, First Floor Heating & Ventilation Plan: I" floor bathroom exhausts and I kitchen exhaust exit building into porch roof. Ducts should turn 90 degrees upwards, and exit out roof, in weatherproof termination with air outlet minimum I foot above roofline. 1.50 Clarifications to Heating&Ventilation Drawings: I. We are NOT calling for a 2-zone heating system. The 2 thermostats are to be both tied to the existing furnace,wired so that the furnace will run on a call for heat from either. 2. DELETE all references to flex ducts. 1.51 Drawing E, FP, H& P-3,Attic Plan: Elec, Pimb, Hvac,& F.P. is to apply to all referenced trades. 1.52 On Drawing E-1, Electrical Scope of Work, #9: ADD: For wheelchair lift, provide power and control piping and wiring. Final connections to be made by lift contractor. Vertical lift uses a 3 HP, 240 single phase motor. 1.53 On Drawing E-I, Electrical Scope of Work: ADD: #16. Coordinate with GC re framing for whole house fans with insulated,automatic shutters. 1.54 On Drawing E-2, First Floor Electrical Plan: Existing light fixture in Storage is to remain. 1.55 On Drawing E-2, First Floor Electrical Plan: Existing receptacle outlet: in BF Bedroom 114 shall be moved to 18"aff. Patch existing plaster to match. 1.56 On Drawing E-2, First and Second Floor Electrical Plans: ADD 6 receptacle outlets: I. 1 in I"floor hallway, laundry wall (opposite side of wall from washing machine); 2. 1 in 2'floor hallway, between Bedroom I &Study; 3. 1 in Study in new wall where existing door is being filled in; 4. 1 in Program Room,where wall is being filled in; 5. 2 in BF Bedroom 114 (1 on longer closet wall facing room, I in the short "hall' entering the accessible bedroom). 1.57 On Drawing E-2, First Floor Electrical Plan: Both Front Porch light fixture should be type H. 1.58 On Drawing E-2,Second Floor Electrical Plan: ADD: designation EF-I to exhaust fan in Bath I. 1.59 Clarifications to Electrical Drawings: 1. Per Electrical Inspector, George Fournier on 2/4101, all new receptacle and switch outlets on the I"floor must be mounted at 48"and 18" aff respectively. Existing outlets that are being re-wired do not need to be ADA height 2. Per Electrical Inspector, George Fournier on 2/4/01, existing rooms that are not having walls opened up or moved do not need to be brought up to code in relation to receptacle outlet spacing. All new rooms must be wired to code. All bedrooms must meet 2002 NEC requirement for arc-fault protection (all bedroom receptacles, lights,and other 120 v outlets) ADDENDUM No.I PAGE 3 OF 6 Pearl Realty Trust Dieu&Company Architects, Inc. pressure treated framing. Refer to SK-2, dated 1/8/02. Provide for 25% decking, post, rail and baluster replacement during construction. Patch vinyl siding where disturbed to match existing. 1.12 On Drawing A-I 10, Porch Framing Plan: At the top landing of the ramp, adjacent to the stairs,add a 10" circular formed concrete pier. 1.13 On Drawing A-1 10, Porch Framing Plan: CHANGE sheet keynote#8 reference to read#18. 1.14 On Drawing A-I 10, First Floor Plan: ADD elevation symbol E5/A-501 on the north side of the ramp. 1.15 On Drawing A-I 10, First Floor Plan: CHANGE ramp section symbol E5/A-501 to read ANA-502. 1.16 On Drawing A-1 10, detail A2: ADD the following: Wainscot is at new or existing walls. Wood base is new/existing. Wall is new/existing. New base molding to match existing profile. 1.17 On Drawing A-I 10: ADD the following Header Schedule: For Wood Bearing Walls: For spans up to 3'-0", provide 2-2x6's. From 3'-0"to 5'-0", provide 2-2x8's. From 5'-0"to T-0", provide 2-2x10's. For Wood Non-Bearing Walls: For spans up to 4'-0",provide 2-2x4's. From 4'-0"to T-0", provide 2-2x6's. All multiple member wood heads shall have solid blocking between members. Wood headers shall have a minimum of 2" bearing each end. 1.18 On Drawing A-I 10, First Floor Plan: CHANGE finish schedule base designation at Entry 101 to read 4. 1.19 On Drawing A-I 10, First Floor Plan: CHANGE window designation A at Accessible Bath 102 to read C. 1.20 On Drawing A-I 10, First Floor Plan: CHANGE (2) window designations C at Office 104 to read B. 1.21 On Drawing A-I 10, CHANGE Sheet Keynote #l3 to read: Reinstall existing salvaged stair handrail and balusters. Install new handrail to match existing with brackets and mounting blocks on left side of stair. Mount at 2'-10" from edge of nosing to top of rail. Install new gate at top of stairs with rails and balusters to match existing. 1.22 On Drawing A-I 10,ADD to General Sheet Notes#7. Existing exposed foundation walls to be scraped and repainted. See Specifications for abatement 1.23 On Drawing A-I 10, ADD to General Sheet Notes: #l3. Provide new Levelor, Riviera DustGuard (- inch horizontal metal mini blinds at all new first and second floor windows. 1.24 On Drawing A-I 10, ADD to General Sheet Notes: #14. Provide infill floor framing at removed basement stairs, chimney and 2nd floor whirlpool tub. 1.25 On Drawing A-I 10: DELETE General Sheet Note#4. 1.26 On Drawing A-120, Second Floor Plan: CHANGE finish schedule floor designation at Bedrooms 202 and 203 to read C. 1.27 On Drawing A-120, Second Floor Plan: CHANGE finish schedule base designation at Hall 201, Study Room 204 and Bedroom 207 to read 4. 1.28 On Drawing A-120,Second Floor Plan: DELETE all finish schedule designations for Stair 211. 1.29 On Drawing A-120, Door Schedule: CHANGE Door Finish of all insulated hollow metal doors to Painted. 1.30 On Drawing AR-130, CHANGE General Sheet Note #4 to read: Existing Attic: Provide 12" fiberglass batt insulation over attic floor. 1.31 On Drawing A-201, CHANGE Sheet Keynotes #3 to read: At front steps replace existing iron handrail with wood handrails. Rails and balusters to match existing front porch construction. 1.32 On Drawing A-201, CHANGE Sheet Keynotes #4 to read: Raise existing deck to new kitchen floor height with new and salvaged materials. Refer to floor plans. 1.33 On Drawing A-202,detail 66: ADD window designation B to rear gable window. 1.34 Drawings A-203 and A-204 are schematic and for reference only. Refer to other drawings for detailed scope of work. 1.35 On Drawing A-401, detail A6: DELETE all references to concrete grade beam. Refer to SK-1, dated 1/8/02 for partial wall section revision. 1.36 On Drawing A-401, detail F 1: CHANGE dimension of low wall horizontal cap from 8"to 12". 1.37 On Drawing A-501: ADD to General Sheet Notes: #4. Provide concrete footing pad, minimum size 1'-6"x 1'-6"square, under each pier. ADDENDUM No.1 PAGE 2 OF 6 Pearl Realty Trust Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ADDENDUM No. I January 8, 2002 PEARL REALTY TRUST Northampton, MA Architect's Project No. 20122 Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. 17 Hampden Street Springfield, MA 01 103 413-733-6798 GENERAL This Addendum shall supplement; amend and become part of the Contract Documents. All work called for shall comply with requirements specified for similar work unless otherwise described. The following addendum modifies only those specific items described herein. Bid Date: Contractors are reminded that closed bids must arrive or The hand delivered to the Architect's Office on or before 10:00 a.m. on January 17, 2002. Bids may be faxed on January 17', provided that original bids are received by January 22nd. Dietz& Company Architects, Inc, 17 Hampden Street, Springfield, MA 01 103. REVISIONS TO THE DRAWINGS 1.1 All drawings are printed at %2 scale of the original size, i.e. if the scale reads 1/4" = I'-0", it will actually scale at 1/8" = 1-0". 1.2 On Drawing L-I 10: CHANGE Sheet Keynote#I to read: Existing wood fence and gate to be removed. If possible,salvage and reinstall. 1.3 On Drawing L-I 10: DELETE Sheet Keynote #4 reference to new fence and gate behind the existing garage. 1.4 On Drawing AD-I 10: CHANGE General Sheet Note #3 to read: In order to remediate all lead based paint, removal will include, but not be limited to the following: doors and door jamb casings, windows, aprons,sills,window casing,and baseboard moldings. Items to be scraped and repainted will include, but not be limited to, existing door jambs, door head and casing,window head casing, and baseboards. Refer to SK-3, dated 1/8/02 and Abatement Specifications. 1.5 On Drawing AD-I 10: ADD to Sheet Keynote #15: Patch vinyl siding to match existing at removed bulkhead. 1.6 On Drawing AD-I 10: South rear deck should be dashed line to indicate its removal and partial salvage during construction. 1.7 On Drawing AD-1 10: CHANGE Sheet Keynote#13 to read: Remove existing deck anchoring, framing, stairs,and perimeter lattice to raise deck to Kitchen finish floor height. Partially salvage existing material for reinstallation. 1.8 On Drawing AD-I 10, First Floor Demolition Plan: ADD Sheet Keynote #26 to point to interior entry stair, left side handrail. Keynote to read: Remove existing handrail and balusters, salvage for reinstallation. Patch and refinish stairs. 1.9 On Drawing AD-1 10 ADD to General Sheet Notes: #8. Remove existing wood wainscot at north kitchen where walls are to remain. 1.10 On Drawing AD-I 10 ADD to General Sheet Notes: #9. Repair damage to ceilings in Bedrooms 207 and 209. 1.11 On Drawing A-110: CHANGE Sheet Keynote #1 to read: Raise existing deck to new kitchen floor height. Provide new stairs and handrails to grade and deck perimeter square lattice. Provide new ADDENDUM No.1 PAGE I OF 6 DIETZ&COMPANY ARCHITECTS,INC. C) MEMORANDUM TO: INVITED CONTRACTORS DATE: January 8,2001 CC: Margot Thomas RE: Pearl Realty Trust Rebecca Plaut Project#20122 File Addendum No. I FROM: Kristen K.Lawler ❑ FAXED,no.of pages including this page: ® Hard copy by hand delivery ❑ Attachments PLEASE BE ADVISED THAT GENERAL CONTRACTORS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR INFORMING THEIR SUBCONTRACTORS OF THE CONTENTS OF THIS ADDENDUM. 17 Hampden Street Springfield,MA 01 103 telephone (413)733-6798 facsimile (413)732-4385 e-mail office@dietzarch.com \\fs I\data\20122-pearl realty trust\bidding\addendum cover.doc DIETZ r t+ Zaq� C O . Architects DIETZ&COMPANY ARCHITECTS,INC. TRANSMITTAL TO: Mr.Anthony L. Patillo,CBO DATE: January 10,2002 Building Commissioner Zoning Enforcement Officer City of Northampton 212 Main Street—Room 100 Northampton,MA 0 1060-3189 CC: RE: Pearl Realty Trust Northampton,Massachusetts File Project No.20122 FROM: Kristen K.Lawler Z ATTACHED,via US mail ❑ FAXED,number of pages not including this page: COPIES DATE CSI No. DESCRIPTION 2 12/14/01 Construction Drawing Set 2 12/14/01 Project Manual 17 Hampden Street 2 1/8/02 Addendum No. I Springfield,MA 01 103 2 12/14/01 Fire Protection Narrative(on Drawing FP-I) telephone (413)733-6798 facsimile (413)732-4385 e-mail REMARKS office @dietzarch.com For your review. shop drawings logged by: \\fs I\data\20122-pearl realty trust\sd-cd\regreq\r010902_trn.doc D I E T Z .. : . ,r CO . Architecrs Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions 2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. T8 rapid-start, low-mercury lamps. rated 32 W maximum, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 75 (minimum), color temperature of 3500 K. and average rated life of 20,000 hours. unless otherwise indicated. MIR B. T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches (610 mm), 1300 initial lumens (minimum). CRI of 7S (minimum), color temperature of(3500] K.and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500, average rated life of 10.000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated. I. T4, Twin Tube: Rated 13 W,825 initial lumens(minimum). 2. T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 13 W. 900 initial lumens(minimum). 3. T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 18 W, 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 4. T4, Double-Twin Tube: Rated 26 W, 1800 initial lumens(minimum). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Will, A. Set units level, plumb,and square with ceiling and walls,and secure. B. Support for Suspended Fixtures: Brace pendants and rods over 48 inches (1220 mm) long w limit swinging. C. Lamping: Where specific lamp designations are not indicated, lamp units according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 16500- 2 "w° Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects. Inc Sensible Solutions SECTION 16500-LIGHTING PART I - GENERAL—(See section 160 10) go 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data for each luminaire, including lamps. B. Fixtures, Emergency Lighting Units, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Coordinate ceiling-mounted luminaires with ceiling construction, mechanical work and security and fire- prevention features mounted in ceiling space and on ceiling. PART 2- PRODUCTS ow 2.1 LUMINAIRES an A. Fixtures—per schedule on drawing E-1 2.2 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS ee A. Description: Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: W I. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output 2. Externally fused with slow-blow type rated between 2.65 and 3.0 times the line current OR B. Electronic ballasts for linear lamps shall include the following features.unless otherwise indicated I. Comply with NEMA C82.1 I. 2. Ballast Type: Rapid start. unless otherwise indicated. ws 3. Programmed Start: Ballasts with two-step lamp starting to extend life of frequently started lamps. 4. Sound Rating: A so 5. Total harmonic distortion rating of less than 20 percent according to NEMA C82.11. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A. 7. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor. Less than 1.7. am 9. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. ON C. Ballasts for compact lamps in nonrecessed fixtures shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: I. Power Factor. 90 percent, minimum. 2. Ballast Coil Temperature: 65 deg C, maximum. 3. Transient Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 for Category A I locations. LIGHTING 16500- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor,unless otherwise indicated. C. Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups[, bundle and wrap with wire ties). D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. E. Perform visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests stated in NETA ATS. END OF SECTION 16442 .A. PANELBOARDS 16442. 2 • Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions SECTION 16442 -PANELBOARDS PART I - GENERAL—(See Section 16010) 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data B. Comply with NEMA PB I. C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS A. Surface mounted, NEMA PB I, Type I. I. Front: Hinged to box with standard door within hinged cover. 2. Doors: With concealed hinges,flush catches,and tumbler locks,all keyed alike. 3. Bus: [Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity] [Tin-plated aluminum]. 4. Main and Neutral Lugs: [Compression] [Mechanical] type suitable for use with conductor material. 5. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box. 6. Feed-through Lugs: [Compression] [Mechanical] type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. B. Panelboard Short-Circuit Rating: UL label indicating series-connected rating with integral or remote upstream devices. Include size and type of upstream device allowable, branch devices allowable, and UL series-connected short-circuit rating. C. Load Centers: I. Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in, full-module circuit breaker. 2. Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type for main, neutral,and ground lugs and buses. D. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, plug-in type. Single handle for multipole circuit breakers. Appropriate for application, including Type SWD for repetitive switching lighting loads and Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning,and refrigerating equipment PART 3 - EXECUTION ,M 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessory items according to NEMA PB 1.1. Indicate installed circuit loads on a typed circuit directory after balancing panelboard loads. PANELBOARDS 16442 - 1 40 Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions SECTION 16410- ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS eo PART I - GENERAL(See section 16010) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Enclosed, Molded-Case Circuit Breaker. NEMA AB I, with lockable handle, standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles and thermal-magnetic trip, unless otherwise indicated. I. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size,trip ratings,and material of conductors. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating,air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time- delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. 4. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set: to trip at (55] [75] percent of rated voltage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING A. Perform visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests stated in NETA ATS. e� END OF SECTION + ON on rw ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410- 1 so Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions 4M B. Mount devices flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom, unless otherwise indicated. Group adjacent devices under single, muitigang wall plates. an C. Protect devices and assemblies during painting. D. Install wall plates when painting is complete. END OF SECTION 16140 w�a WIRING DEVICES 16140- 2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions pw SECTION 16140-WIRING DEVICES on PART I - GENERAL—(See section 16010) 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS e A. Submittals: Product Data. B. Comply with NEMA WD I. C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 DEVICES A. General: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a. testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,and marked for intended use. B. Color. White w C. Receptacles: General-Duty grade, NEMA WD I, NEMA WD 6, and UL 498. D. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles: Feed-through type, heavy-duty grade, with integral duplex receptacle;for installation in a 2-3A-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter. E. Snap Switches: Heavy-duty, quiet type. F. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with audible EMI/RFl filters and continuously adjustable slide, single-pole with soft tap or other quiet switch. W G. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, compatible with dimmer ballasts, with audible and electromagnetic noise filters and capable of consistent dimming to a maximum of 10 percent of full brightness. Include trim potentiometer. on H. Wall Plates, Finished Areas: Smooth plastic, fastened with metal screws having heads matching plate color. I. Wall Plates, Unfinished Areas: Galvanized steel with metal screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION RM A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure. WIRING DEVICES I6I40- 1 e" Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions e D. Install systems, materials,and equipment level and plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components,where installed exposed in finished spaces. E. Install equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance,and repair or replacement of equipment components. ON F. Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope. G. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 3.6 PAINTING AND FINISHING rw A. Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. B. Paint all miscellaneous steel with two coats of rustproof paint Re 3.7 CLEAN-UP A. At the end of each working day,the Contractor will remove all his/her equipment to the ON designated storage area,and leave all work areas in a reasonably clean condition. B. The Contractor will make all necessary arrangements for off-site disposal of all non-hazardous materials at any private or public dump,and of any hazardous materials at a facility licensed to handle such materials. The Contractor will obtain any necessary approvals to use such facilities and bear all associated costs. All such costs are to be included in the bid price. C. After completion of the work, all tools and other equipment shall be: removed from the site. All excess materials shall be removed and the site left broom clean. 3.8 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway sleeves and other penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original undisturbed fire-resistance ratings of assemblies. Firestopping installation is specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." ww 3.9 GUARANTEE A. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section. B. All materials, equipment,and workmanship furnished under this section shall carry a I-year warranty against all defects. Any fault due to defective or improper material,equipment, or workmanship shall be made good,forthwith, by and at the expense of the Electrical - subcontractor, including all other damage done to areas, materials and other systems resulting from this failure. C. Furnish, before the final payment is made,a written guarantee covering the above requirements. • END OF SECTION BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-5 Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices, chases, and openings, and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. D. Coordinate connection of electrical services to other equipment am 3.2 DEMOLITION we A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality,and functionality. so B. Accessible Work. Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in their entirety. C. Abandoned Work. Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish. D. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect,and make operational components indicated for relocation. oft 3.3 ROUGH-IN No A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. �.. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment,components,and materials if so indicated, including but not limited to removal of wiring, conduit fixtures, boxes,and any other devices made obsolete by the new Work B. Protect the structure,furnishings,finishes,and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. C. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials that match existing materials and Installers experienced with the materials and methods required. 3.5 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. B. Install all equipment according to manufacturers installation instructions. C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials,and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-4 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions D. In addition,and when so requested, the Contractor will instruct Ovvner's maintenance personnel as to such care and maintenance PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor will be responsible for purchasing and furnishing all materials and equipment required for a complete job. The Contractor will be solely responsible for ensuring that sufficient materials are on site so that the work can proceed in a smooth, continuous fashion. The Contractor is responsible for the ordering, handling, and security of all materials and equipment B. The Contractor will verify all existing site conditions and material needs before starting work on any task and before ordering delivery of any materials and/or equipment The Contractor will coordinate the time of delivery of all equipment and materials and have a designated representative present to coordinate and sign for the receipt of all equipment and materials. C. Once the material is signed for,the Contractor will move the materials to their proper storage site. It will be the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to arrange with G.C.for ! storage areas. 2.2 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLEING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers,types,grades, compliance labels,and other information needed for identification. t B. Protect all materials and equipment from moisture and dirt and extreme temperatures. Store in the manufacturers carton or crate until installation. C. The subcontractor shall be responsible for his work until its completion and final acceptance, and he shall replace any work or materials that have been damaged, lost, or stolen without additional cost to the Owner. !A 2.3 LABELLING AND IDENTIFYING A. Circuits: All new and existing circuits shall be clearly labeled as to area served. B. Panels: Install engraved plastic laminate sign, with a minimum I/2-inch -high lettering for the name of panel (example P-1) PART 3 EXECUTION Pill 3.1 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate electrical equipment installation with other building components. on B. Any discrepancies between equipment locations shown on the reflected ceiling plans, and Mechanical drawings shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for OR clarification. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-3 0 .. Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions to: material type,quality,and thickness; paint finish;electrical connections;etc. The Contractor must note in his bid if that bid includes alternate equipment B. If the Contractor chooses to provide equipment that is not as listed in the drawings or specifications he shall be responsible to redesign any part of the system that requires modification. , 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Generally,shop drawings are required for all fabricated work,all substituted equipment, and for layout of piping,and duct work, if the layout is different from that shown. B. The Contractor is responsible for checking and coordinating all shop drawings for compliance with documents, dimensions,and fit and for coordination with other trades. D. Literature on standard manufactured items showing illustrated cuts of the items to be furnished, details,size dimensions, performance and all other pertinent information shall be submitted for approval. Cut sheets shall be clearly marked as to what model,options,and accessories are being proposed. am 1.5 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. The Contractor will keep a hard copy of contract drawings at the site and mark any changes to drawings as changes are made. Indicate daily progress on these prints by coloring in the various circuits, devices, etc as they are installed. am B. The marked-up and colored-up prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the work installed. They may be inspected periodically and they shall be corrected immediately if found either inaccurate or incomplete. This process is mandatory. so C. Once the project is complete,the Contractor shall submit as-built drawings to the Architect/Engineer for approval. Once all of the Architect's and Engineer's comments are addressed, the Contractor shall submit one reproducible set of drawings as well as 3 bound OR blueprint set(s) (quality as determined by the Architect)to the Owner via the Architect D. As-built drawings should indicate approved substitutions, Contract Modifications,and actual equipment and materials installed. .. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MANUALS no A. Before final payment,the Contractor will furnish to the Owner four, labeled, hard-cover, 3- ring binders each containing a complete set of manufacturer's equipment maintenance and operation instructions. 00 B. Maintenance manuals shall also include, shop drawings, description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, complete nomenclature for replacement parts, and servicing instructions. C. Operating manuals to include the name,address and telephone number of the Manufacturers' representatives, and service company for each piece of equipment so that service or spare parts can be readily obtained. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-2 we Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions so 16010–BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 40 PART I GENERAL r 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Bidding Requirements, Contract Requirements and Division I—General Requirements all sR apply to all Sections of Division 16. B. The Contract Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other, and any labor or material called for by either,whether or not by both, shall be provided by this sub-contractor. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. All work done under Division 16 shall include all labor, materials,tools, equipment, rigging, hoisting, staging,transportation,insurance,temporary protection,supervision and incidental items essential for proper installation and operation of all systems. B. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract w C. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for all electrical installations covered by Division 16. I. Material and substitutions. 2. Submittals. 3. Record documents. go 4. Maintenance manuals. 5. Materials and Equipment 6. Delivery storage and handling. 7. Labeling and identifying. 8. Sequencing and scheduling. 9. Demolition 40 10. Rough-ins 1 I. Materials and equipment er 12. Cutting and patching. 13. Electrical installations. 14. Painting and finishing. 15. Clean-up 16. Fire-stopping 17. Guarantee. No 1.3 MATERIAL AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. The design is based on the use of the fixtures and equipment listed on the drawings. Equipment from other manufacturers can be substituted provided that it is equal or superior in all ways, including performance and construction."Construction"includes but is not limited r+ BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions e SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,AND GRILLES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submit Product Data, including color charts for factory finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLETS AND INLETS A. Diffusers & Registers: go I. Manufacturer and model per Drawing H-2, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate location and installation with duct installation and installation of other ceiling- and wall- mounted items, and with building structure. END OF SECTION 15855 so ie* so DIFFUSERS. REGISTERS,AND GRILLES 15855 - 1 +r. Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions on SECTION 15838- POWER VENTILATORS 40 PART I - GENERAL 40 I.I SECTION REQUIREMENTS r A. Submittals: Product Data B. Bear the AMCA seal. rw C. Comply with UL 705. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VENTILATORS AND ACCESSORIES A. Ceiling-Mounted Ventilators: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line applications. 40 I. Accessories—Bathroom exhausts to be controlled on same switch as room lights 2. Accessories—whole house fans: CFS-2WH control with hi-low switch and 12 hr timer. r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Ceiling-Mounted Units: Suspend units from structure using steel wire or metal straps. +w B. Ground power ventilators. END OF SECTION 15838 no 40 POWER VENTILATORS 15838- 1 w Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions .w A. Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated. B. Flex ducts: Runs to be properly stretched and not to exceed 8' in length. Flex ducts to terminate in rigid elbow or connector. C. Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces. D. Avoid passing through electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. E. Support and connect metal ducts according to SMACNA's"HVAC Duct Construction Standard." F. Install duct accessories according to applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards. G. Install volume-control dampers in each branch and as required to obtain design flows. 3.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A. Balance airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals to indicated quantities. All register and diffuser flows to be measured with a calibrated flow hood. END OF SECTION 15810 DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES 15810- 2 *+ 00 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions go SECTION 15810-DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES P0 PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Summary: Metal and nonmetal ducts and accessories in pressure class 2-inch wg (500 Pa) or less and a maximum velocity of 1000 fpm (12 m/s) in mains, 600 fpm (7.2' rn's;- in branches. B. Submittals: Shop Drawings detailing duct layout if different from that shown, including locations and types of duct accessories, duct sizes, transitions, radius of elbows, special supports details, and inlets and outlet types and locations. C. Comply with NFPA 90B D. Comply with UL 181 and UL IS I A for ducts and closures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Forming steel with hot-dip galvanized coating. B. Joint and Seam Tape: Comply with UL 181A. C. Joint and Seam Sealant: Comply with UL 181 A. D. Rectangular Metal Duct Fabrication: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standard" for w metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals,tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals. E. Flex Ducts: Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Volume-Control Dampers: Factory-fabri cated volume-control dampers, complete with required hardware and accessories. Single blade and multiple opposed blade,standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. po B. Flexible Connectors: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ! DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES 15810- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,=2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions B. Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping. C. Install shutoff valves and unions at hot-and cold-water piping connections. D. Make piping connections with dielectric fittings where dissimilar piping materials are joined. E. Electrically ground units according to authorities having jurisdiction. + F. Connect gas water heaters according to NFPA 54. Connect gas vent and draft hoods and diverters where required. Extend to outside and terminate in vent rap. w. END OF SECTION 15480 w� w ,W me ow ■o OR go DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15480- 2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. Sensible Solutions SECTION 15480- DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART I - GENERAL e" 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data B. Gas-Fired Water Heaters: Bear AGA certification label. C. Comply with requirements of applicable NSF, AWWA, or FDA and EPA regulatory standards for tasteless and odorless, potable-water-tank linings. D. Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed in ASHRAE 90.2, "Energy Efficient Design of New Low-Rise Residential Buildings." E. Warranties: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace water heaters and accessories that fail in materials or workmanship within six years from date of Substantial Completion. Failures include,but are not limited to,tanks and elements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER HEATERS, GENERAL A. Insulation: Suitable for operating temperature and required insulating value. Include insulation material that surrounds entire tank except connections and controls. B. Anode Rods: Factory installed, magnesium. C. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into tank. D. Drain Valve: Factory or field installed. 12 GAS-FIRED WATER HEATERS PR A Household, Storage, Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.10.1, 50-gal. (1 S I-IL) capacity; steel with 150-prig (1035-kPa) working-pressure rating; with adjustable thermostat; automatic gas-ignition system, draft hood;and through-wall, direct-vent system PART 3 - EXECUTION on 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install temperature and pressure relief valves and extend to closest floor drain. on an DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15480- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,-2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions B. Install floor drains at low pints of surface areas and where indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor. I. Trap drains connected to sanitary building drain. 2. Install drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes. no END OF SECTION 15430 m w .w PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430- 2 « Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions SECTION 15430-PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS ee A. Cleanouts I. Application: For installation in exposed piping 2. Body or Ferrule Material: Plastic B. Plastic Floor Drains 1. Material: ABS of PVC (to match piping) 2. Seepage Flange: Required. 3. Outlet: as required. 4. Top or Strainer Material: Stainless steel 5. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Stainless steel 6. Shape: Round 00 7. Trap Material: Plastic drainage piping 8. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap wr C. Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers: Nickel-plated bronze, with nonremovable and manual drain features and garden-hose threaded connection. D. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Manually adjustable, bronze body. Include check stop and union on hot- ` "" and cold-water-supply inlets. nlets. I. <Insert manufacturer's name; product.> E. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body in chrome-plated finish, with removable composition disc, threaded or soldered inlet,garden-hose threaded outlet,and wheel handle. F. Water Hammer Arrester. Bellows or piston type with pressurized cushioning chamber. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,=2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions J. Install individual supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and tubular brass traps with cleanouts at fixture. K. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations. L Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated. M. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. N. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew- resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. O. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment Install insulation on supplies and drains of fixtures for people with disabilities. P. Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to UL 486A and UL 486B. MR END OF SECTION 15410 so .w PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410- 2 •+� Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions SECTION 15410-PLUMBING FIXTURES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data for each type of plumbing fixture. B. Comply with requirements of Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," regarding water flow rate and water consumption of plumbing fixtures. C. Comply with applicable standards below: I. National Sanitation Foundation Construction: NSF 61. 2. Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act" w 3. Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act" PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIXTURES—Per schedule on P-I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATIONS s A. Install fitting insulation kits on fixtures for people with disabilities. ` B. Install fixtures with flanges and gasket seals. C. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment D. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated. I- Fasten floor-mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holies for securing fixture to wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls. F. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls. G. Fasten counter-mounting plumbing fixtures to casework. H. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture. I. Set shower receptors in leveling bed of cement grout. me PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410- 1 so Pearl Realty Trust December 14,=2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions MR B. Install shutoff valve,downstream from gas meter,at gas service entrance. C. Install gas stops for shutoff to appliances with NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller low-pressure gas supply. Install up gas valve upstream from and within 72 inches (1800 mm) of each appliance. Install union or flanged connection downstream from valve. D. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect Include outlets of gas ■m meters. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate would be subject to freezing. E. Install gas piping at uniform slope of 0.1 percent upward toward risers. F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. G. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. H. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from damage. Tag valves with metal tag indicating piping supplied. Attach tag to valve with metal chain. 1. Install pressure-relief or pressure-limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if valve is free; test to determine pressure at which they will operate; and examine for leakage when in closed position. J. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to NFPA 54, Part 4, "Gas Piping Inspection, Testing, and Purging", and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. so END OF SECTION 15194 an FUEL GAS PIPING 15194- 2 WM Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions as SECTION 15194- FUEL GAS PIPING wo PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS wr A. Gas System Pressure: One pressure range. 0.5 psig(3.45 kPa) or less B. Quality Assurance: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "National Fuel Gas Code." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, TUBE,AND SPECIALTIES A. Steel Pipe: Schedule 40, plain ends with Class 150,threaded, malleable-iron fittings. 2.2 VALVES A. Manual Valves: Comply with standards listed or, if appropriate,to ANSI Z21.15. RN B. Gas Stops: AGA-certified, bronze-body, plug type with bronze plug, for 2-psig (I 3.8-kPa) or less natural gas. Include AGA stamp, flat or square head or lever handle, and threaded ends complying with ASME B 1.20.1. C. Gas Valves: 150-psig (1035-kPa) WOG, cast-iron or bronze body, bronze plug, straightaway pattern, square head,tapered-plug type. 2.3 SPECIALTIES A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24,copper alloy. B. Strainers: Bronze body, Y-pattern, full size of connecting piping. Include stainless-steel screens with 3164-inch (1.2-mm) perforations and a pressure rating of 125-psig- (860-kPa-) minimum, WOG working pressure. PP PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS W A. Fuel Gas Piping, 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or Less: Steel piping 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off gas to premises or section of piping. FUEL GAS PIPING 15194- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions SECTION 15150-SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Pressure Requirement for Soil,Waste and Vent 10 feet head (30 kPa). B. Comply with NSF 14,"Plastic Piping Components and Related Materials." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS A. Copper Drainage Tube: Type DWV, drawn temper with Type DWV, wrought, or cast-copper drainage fittings B. PVC or ABS Plastic, DWV Pipe: ASTM D 2665, Schedule 40, plain ends and socket-type PVC or ABS DWV pipe fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE APPLICATIONS A. Aboveground applications: PVC or ABS plastic, DWV pipe and fittings with solvent-cemented joints. No multi-purpose solvent cement allowed. 3.2 INSPECTION A. Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 15150 wA SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14x2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions C. Install drain valve at base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and where required to drain water distribution piping system. �.w 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A Install hangers and supports at intervals indicated in the applicable plumbing code and as recommended by pipe manufacturer. B. Support vertical piping at each floor. on 3.4 INSPECTING AND CLEANING OR A. Inspect and test piping systems following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping following procedures of authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 15140 w. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140- 2 VM Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions RM SECTION 15140- DOMESTIC WATER PIPING OW PART I - GENERAL ee 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, minimum pressure requirements for water piping are as follows: 1. Service Entrance Piping. 160 psig(I 100 kPa). 2. Domestic Water Piping. 85 psig (550 kPa). B. Comply with NSF 61,"Drinking Water System Components-- Health Effects." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Soft Copper Tubing: Type K (Types A and B), water tube, annealed temper with copper pressure fittings, cast-copper-alloy or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. B. Hard Copper Tubing: Type L (Types B and C), water tube, drawn temper with wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. I. Copper Unions: Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Install listed pipe materials and joining methods below in the following applications: i I. Underground, Service Entrance Piping. Soft copper tubing-type K 2. Aboveground Distribution Piping. Type L (Type B) hard copper tubing 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install gate valves close to main on each branch and riser serving three or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections and where indicated. B. Install gate or ball valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to each plumbing fixture not having stops on supplies,and elsewhere as indicated. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions SECTION 15110-VALVES PART I - GENERAL (Not Applicable) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES 0M A. End Connections: Threads shall comply with ANSI B 1.20.1. Flanges shall comply with ANSI B 16.1 for cast-iron valves and ANSI B 16.24 for bronze valves. Solder-joint connections shall comply with ANSI 816.18. go B. One-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with chrome-plated bronze ball, PTFE or TFE seats,and 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP rating. C. Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze disc and seat D. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze body with nonrising stem and bronze solid wedge and union- ring bonnet. 4-M E. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze disc and union-ring bonnet PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Use gate and ball valves for shutoff duty;globe and ball for throttling duty. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves for each fixture and item of equipment. D. Install three-valve bypass around each pressure-reducing valve using throttling-type valves. I- Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. on G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level. "a END OF SECTION 15110 w on VALVES 15110- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,=3001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions J. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Installation: Seal joints with adhesive. K. Interior Piping System Applications: Insulate the following piping systems: I. Domestic hot water. 2. Exposed sanitary drains of fixtures for people with disabilities. L Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials,and equipment: I. Flexible connectors. 2. Fire-protection piping systems. 3. Sanitary drainage and vent piping. 4. Drainage piping located in crawlspaces, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Below-grade piping. 6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, except for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. 7. Piping specialties, including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators. M. Pipe Insulation Thickness Application Schedule: Insulate piping with the following materials and thicknesses: A. I. Domestic Hot Water and Cold Water 1/2-inch (I 2.7-mm) flexible elastomeric pipe insulation. 2. plications: Fiberglass board, 2 inches (50 mm) thick. am END OF SECTION 15080 a� .w MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080- 2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions SECTION 15080- MECHANICAL INSULATION e PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS a�. A. Submittals: Product Data for each type of mechanical insulation. B. Quality Assurance: Labeled with maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke- developed index of 50 according to ASTM E 84. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE INSULATION—acceptable types A. Preformed Glass-Fiber Pipe Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class I, with factory-applied, all-purpose, vapor- retarder jacket. B. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534,Type I. C. Polyolefin Pipe Insulation: Unicellular polyethylene, preformed pipe insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534,Type 1, except for density. no 2.2 INSTALLATION A. Install vapor barriers on insulated pipes with surface operating temperatures below 60 deg F (15 deg C). q[ B. Insulate fittings, valves,and specialties. MR C. Seal vapor-barrier penetrations for hangers, supports,anchors,and other projections. D. Coat glass-fiber pipe insulation ends with vapor-barrier coating. ow E. Seal ends of flexible elastomeric cellular insulation with adhesive. F. Interior Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions. G. Fire-Rated Walls and Partitions Penetrations: Terminate insulation at penetrations through fire-rated walls and partitions. Seal around penetration with through-penetration firestop systems specified in Division 7. H. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at the underside of the floor assembly and at the floor support at top of floor. Seal around penetration with through-penetration firestop systems specified in Division 7. I. Glass-Fiber Insulation Installation: Seal seams and joints with vapor-barrier compound. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions 3.8 FIRESTOPPING , A. Apply firestopping to pipe and duct sleeves and other penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original undisturbed fire-resistance ratings of assemblies. Firestopping installation is specified in Division 7 Section"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.9 GUARANTEE am A. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section. B. All materials, equipment,and workmanship furnished under this section shall carry a I-year warranty against all ** defects. Any fault due to defective or improper material, equipment, or workmanship shall be made good, forthwith, by and at the expense of the Fire Protection subcontractor, including all other damage done to areas, materials and other systems resulting from this failure. C. Furnish, before the final payment is made,a written guarantee covering the above requirements. END OF SECTION BASIC MECHANICAL METHODS 15010-6 .. Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. - Sensible Solutions ON 3. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. B. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment,components,and materials if so indicated, w, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping,ductwork,diffusers/registers and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work. C. Protect the structure,furnishings,finishes,and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. r D. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials that match existing materials and Installers experienced with the materials and methods required. ■w 3.5 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. B. Install all equipment according to manufacturers installation instructions. C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. on D. Install systems, materials,and equipment level and plumb,and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. E. Install mechanical equipment to&dlitaieg, maintenance,and repair or replacement of equipment components. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. F.Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope. G. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. ow H. All valves, compressors, etc., shall be adjusted and balanced for proper design intention. Written verification of this work when completed shall be submitted to the Architect 3.6 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. B. Paint all miscellaneous steel with two coats of rustproof paint r 3.7 CLEAN-UP A. At the end of each working day,the Contractor will remove all his/her equipment to the designated storage area, and leave all work areas in a reasonably clean condition. B. The Contractor will make all necessary arrangements for off-site disposal of all non-hazardous materials at any private or public dump. The Contractor will obtain any necessary approvals to use such facilities and bear all associated costs. All such costs are to be included in the bid price. C. After completion of the work,all tools and other equipment shall be removed from the site. All excess materials shall be removed and the site left broom clean. ro 40 BASIC MECHANICAL METHODS 15010-5 am Pearl Realty Trust December 14,200.1 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions D. Valves: All new valves shall have near circular brass valve tags of at least I Y4 "in diameter,attached with brass 0" hooks to each valve stem. Stamp on these valve tags in letters as large as practicable the number of the valve and the service and zone, such as "SP", "D",for sprinkler or drain, respectively. The numbers of each service shall be consecutive,and shall correspond to numbers indicated for valves on the record drawings. E. Adjusting. Relocate identifying devices which become visually blocked by work of this Division or other Divisions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components and the work of other trades. .■ B. Any discrepancies between equipment locations shown on the reflected ceiling plans, and Mechanical drawings shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for clarification. I" C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices, chases, and openings, and set sleeves in poured-in- place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. No D. Coordinate connection of electrical services. E. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completion of covering and painting where devices are applied 4' to surfaces. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. Protect existing mechanical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the «w course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality,and functionality. B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed mechanical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in their entirety. C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried piping& ductwork, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction and cap. Patching of surface to match existing finish by others. D. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect,and make operational components indicated for relocation. + 3.3 ROUGH-IN A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. wee 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting,fitting,and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: I. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work or Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. BASIC MECHANICAL METHODS 15010-4 w s.. Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor will be responsible for purchasing and furnishing all materials and equipment required for a complete job. The Contractor will be solely responsible for ensuring that:sufficient materials are on site so that the work can proceed in a smooth,continuous fashion. The Contractor is responsible for the ordering, handling, and security of all materials and equipment B. The Contractor will verify all existing site conditions and material needs before starting work on any task and before ordering delivery of any materials and/or equipment The Contractor will coordinate the time of delivery of all equipment and materials and have a designated representative present to coordinate and sign for the w. receipt of all equipment and materials. C. Once the material is signed for,the Contractor will move the materials to their proper storage site. It will be the HVAC Contractor's responsibility to arrange with G.C.for storage areas. wM 2.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLEING A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names,model numbers,types,grades,compliance labels,and other information needed for identification. B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage,and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt,debris,and moisture. C. Protect all materials and equipment from moisture and dirt and extreme temperatures. Store in the manufacturers carton or crate until installation. D. The subcontractor shall be responsible for his work until its completion and final acceptance, and he shall replace any work or materials that have been damaged, lost, or stolen without additional cost to the Owner. 2.3 LABELLING AND IDENTIFYING A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system, including arrows showing normal direction of flow. a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units. C. Near locations where pipes pass through walls,floors, ceilings, or enter inaccessible enclosures. d. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. e. Spaced at a maximum of 50-foot intervals along each run. B. Piping systems may be identified with stenciling or with approved snap-on covers, designating services and direction of flow. Labeling shall be applied on the apparatus in full view and shall be a color that is in sharp Aw contrast with the background. The apparatus shall be thoroughly cleaned (and painted, if necessary) before labeling is applied. Letters shall not be less than I %z"in height. Arrows shall not be less than 9"long. ww C. Equipment Install engraved plastic laminate signor equipment marker,with a minimum I/4-inch -high lettering for the name of unit, (example FCU-I)where viewing distance is less than 2 feet, 1/2-inch-high for distances up to 6 feet and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering 2/3 to 3/4 of size of principal lettering. go BASIC MECHANICAL METHODS 15010-3 .w Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001_ Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions B. If the Contractor chooses to provide equipment that is not as listed in the drawings or specifications he shall be responsible to redesign any part of the system that requires modification. 1.4 SUBMITTALS .� A. Generally, shop drawings are required for all fabricated work, all substituted equipment,and for layout of piping, and duct work, if the layout is different from that shown. B. The Contractor is responsible for checking and coordinating all shop drawings for compliance with documents, dimensions,and fit,and for coordination with other trades. D. Literature on standard manufactured items showing illustrated cuts of the items to be furnished, details,size dimensions, performance and all other pertinent information shall be submitted for approval in the same manner as the procedure for custom shop drawings. Cut sheets shall be clearly marked as to what model, options,and accessories are being proposed. 1.5 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. The Contractor will keep a hard copy of contract drawings at the site and mark any changes to drawings as changes are made. Indicate daily progress on these prints by coloring in the various pipes, valves,apparatus and associated appurtenances as they are erected. B. The marked-up and colored-up prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the work installed. They may be inspected periodically and they shall be corrected immediately if found either inaccurate or incomplete. This process is mandatory. C. At the completion of the job,these prints shall be submitted to the General Contractor and then to the Architect/Engineer for final review and comment After all of the Architect's/Engineer's comments are addressed, the Mechanical Contractor shall submit one reproducible set of drawings as well as 3 bound blueprint set(s) (quality as determined by the Architect) to the Owner via the Architect D. As-built drawings should indicate approved substitutions, Contract Modifications,and actual equipment and materials installed. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Before final payment,the Contractor will furnish to the Owner four, labeled, hard-cover, 3-ring binders each containing a complete set of manufacturer's equipment maintenance and operation instructions. B. Maintenance manuals shall also include,shop drawings, description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, complete nomenclature for replacement parts, servicing instructions,and lubrication charts and schedules. C. Operating manuals to include the name,address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative,and service company for each piece of equipment so that service or spare parts can be readily obtained. D. In addition, and when so requested, the Contractor will instruct Owner's maintenance personnel as to such care and maintenance BASIC MECHANICAL METHODS 15010-2 go Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions we 15010–BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS w PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Bidding Requirements, Contract Requirements and Division I—General Requirements all apply to all Sections of Division 15. B. The Contract Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other,and any labor or material called for by either, whether or not by both,shall be provided by this sub-contractor. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. All work done under Division 15 shall include all labor, materials,tools,equipment, rigging, hoisting,staging, transportation, insurance,temporary protection, supervision and incidental items essential for proper installation and operation of all systems. B. Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under the Contract C. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for all mechanical installations covered by Division 15. no, I. Material and substitutions. 2. Submittals. 3. Record documents. 4. Maintenance manuals. 5. Materials and Equipment 6. Delivery storage and handling. 7. Labeling and identifying. 8. Sequencing and scheduling. 9. Demolition 10. Rough-ins 11. Materials and equipment 12. Cutting and patching. 13. Mechanical installations. 14. Painting and finishing. 15. Clean-up 16. Fire-stopping 17. Guarantee. ON 1.3 MATERIAL AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. The design is based on the use of the equipment listed on the drawings. Equipment from other manufacturers can be substituted provided that it is equal or superior in all ways, including performance and construction. "Construction" includes but is not limited to: material type, quality,and thickness; paint finish;type and quality of on bearings;electrical connections;access panels; motors; etc. The Contractor must note in his bid if that bid includes alternate equipment. BASIC MECHANICAL METHODS 15010-1 Pearl Realty Trust Decembei 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Test-operate platform lift continuously between lowest and highest landings served, hoisting full-rated capacity load for a minimum of 30 minutes. Readjust car stops and other devices and signal equipment for accurate landings and operation of system after completing test .w B. Provide inspection and certificate as required by State. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel in proper operation and maintenance of platform lifts. Train ., Owner's maintenance personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Wheelchair Lift Schedule: I. Manufacturer. Garaventa 2. Model: Genesis Shaftway Vertical Lift 3. Capacity: 750 pounds. ,. 4. Speed: approx. 18 feet per minute. 5. Platform Size: 38 inches wide by 54 inches deep,clear inside platform dimensions. 6. Vertical Travel Distance: approximately 4 feet 7. Pit: recessed below ground level for platform access flush with finished floor at both landings. B. Stair Lift Schedule: I. Manufacturer. Stannah Stairlifts 2. Model: 300. 3. Vertical Travel Distance: first floor to second, straight run,approx. 16 feet END OF SECTION .M .r� PLATFORM AND STAIR LIFTS 14420-4 �. Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Car Finish: Enameled steel. 2. Provide grab rail on side of platform guard. H. Hoistway Doors and Frames: Provide manufacturer's flush hollow-metal door and frame units complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing at atmospheric pressure according to NFPA 252. I. Flush inside shaft Provide frames of depth and profile required to coordinate with hoistway wall construction, providing finished door and frame flush with the hoistway sill and flush with the wall above and below the door. 2. Hoistway Doors: Side-hinged doors, 36 inch width by 6'-8 height,aligned with car platform. 3. Door Operation: Self closing,with electro-mechanical door interlocks. a. Door interlocks: Provide electro-mechanical door interlocks, approved by the Massachusetts Board of Elevator Regulations or a recognized testing laboratory, in accordance with procedures in UL 104. 4. Door and frame finish: Enameled steel. 5. Rating One and one-half hours (in two hour rated shaft enclosure). 6. Vision panel: 3 by 33 inch with wired glass. 7. Hardware: 3 spring hinges, satin chrome push plate on inside of door with accessible pull on outside. 8. Sill: Flush aluminum checker plate landing sills, width of frame, drilled for recessed screw head fastening. 9. Emergency Equipment Provide manufacturer's standard battery operation and emergency lowering device to lower platform to ground floor landing in event of power failure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Alignment Coordinate hoistway doors with platform lift travel and car positioning for accurate alignment and minimum clearance between car, hoistway doors,sills, and door frame at each landing. C. Set sills flush with finished surface of floors and inside finished hoistway wall. Level, shim and secure sills solidly in place to wood framing. D. Adjust car stops for accurate leveling of car at each landing,within specified tolerances. E. Lubricate operating parrs of platform lift, including internal operating machinery and hardware. e 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ws PLATFORM AND STAIR LIFTS 14420-3 Peari Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Arrangement of systems indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic, and indicates the minimum requirements for the work. Site conditions shall determine the actual arrangement of systems. Take field measurements before fabrication. Be responsible for accuracy of dimensions and layout C. Installer Qualifications: Platform lift manufacturer or a qualified installer approved by platform lift manufacturer who has completed platform lift installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, comply with ASME A 17.1, "Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators,"with Massachusetts amendments. E. Comply with requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS). ..w PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard preengineered platform lifts. Where not otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's products as indicated in published product literature and as required for complete platform lift systems. B. Systems and Machinery: I. Driving Machine Type: Hydraulic drive completely enclosed in tower. ! 2. Inserts: Furnish anchorage devices required for installing structural members,towers, equipment, and other components of platform lift work. C. Control System: Provide manufacturer's standard, fully automatic, call-and-send control system that .. responds to on/off key switch and constant pressure push-button call signals at each landing. I. Provide on-off key switch, constant pressure directional push buttons, emergency stop switch and audible emergency signaling device, located in car. 2. When key switch in car is on, landing signal controls shall be inoperative. • D. Electrical: Verify location and rough wiring of all components. Rough in boxes and controls shall be recessed with concealed wiring, both inside and outside the shaft. Make final connections and test control and power wiring. E. Leveling Tolerance: Provide automatic car stopping system with 1/2-inch leveling tolerance, regardless of load or direction of travel. �.. F. Finish Materials: Provide the following materials and finishes for exposed parts of platform lift car enclosures, car sides,tower enclosure, hoistway doors and frames,and signal equipment as indicated: I. Enameled Steel Sheet Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 366/A 366M, or hot-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 569/A 569M, with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect G. Car Construction, General: Provide manufacturer's standard car construction of formed, reinforced, and sound-deadened steel sheet with welded joints. of PLATFORM AND STAIR LIFTS 14420-2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 14420—PLATFORM AND STAIR LIFTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS �. A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. w 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide the following. I. Vertical platform lifts. 2. inclined stairway chair lifts. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for bottom support pad, setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for framing of shaftway and wood support blocking. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting"for field painting of shaft interior. 4. Division 15 Section "HVAC"for hoistway vent and duct 5. Division 16 Section "Electrical'for electrical service and wiring, including disconnect switches. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, controls, finishes, and similar information. B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating door operation and locations, signal and control system equipment locations, coordination with building structure, and relationships with other construction. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, locations of controls, and access to and ventilation for hoistway. C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Indicate maximum and average power demands. D. Maintenance Manuals: Include operation and maintenance instructions, parts list with sources indicated, *e recommended parts inventory list, emergency instructions, and similar information. Include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and installer's maintenance personnel. Submit for Owner's information at Project closeout as specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE go A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. �w w� PLATFORM AND STAIR LIFTS 14420-1 No Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions OR C. Protect piping from earthquake damage. ,w D. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection. Install gages to permit removal,and install where they will not be subject to freezing. E. Install alarm check valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. 3.3 SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS A. Special Applications: Use extended coverage,and quick-response sprinklers where indicated. B. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view, rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view,and dull chrome in residential spaces. e� 3.4 SPECIALTIES AND ALARMS INSTALLATIONS A. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm system. 3.5 TESTING A. Perform field acceptance tests of each fire-protection system. e., B. Flush,test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems according to NFPA 13, Chapter"System Acceptance." END OF SECTION 13930 �w e. WET-PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930- 3 Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions D. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 175-psig (I 200-kPa)working pressure, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, and single- hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, fill-line attachment with strainer, and drip cup assembly. 2.3 SPRINKLERS A. Automatic Sprinklers: With heat-responsive element complying with the following. I. UL 1626,for residential applications. B. Sprinkler types include the following. I. Upright, pendent,and sidewall sprinklers. C. Sprinkler Finishes: Chrome plated and bronze. D. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Chrome-plated steel, one piece,flat. E. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished steel cabinet and hinged cover, with space for minimum of 6 spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench, suitable for wall mounting. Include 2 spare sprinklers and one wrench ' for each type of sprinkler. 2.4 SPECIALTIES AND ALARMS A. Pressure Switches: UL 753; electrical-supervision-type, water-flow switch with retard feature. Include single-pole, double-throw, normally closed contacts and design that operates on rising pressure and signals water flow. B. Valve Supervisory Switches: UL 753; electrical; single-pole, double throw; with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position. C. Pressure Gages: UL 393, 3-112- to 4-1/2-inch- (90- to 115-mm-) diameter dial with dial range of 0 to 250 psig (0 to 1725 kPa). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATION .. A. Use copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints for all combined sprinkler, domestic water piping. CPVC plastic pipe and fittings may be used for sprinkler pipe where it can be installed .�. exactly per listing. B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and all required accessories at connection to water service piping. o 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler piping, complete with shutoff valve. B. Install alarm devices in piping systems. WET-PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930- 2 P Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions ON SECTION 13930-WET-PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS w A. Submittals: Product Data for valves, sprinklers,specialties, and alarms. I. Submit sprinkler system drawings identified as "working plans" and calculations according to NFPA 13D. Submit required number of sets to authorities having jurisdiction for review, comment,and approval. Include system hydraulic calculations. 2. Submit test reports and certificates as described in NFPA 13D. w B. Design and Installation Approval: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Hydraulically design sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13D. so D. Comply with NFPA 13D and NFPA 70. E. UL-listed and -labeled and FMG-approved pipe and fittings. No PART 2 - PRODUCTS an 2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B);drawn temper. B. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 442, UL 1821, 175-psig (1207-kPa) rating, made in NPS (DN) for sprinkler w� service. Include "Listed"and "CPVC Sprinkler Pipe" marks on pipe. C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME 816.22,streamlined pattern. ' D. CPVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: ASTM F 438 for NPS 3!4 to NPS 1-112 (DN 20 to DN 40) and ASTM F 439 for NPS 2 (DN 50), UL listed, 175-psig (I 207-kPa) rating, for sprinkler service. Include "Listed" and "CPVC Sprinkler Fitting" marks on fittings. 2.2 VALVES A Fire-Protection Service Valves: UL listed and FMG approved, with 175-psig (1207-kPa) nonshock minimum working-pressure rating. Valves for use with grooved piping may be grooved type. Indicating valves shall be butterfly or ball type, bronze body with threaded ends, and integral indicating device with I I S-V ac. electric, 2-circuit supervisory switch indicator. B. Gate Valves: UL 262,cast bronze, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem. C. Swing Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller. UL 312 or MSS SP-80, Class 150; bronze body with bronze disc and threaded ends. WET-PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS 13930- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,1001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions B. Visual Alarm Device: Xenon-strobe lights with the word "FIRE" engraved in I-inch- (25-mm-) high letters. Rated Light Output 75 candela. on C. Central Fire Alarm Control Panel: UL 864. D. Emergency Power Supply: Components include sealed, gelled-electrolyte or nickel-cadmium battery, No charger,and an automatic transfer switch. E. Wires: Solid copper,with 6004-rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation. WF I. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 18 AWG, minimum. 2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. 3. Power-Limited Circuits: NFPA 70, Types FPL, FPLR, FPLP,or substitutes permitted by NFPA 70. No PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION w. A. Install and test systems according to NFPA 72. Comply with [EIA/TIA 570 requirements for light- commercial and residential occupancies] go B. Ground cable shields and equipment C. Final connections between the equipment and the wiring system shall be made under direct supervision of a representative of the manufacturer. D. The final test must be conducted by an underwriters laboratories listed UUJS Company. A copy of the final test shall be submitted upon completion. Provide file number with submittal. END OF SECTION 13851 ON as ws FIRE ALARM 13851 - 2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Sensible Solutions SECTION 13851 -FIRE ALARM PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. All panels and devices shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer. The catalog numbers speci- fied under this section are those of Notifier and constitute the type, quality and desired operation. ew B. Summary: Noncoded system with manual and automatic alarm initiation;zoned, using individual circuits for each zone of alarm initiation and notification appliances. Alarms include horns,and xenon-strobe units. C. Submittals: System operating description, connection diagrams, and component descriptions to engineer and to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Comply with NFPA 70. E. Comply with NFPA 72. F. UL listed and labeled. on PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT—Notifier models as listed below or equal. A. SFP-400B Alarm System. B. Batteries PSI 270 for 60 hours standby. C. Smoke Detectors 2400. D. Horn-Strobe P241 10. E. Strobe S241575. F. Pull stations NBG-12. 2.2 ALARM-INITIATING DEVICES A. Manual Pull Stations: Double acting, metal or plastic, red in color with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color. B. Smoke Detectors: UL 268, 24-V dc,self-restoring, photoelectric type, pllug-in arrangement. on 2.3 ALARM-INDICATING DEVICE A. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type,90 dB at 10 feet (3 m). FIRE ALARM 13851 - I on Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. Seal all sink cutouts, and other raw edges of plywood substrate of all countertops with varnish to prevent future water penetration. F. Fasten plastic laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of countertop. Spline and glue joints in countertops and provide concealed mechanical clamping of joint 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and lubricate to provide unencumbered operation. B. Clean casework on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 12356- 7 «m Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. .m D. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front style, cove, and backsplash style: I. Front Style: As detailed on drawings. go 2. Cove: Direct bond. 3. Backsplash and Endsplash Style: As detailed on drawings. E. Finish: At countertops, provide 'Crystal' finish (Wilsonart) or equivalent by other manufacturers for increased abrasion resistance.At wall installation, provide standard matte finish. F. Color. As selected by Architect G. Counter Mounting Brackets: I. Material: steel plate: 3/16 inch thickness by 3 inch width minimum. 2. Configuration: flat angle iron, with welded right angle bend, approximate 24 inches each leg. Field verify dimensions to fit counter and provide support at front edge. 3. Shop fabricate: weld angle at corner to obtain full strength. Drill each leg for three 3/8 inch lag bolts. Shop prime after fabrication 2.10 VANITY COUNTERTOPS, SOLID SURFACE A. Solid surface products: Reinforced integral color compression molded modified acrylic, filled with natural minerals and coloring, solid surface product, NEMA LD3-3.09 stain resistant, ASTM E 84 flame spread less than 15, NSF approved, 25 year warranty against defects and thermal cracking, color as selected by Architect from complete line of solid and aggregate colors. I. Integral Sink Cast Vanity Tops Standards: ANSI Z 124.3 2. Cast sink tops shall be 22" deep with 4" high back and side splashes. Tops shall be 3/4" thick minimum with integral sink. 3. Aprons: provide below counter aprons as indicated of matching material. Dimensions as re- quired for ADA clearance under counter. ws PART 3 - EXECUTION an 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces using concealed shims. Where so casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face. B. Install casework without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are aligned. am Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. Install all hardware plumb, even and aligned. no C. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet D. Fasten unit of casework to adjacent unit and into structural support members of wall construction with #10 sheet metal or wood screws with washer head or washer. KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 12356 -6 "" Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. Shelves: 112-inch-thick exterior hardwood plywood with wood banded exposed (front) edge. Let into dadoes of end panels and brace behind mulls. 2.6 WOOD FACE CASEWORK, FINISHES A. Factory Finishing. To the greatest extent possible, finish casework at factory. Defer only final touch-up until after installation. Provide stain, sealer and top coats, lightly sanded between applications. Oven dry sealer and top coats. P0 B. Finish: Provide selections made by Architect from full range of standard finishes available. 2.7 CASEWORK HARDWARE A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with ANSI A156.9,of type, material,size, and finish as selected from manufacturer's standard choices. 00 B. Hinges: Provide corrosion resistant, heavy duty, self-closing, semi=concealed wraparound hinges in finish to match handles. C. Pulls: Provide 4" brushed brass wirepulls. 2.8 COUNTERTOPS, SOLID SURFACE A. Solid surface products: Reinforced integral color compression molded modified acrylic, filled with natural minerals and coloring, solid surface product, NEMA LD3-3.09 stain resistant, ASTM E 84 flame spread less than 15, NSF approved, 25 year warranty against defects and thermal cracking, color as selected by Architect from complete line of solid and aggregate colors. B. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front style, cove, and backsplash style: I. Tops: Shall be 3/4"thick minimum 2. Front Style: Molded,as detailed on drawings. 3. Cove: Direct bond. 4. Backsplash and Endsplash Style: 4" high back and side splashes. C. Aprons: provide below counter aprons as indicated of matching material. Dimensions as required for ADA clearance under counter. D. Counter Mounting Brackets: I. Material: steel plate: 3/16 inch thickness by 3 inch width minimum. 2. Configuration: flat angle iron, with welded right angle bend, approximate 24 inches each leg. Field verify dimensions to fit counter and provide support at front edge. 3. Shop fabricate: weld angle at corner to obtain full strength. Drill each leg for three 3/8 inch lag bolts. Shop prime after fabrication. 2.9 COUNTERTOPS, PLASTIC LAMINATE A. General: Comply with ANSI A 161.2. B. Countertop, Backsplash, and Endsplash Substrate: APA plywood, Exterior grade, A/C faces, 3/4". Particle board will not be allowed. C. Countertop. Backsplash, Endsplash and Wallsplash between counter and cabinet fabrication: Plastic laminate PF 42. KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 12356- 5 w. Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Wall Hung Unit Bottoms: 1/2-inch thick exterior hardwood plywood, with wood banded front edge. Let into dadoes in ends, installation cleats,and front frames,glued and stapled. E. Base Cabinet Bottoms: 1/2-inch-thick exterior hardwood plywood, fully supported by and secured in rabbets in end panels, front rails, and installation cleats supported by 3/4" thick pressure treated solid lumber braces, 24"o.c., running front to rear and resting on floor. w F. Base Unit and Wall-Hung Unit Back Panels: 1/4-inch-thick 2-2 Grade exterior hardwood plywood, glued and stapled to ends, 3 1/2"cleats and shelves. G. Front Frame Drawer Rails: 1-by-1-1/4-inch solid wood mortised and fastened into face frame. .w H. End Panels: 1/2 inch thick 5 ply exterior grade hardwood plywood dadoed 1/4" minimum for shelves, bottoms and tops. Base cabinets stop 3-1/2" above floor and are supported by 3/4" x 3-1/2" pressure treated solid wood. Exposed end panels shall be finished and have veneer to match face frame. I. Toe Boards: 3/4-inch-thick pressure treated solid lumber attached between end panels and extended from bottom panel to floor. J. Corner Blocks: Solid wood, glued and fastened in each top corner to maintain casework squareness and rigidity. 2.5 KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK A. Corner Posts: 3/4-by-7/8-inch solid wood, attached to vertical corners; fabricated with notches to provide adjustability and retainment of interior storage devices. B. Doors: 3/4" thick, 7 ply, A-2 grade exterior hardwood plywood with no more than one veneer joint of face. Provide silencers at top and bottom of door. C. Drawers: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws (minimum of four) from interior of body. Fabricate with subfront and back rabbeted into sides and secured with glue and mechanical fasteners as follows: I. Fronts: 3/4" thick, 7 ply A-2 grade exterior hardwood plywood. no 2. Subfronts, Sides,and Backs: 1 1/16" Grade C solid lumber. 3. Bottoms: 1/4"thick hardwood exterior plywood set into rabbets in back, sides and front 4. Drawer Suspension: Provide heavy duty drawer slides with a minimum capacity of 100 lb, zinc- plated cold rolled steel, with twin-track, side-mounted, drawer-glide suspension with ball bearing nylon rollers. Provide self-closing feature, lever release, and positive stop. Provide KV 1305 or Architect approved equivalent If heavy duty slide not provided by manufacturer, contractor shall .. provide. a. Pull-Out Stops: Provide stops at drawers to prevent accidental pull-out 5. Push-In Stops: In addition to silencers, provide stops mounted on underside of the countertop to prevent the drawer from being slammed into the face of the cabinet Stops shall have a vinyl or rubber bumper to reduce shock and noise. Locate stops so that when drawer is closed, there �+ is a 1/64" to 1/32"gap between drawer front and cabinet face. If not provided by manufacturer, contractor shall provide them. Provide floor type door stops, Ives#436 or#063 or equivalent D. Door and Drawer Silencers: Provide 1/8" foam cushion stops at all doors and drawers. Provide 2 per door and 4 per drawer. ON KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 12356 -4 oft Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Plastic Laminate for Wall Surfaces: I. Domtar Industries, Inc. 2. Formica Corp. 3. Laminart. 4. Nevamar Corp. S. Sterling Engineered Products, Inc. Pionite 6. Westinghouse Electric Corp., Micarta Div. 7. Wilson Plastics Co., Dart Industries, Inc. E. Cabinet Specification based on HUD Severe Use Specification. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Sizes, dimensions,and thicknesses given are minimum dimensions. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, mat-formed particleboard, Grade 1=M-2 with minimum density of 40 pcf, internal bond of 60 psi,and minimum screw-holding capacity of 225 lb on faces and 200 lb on edges. C. Countertop Plywood:APA Exterior grade,A/C faces. D. Hardwood Plywood: ANSI/HPMA HP hardwood and decorative plywood, Good Grade(1) or better. E. Particleboard Core Plywood: ANSI/HPMA HP hardwood and decorative plywood, Good Grade (1) or better. w F. Solid Wood: Clear, dry, sound, and free of defects selected from First Grade lumber as defined by N H LA. G. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1, tempered. w H. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3; in thicknesses indicated and colors or patterns, and finishes as selected from approved samples. At countertops, provide `Crystal' finish (Wilsonart) or equivalent by other manufacturers for increased abrasion resistance. 2.3 WOOD FACE CASEWORK SPECIES AND STYLE on A. Solid Wood and Face Veneer Species: Red or white oak. B. Face Style: Reveal overlay. Edges reversed shaped for continuous finger grip at all sides. 2.4 WOOD FACE CASEWORK FABRICATION A. Face Frame: 3/4" kiln dried solid hardwood with 1-1/2" stiles, 3" mulls, 1-3/4" rails. Rails and stiles dadoed to receive ends, bottoms and tops. Frames mortised and tenoned, glued and stapled under pressure. 0 B. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid wood stiles and rails, 3/4 inch thick for doors and drawer fronts, with 1/4-inch-thick plywood for center panels. am C. Installation Cleats: 3/4-by-3-1/2 inch solid wood S4S"C" Grade kiln dried, running full length of wall and base cabinet at top of bottom. 1. Base cabinets shall have 7-1/4" cleat at top and 3-1/2" cleat at bottom. 40 KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 12356- 3 ..w Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Shop drawings for integral sink cast vanity tops showing sizes to fit existing openings, bowl size and configuration, back and side splashes and overall thickness. G. Samples for initial selection purposes of manufacturer's color charts in the form of unit sections showing «s. the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated or exposed to view. so H. Maintenance data for kitchen casework for inclusion in Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE an A. Kitchen Casework: Comply with ANSI/KCMA AI61.1 and HUD "Minimum Property Standards," Housing 4910.1, paragraph 61 1-1.1. •o B. NKCA Certification: Provide kitchen casework with National Kitchen Cabinet Association (NKCA) "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semi-exposed location of each unit, evidencing compliance with above standard. „e C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain kitchen and bathroom casework from one source of a single manufacturer. to 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver casework as factory-assembled units, packaged individually,and shipped each in its own carton. .. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with casework manufacturer's recommendations for optimum w temperature and humidity conditions during storage and installation. Do not install casework until these conditions have been attained and stabilized. B. Field Measurements: Verify casework dimensions by field measurements. Verify kitchen casework can be installed in compliance with the original design and referenced standards. C. Field Measurements: Verify countertop size and shape prior to fabrication by field measurements taken after base units are installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS am 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ." A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Kitchen Casework: I. Evans Cabinet Corp. 2. Southeast Millwork& Casework Manufacturers .� 3. Wellborn Cabinets C. Solid surface for Countertops: 1. Swanstone by Swan Corporation. 2. Surell by Formica. 3. Conan by DuPont KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 12356 -2 �* Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. .lw SECTION 12356—KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. wood kitchen and bathroom cabinets 2. solid surface countertops with backsplash. 3. vanity countertops with integral sinks 4. plastic laminate countertops with integral backsplash. (Alternate No. Three) B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Alternates"for information relative to alternates. 2. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry"for solid surface tub and shower surrounds. !�* 3. Division IS Section "Plumbing"for sinks, plumbing fittings and piping. 1.3 DEFINITIONS OR A. Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces visible when drawers and opaque doors are closed; bottoms of casework 43 inches or more above finished floor. B. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Surfaces which become visible when opaque doors are open or drawers are extended; bottoms of casework more than 30 inches and less than 42 inches above finished floor. PO C. Concealed Surfaces: Surfaces considered concealed when surfaces not visible after installation; bottoms of casework less than 30 inches above finished floor, tops of casework over 78 inches above finished floor and not visible from an upper level; stretchers, blocking,and components concealed by drawers. "a D. Reveal Overlay: Door and drawer faces partially cover cabinet frame. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for each casework type specified. C. Product data for each hardware type specified. ex D. Shop drawings for casework showing location and size, accessories, materials, finishes, and filler panels. Include fully dimensioned plans, elevations, and anchorage details to countertop and walls. so E. Shop drawings for countertops showing sizes, shapes, edge and backsplash profiles, cutouts for plumbing fixtures,and methods of joining. on KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK 123S6- I eR Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. e. Self-leveling rear legs. f. Sound-reduction system. g. Reversible door. H. Gas Clothes Dryer. Where indicated, provide clothes dryers complying with the following I. Type: Heavy-duty grade OPL freestanding,front loading. 2. Manufacturer. Frigidaire, Gallery Series,#FSG447GH. 3. Accessibility: meet ADA guidelines 4. Drum: Porcelain-enamel-coated steel interior. 5. Capacity: 5.7 cu.ft. minimum 6. Operation: 120/240-V service with %, hp motor. 7. Gas rating: 24,000 btu/hr min. 8. Air flow: 220 cubic feet per minute 9. Controls: Solid-state,electronic-touch-pad, press-to-start type. 10. Finish: Porcelain enamel on steel. 11. Standard features include the following. a. Timed cycle selection. b. Fabric selector. C. Cycle-end signal. d. Safety starting control. e. Removable lint filter. f. Reversible door. I. Microwave: Where indicated, provide microwave complying with the following. I. Type: Countertop, side opening. 2. Manufacturer. Frigidaire, Gallery Serier,#GLMB186K. 3. Power. 1 100 watts/ 10 power levels. on 4. Cooking: Sensor cooking with auto-defrost. 5. Controls:Solid-state,electronic-touch-pad, press-to-start type. i END OF SECTION on go so ,M APPLIANCES 11451 - 7 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3) Two ice cube trays. 7. Finish: Porcelain enamel on steel. 8. Standard features include the following- a. Interior light in fresh food compartment. b. Adjustable rollers. "�► C. Adjustable compartment shelves. F. Dishwasher. Where indicated, provide dishwashers complying with the following. I. Type: Automatic, built-in, under-the-counter dishwasher, sized to replace 24-inch cabinet, operable at water pressures from 15 to 120 psi. 2. Manufacturer. KitchenAid, #KUD 101 TJBI_ 3. Tub and Door Liner. Stainless steel. a. Detergent Dispenser. Sealed detergent and automatic rinsing-aid dispensers in door liner. 4. Rack System: Nylon-coated sliding dish racks with removable silverware basket. 5. Operation: Three wash cycles with hot-air and heat-off drying cycle options. 6. Controls: Solid-state,electronic, press-to-start type. 7. Standard features include the following: a. Full-extension, vinyl-coated, upper and lower dish racks. b. Removable silverware basket C. Sound-absorbing exterior insulation blanket around tub and back. d. Hard food disposer. w� e. Self-cleaning food-filter system. G. Clothes Washer. Where indicated, provide clothes washers complying with the following. I. Type: Heavy-duty grade OPL freestanding, front-loading, automatic clothes washer, operable at water pressures from 30 to 120 psi. 2. Manufacturer. Frigidaire, Gallery Series,#FWT647GH. .. 3. Accessibility: meet ADA guidelines 4. Tub: Perforated stainless steel tub with extra-large capacity. 5. Water usage: 5 gallons hot water cycle, 2.5 gallons warm water cycle, 18 to 21 gallons total overall average based on testing with 8 pound AHAM load. 6. Load balancing. Automatic load balancing system with spin speeds up to 200 G's 7. Controls: Solid-state, electronic-touch-pad, press-to-start-type controls for water-fill levels, wash/rinse water temperatures, and variable-speed cycle/fabric selectors. a Wash Cycles: Eleven wash cycles min. including regular, delicate, and permanent press. b. Wash Temperatures: Four settings min. C. Speed Combinations: Six min. 8. Motor. Permanently lubricated, two-speed, 1/4-hp min. reversible motor with built-in thermal- overload protector. A. 9. Finish: Porcelain enamel on top and lid. Baked enamel on front and sides. 10. Standard features include the following: a. Self-cleaning lint filter. no b. Anti-vibration mechanism. C. Minimum 48-inch-inlet hoses. d. Minimum 48-inch-drain hose. ,,w APPLIANCES 11451 -6 am W Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dieu&Company Architects,Inc. ON 4. Control Panel: Porcelain-enamel oven control panel located above oven door, containing automatic oven controls, oven timer,and clock. a. Controls: Solid-state,electronic,touch type. b. Clock Type: Digital. Standard features include the following a. Interior oven light. b. Four embossed oven-rack positions. C. Three removable,tilt-proof,chrome-plated, self-locking oven racks. d. Two-piece,porcelain-enamel broiler pan. D. Range Hood: Where indicated,provide venting range hoods complying with the following: I. Type: 30-inch undercabinet,ventilating range hood. 2. Manufacturer. Broan,#89000. 3. Exhaust Fan: Variable-speed exhausts vertically, rated 460 cfm speed. 4. Sones rating: 6 maximum at 460 cfm 5. Fan Control: Variable-speed. 6. Duct Type: 3 %. by 10 inch. 7. Finish: Baked enamel. 8. Standard features include the following. a. Permanent washable filter. b. Built-in lighting. C. Night light setting. d. Damper. E. Side-by-Side Refrigerator. Where indicated, provide side by side refrigerator/freezer complying with the following: I. Type: Freestanding, frost-free two-door, side-by-side, cabinet depth refrigerator/freezer with baked-enamel-on-steel interior cabinet liners. 2. Manufacturer. General Electric, GE Profile,#TPX24BIDBB. 3. Refrigerator Storage Capacity: 23.7 cubic feet minimum total interior refrigerator volume measured according to ANSUAHAM HRF-I and certified by AHAM. 4. Energy Consumption: Measured and certified at not more than 2.5 kWh per day under average conditions. 5. Temperature Controls: Separate temperature controls for each compartment and a switch for condensation-control heating element at freezer opening. 6. Standard storage features include the following. a. Fresh Food Compartment 1) Gallon container size door storage shelves. 2) Vegetable crisper. 3) Meat compartment. 4) Utility bin. 5) Dairy compartment. b. Freezer Compartment I) Door shelves. Ow 2) Ice storage bin. APPLIANCES 11451 - 5 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Remove packing material from appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. D. Collect instructional literature and submit as part of record documents. 3.4 APPLIANCE SCHEDULE A. Electric Range: Where indicated, provide electric ranges complying with the following: I. Type: 30-inch-wide,freestanding electric range. 2. Manufacturer. Frigidaire Series,#FEF322. 3. Cooktop: Recessed, hinged, tilt-up with dual support rods, porcelain-enamel cooktop with four surface burners and porcelain-enamel backsplash. a. Burner Types: Two 8-inch (2600-W maximum) and two 6-inch (1500-W maximum), multi-wrap coil elements. 4. Oven: Self-cleaning oven with porcelain-enamel interior with five rack levels; one tilt-proof, chrome-plated, self-locking oven racks. a. Oven Door. Counterbalanced, removable, porcelain-enamel oven door. Provide towel- bar-type handle. 5. Control Panel: Porcelain-enamel combination surface-burner/oven control panel mounted at •� back of range on backsplash panel. Include burner "ON" indicator light, hot-surface indicators, automatic oven timer, rotary temperature setting knob, and digital clock and digital temperature display. 6. Storage Drawer. Removable, full-width storage drawer below oven with porcelain-enamel front w■ panel. 7. Finish: Porcelain enamel on steel. 8. Standard features include the following: am a Rimmed cooktop deck. b. Interior oven light C. Two-piece, porcelain-enamel broiler pan. d. Four adjustable legs with anti-tip device. B. Electric Cooktop: Where indicated, provide electric cooktops complying with the following. I. Type: 32-inch, hinged, tilt-up with support rod, built-in, porcelain-enamel, countertop-mounted, electric cooking surface with four surface-burner elements, infinitely adjustable controls, hot- surface indicators and one burner"ON" indicator light 2. Manufacturer. Frigidaire Series,#FEC32C4H. a Burner Types: Two 8-inch and two 6-inch multi-wrap coil elements. b. Burner Controls: Rotary-dial type with removable knobs. C. Electric Wall Oven: Where indicated, provide electric wall ovens complying with the following. 1. Type: 26- inch wide, built-in, single, self-cleaning, electric, wall oven/broiler unit with porcelain- enamel interior. 2. Manufacturer. Frigidaire, Gallery Series,#FEB786CE 3. Oven Door. Counterbalanced, removable, side-opening, porcelain enamel or frameless glass oven door with window. Provide towel-bar-type handle. APPLIANCES 11451 -4 • go Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. ON E. Side-by-Side Refrigerator/Freezer. Freestanding, two-door refrigerator with side-by-side freezer, listed by UL,and complying with requirements specified in the Appliance Schedule. F. Dishwasher. Built-in, undercounter, automatic dishwasher, sized to replace 30-inch-base cabinet, listed by UL,and complying with requirements specified in the Appliance Schedule. to G. Microwave: Countertop microwave, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Appliance Schedule. r H. Clothes Washer. Freestanding, front-loading, automatic clothes washer, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Appliance Schedule. I. Gas Clothes Dryer. Freestanding, front-loading,gas clothes dryer, listed by UL and AGA certified, and complying with requirements specified in the Appliance Schedule. 2.3 FINISHES A. Porcelain-Enamel Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied porcelain-enamel finish over an cleaned and pretreated steel sheet B. All appliances: black on black color. so PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing, mechanical, and electrical services, with Installer present, to verify actual locations of services before appliance installation. I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. we 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed !!" fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test each item of appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. APPLIANCES 11451 - 3 Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Refrigerators and Freezers: Total volume and shelf area ratings certified according to ANSI/ARAM HRF-I. G. Energy Ratings: Provide appliances that carry Energy Star labels indicating energy-cost analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the Federal Trade Commission. 1.5 DELIVERY A. Deliver appliances only after utility rough-in is complete and construction in the spaces to receive appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation. .e� 1.6 WARRANTIES A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights a Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. war B. Special Warranties: Written warranties, executed by manufacturer of each appliance specified agreeing to repair or replace appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. I. Electric Range, cooktops: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on surface-burner elements. 2. Refrigerator/Freezer. Five-year limited warranty on the sealed refrigeration system. 3. Dishwasher. 10-year warranty against deterioration of tub and door liner. 4. Clothes Washer. 5-year limited warranty on cabinet rusting, and two-year limited warranty on all parts, including balance suspension system and drive transmission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS ..r A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, appliances that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Appliance Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 APPLIANCES A. Electric Range: Freestanding electric range with four-burner cooktop and oven with broiler, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Appliance Schedule. B. Electric Cooktop: Built-in, countertop-mounted, electric cooktop with four burner elements, listed by UL and complying with requirements specified in the Appliance Schedule. C. Electric Wall Oven: Built-in, single electric wall oven with broiler unit, listed by UL, and complying with w„ requirements specified in the Appliance Schedule. D. Range Hood: Wall-mounted, undercabinet exhaust hood, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Appliance Schedule. APPLIANCES 11451 -2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. +w SECTION 11451 -APPLIANCES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Cooking equipment, including ranges, cooktops,and wall ovens. 2. Range hoods. .. 3. Refrigerators and freezers. 4. Dishwashers. 5. Microwave oven. 6. Clothes washers and dryers. k" B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 15 Section"Plumbing"for plumbing and gas connections to appliances. 2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing"for garbage disposals. 3. Division 15 Section "HVAC"for clothes dryer and range hood venting. 4. Division 16 Section "Electrical"for services and connections to appliances. qW 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval product data, fixture cuts, operating and maintenance data and record documents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the greatest extent possible, obtain appliances through one source that can arrange factory authorized maintenance service. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of appliances and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' appliances with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division I Section "Substitutions." C. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency to acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of appliances that are listed �. and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. E. AGA Certification: Provide gas appliances that bear AGA label. F. AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that comply with the following AHAM standards: APPLIANCES 11451 - I s Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. w 2. At Accessible Bath Room and Staff Bath Room provide: a. (1) Soap dish b. (1) Toothbrush holder C. (1)Toilet tissue dispenser d. (1) Robe hook e. (1) 24"towel bar f. (1) Shower curtain rod g. (1) Medicine cabinet h. (2) 24"grab bar at roll-in shower i. (1) 24"grab bar at staff shower j. (1) 48"grab bar at roll-in shower k. (1) Folding shower seat I. (1) 36"grab bar at w/c M. (1) 42"grab bar at w/c END OF SECTION e� ew ;w ee Wo so TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 5 OF Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Configuration: L-shaped seat,designed for wheelchair access 2. Seat Material: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION w. 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. Provide fasteners, that with accessory, are capable of holding 250 lbs. for five minutes. B. Provide solid blocking at all accessories for secure fastening. Blocking shall be 2x8 minimum, securely fastened to studs. Blocking shall be capable of holding 250 lbs.for five minutes. we C. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. so 3.3 TOILET ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. Model Numbers: Following model numbers are based on Bradley, unless otherwise noted: no 1. Toilet tissue dispenser-#5084 2. Shower curtain rod -#953 x length 3. Towel bar-#908 x length an 4. Robe hook -#9118 5. Toothbrush holder-#SA 26 6. Soap dish -#SA 22 B. LOCATION OF TOILET ACCESSORIES I. At Bath Room s provide: a. (I) Soap dish b. (1) Toothbrush holder C. (1) Toilet tissue dispenser d. (1) Robe hook e. (1) 24" towel bar f. (1) Shower curtain rod g. (I) Medicine cabinet(2 at Bath 206) h. (1) 24"grab bar at tub TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -4 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish; spindle is chrome plated brass (note: no plastic spindles shall be allowed);mounting bracket fabricated of type 304(18-8), 18 gauge stainless steel. B. Capacity: One standard core toilet tissue roll. C. Operation: Concealed spring permits spindle to telescope for servicing. Spindle turns freely for non- controlled delivery. D. Mounting: Surface mounted,into blocking. 2.4 SHOWER AND BATH ACCESSORIES on A. Shower Curtain Rod, Heavy Duty: I inch O.D., 18-gage (.040-inch) stainless steel, satin finish tubing, furnish with 3 inch O.D., minimum 20-gage stainless steel flanges with satin finish, designed for exposed fasteners (#I Ox2-1/2" Phillips oval head stainless steel sheet metal screw). B. Towel Bar. Satin-finished Type 304 stainless steel, I" diameter, 18 gauge tube and end brackets for exposed mounting. Stainless steel set screw to keep bar from turning. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Robe Hook: Heavy-duty forged brass with bright chrome finish; wall bracket with 3 mounting holes for exposed mounting. air B. Toothbrush Holder. Type 304 (18-8), 7 gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish. Formed from single piece of stainless steel. Holds 4 toothbrushes. Installed with 1/4"-20 x I- 1/2" L torx head stainless steel screws. C. Soap Dish: Type 304 (18-8), 7 gauge, satin finish stainless steel with three holes for drainage. Installed with 1/4"-20 x 1-1/2" L torx head stainless steel screws. 2.6 MEDICINE CABINET A. Medicine Cabinet with Mirror. 16" x 36" recessed enameled steel cabinet, with two adjustable shelves, stainless steel trimmed mirrored door. 1. Mirror. Stainless steel framed non-fading mirrors, with glass edge protection and two coats back silvering and electrolytically copper coated. 1.7 GRAB BARS A. Type 304 (18-8), 18-gage satin finish stainless steel tubing with peened finish. Bars shall be heliarc welded to stainless steel flanges. Bars shall be capable of supporting 900 lbs for 5 minutes. Provide in I !" 1/2" diameter with 1 1/2" wall clearance. Provide concealed mounting; with set screws for coverplates. Provide in sizes and configurations as indicated on the Drawings. 2.8 FOLDING SHOWER SEAT A Heavy-duty hinged seat designed to fold up against wall when not in use with stainless-steel support braces, hinges,frame,and fasteners; of all-welded construction: TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 3 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. am PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering toilet accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. A&J Washroom Accessories. .� 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 22-gage (.034-inch) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, ASTM B 19; rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges, ASTM B 16, Castings,ASTM B-30. C. Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM A 366, 20-gage (.040-inch) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet ASTM A 527, G60. E. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B 456, Type SC 2. F. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. G. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating,and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-41 I. H. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of stainless steel where exposed or of galvanized steel where concealed. 2.3 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS A. Construction: Posts fabricated of type 304 (18-8), 22 gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish; escutcheons fabricated on type 304 (18-8), 18 gauge stainless steel with TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 2 """ Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 10801 —TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART I -GENERAL I.I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A This Section includes the following toilet accessory items: I. Toilet paper holder. 2. Shower curtain rod. 3. Towel bars. 4. Robe hook. 5. Toothbrush/cup holder. 6. Soap dish,surface mounted. 7. Medicine cabinet 8. Grab bars. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 16 Section"Electrical"for separate light fixture above medicine cabinet 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I Specifications Sections. B. Product Data for each toilet accessory item specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, method of mounting, type and size of screws and other fasteners, specified options, and finishes. ! " C. Samples: Full-size samples of each toilet accessory item for verification of design, operation, and finish requirements. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work. D. Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes,and installation locations (by room) for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project E. Setting Drawings: Where cutouts are required in other work, provide templates, substrate preparation on instructions,and directions for preparing cutouts and for installation of anchorage devices. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. wr TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - I PM Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. am C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: I. Low-Luster,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a Primer. Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive,alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. I) Devoe: 13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer. 2) Fuller. 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd &Structural Metal Primer. 3) Glidden: 5207 Glid-Guard Tank&Structural Primer,White. 4) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163. 5) PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. 6) P& L• S 4551 Tech-Gard High Performance Rust Inhibitor Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster(eggshell or satin),acrylic-Latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils. 1) Devoe: 34XX Wonder-Tones Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel. 2) Fuller. 212-XX AA Enamel Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel. 3) Glidden: 4100 Series Spred Ultra Eggshell Latex Wall&Trim Paint 4) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaVelvet#319. 5) PPG: 89 Line Manor Hall Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim Paint 6) P& L• Z/F 4000 Series Accolade Interior Velvet PN E. Interior Stain Finish Woodwork Provide the following stained finishes over existing wood panelled walls. I. Waterborne-Stain Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear satin varnish over a sealer coat and waterbomed interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler. b. Stain Coat: Interior, whitewash semi-transparent stain. C. Sealer Coat Clear sanding sealer. d. Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear satin varnish. END OF SECTION we 09900-9 PAINTING Pearl Realty Trust December.14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. b. First and Second Coats: Low-luster(eggshell or satin),acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils(0.071 mm). 1) Devoe: 34XX Wonder-Tones Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel. 2) Fuller. 212-XX AA Enamel Acrylic Latex Eggshell Enamel. 3) Glidden: 4100 Series Spred Ultra Eggshell Latex Wall&Trim Paint 4) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaVelvet#319. 5) PPG: 89 Line Manor Hall Eggshell Latex Wall and Trim Enamel. 6) P& L• Z/F 4000 Series Accolade Interior Velvet 2. Semigloss,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer. Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. I) Devoe: 50801 Wonder-Tones Interior Vinyl Latex Primer-Sealer. 2) Fuller. 220-20 Pro-Tech Latex Wall Primer Sealer,White. 3) Glidden: 5111 Spred Ultra Latex Primer-Sealer. ' 4) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer&Underbody#216. 5) PPG: 17-10 Quick-Drying Interior Latex Primer-Sealer. 6) P& L• Z/F 1001 Suprime "I" 100 Percent Acrylic Multi-Purpose Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. I) Devoe: 39XX Wonder-Tones Semi-Gloss Interior Latex Enamel. 2) Fuller. 214-XX AA Enamel Interior Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 3) Glidden: 8200 Series Spred Ultra Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. .., 4) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Enamel#333. 5) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall &Trim Lo-Lustre Semi-Gloss Latex. 6) P& L• Z/F 4100 Series Accolade Interior Semi-Gloss. B. Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new, interior wood surfaces: I. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a wood undercoater. a. Undercoat Alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based, interior wood undercoater, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. �. I) Devoe: 51701 Wonder-Prime All-Purpose Latex Primer Sealer&Vapor Barrier. 2) Fuller. 220-07 Interior Alkyd Enamel Undercoat 3) Glidden: UH 400 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Interior Enamel Undercoater. 4) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody#217. 5) PPG: 6-755 Speedhide Interior Water-Based Undercoater. 6) P& L• Z/F 1001 Suprime "I" 100 Percent Acrylic Multi-Purpose Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 MOS. 1) Devoe: 39XX Wonder-Tones Semi-Gloss Interior Latex Enamel. 2) Fuller. 214-XX AA Enamel Interior Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 3) Glidden: 8200 Series Spred Ultra Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 4) Moore: Moore's Regal AquaGlo Vinyl-Acrylic Latex Enamel#333. 5) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall&Trim Lo-Lustre Semi-Gloss Latex. 6) P& L Z/F 4100 Series Accolade Interior Semi-Gloss. „ PAINTING 09900-8 .� Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. 2) Fuller. 220-08 Exterior Latex Wood Primer. 3) Glidden: UH 790 Ultra-Hide Exterior Latex Prime Coat 4) Moore: Moorwhite Primer#100. 5) PPG: 72-1 Sun-Proof Exterior House&Trim Wood Primer Flat--Latex. 6) P& L• S/D 1002 Suprime"2" Exterior Latex Wood Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, waterborne, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils. I) Devoe: 17XX Wonder-Shield Semi-Gloss Exterior Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint- 2) Fuller. 664-XX Weather King II Semi-Gloss House&Trim Paint 3) Glidden: 6600 Series Spred Ultra Exterior Gloss Latex House&Trim Paint 4) Moore: MoorGlo Latex House& Trim Paint#096. 5) PPG: 78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint 6) P& L• ZJF 3100 Series Aqua Royal Latex House&Trim Finish. B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. I. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer. Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. I) Devoe: 13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer. 2) Fuller. 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer. 3) Glidden: 5205 Glid-Guard Tank&Structural Primer, Red. 4) Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163. 5) PPG: 7-852 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. 6) P& L• SID 1009 Suprime"9" Interior/Exterior Alkyd Metal Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. I) Devoe: 17XX Wonder-Shield Semi-Gloss Exterior Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint 2) Fuller. 664-XX Weather King II Semi-Gloss House&Trim Paint 3) Glidden: 6600 Series Spred Ultra Exterior Gloss Latex House&Trim Paint OR 4) Moore: MoorGlo Latex House& Trim Paint#096. 5) PPG: 78 Line Sun-Proof Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex House and Trim Paint 6) P& L• ZJF 3100 Series Aqua Royal Latex House&Trim Finish. go 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board and Repaired Plaster. Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board and we repaired plaster surfaces: I. Low-Luster,Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. ON a. Primer. Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 1) Devoe: 50801 Wonder-Tones Interior Vinyl Latex Primer-Sealer. ON 2) Fuller. 220-20 Pro-Tech Interior Latex Wall Primer and Sealer. 3) Glidden: 51 1 1 Spred Ultra Latex Primer-Sealer. 4) Moore: Regal First Coat Interior Latex Primer&Underibody#216. 5) PPG: 17-10 Quick-Drying Interior Latex Primer-Sealer. 6) P& L• Z/F 1004 Suprime"4" Interior Latex Wall Primer. PAINTING 09900- 7 Pearl Realty Trust December-14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. the surface or item being painted. .A 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears,to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. wu F. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. G. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to procue a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin finish for final coats. .w H. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture,skid marks,or other surface imperfections. w. I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. I. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. w� 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting,as approved by Architect. B. Provide 'Wet Paint' signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings .� provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA Pl. .., 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Wood : Provide the following finish systems over exposed exterior wood, including, but not limited to wood trim, molded decorative items, pressure treated exterior railings, post, stairs,and decking. I. Medium-Shade,Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer. Exterior, acrylic-latex primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. I) Devoe: 1 102 All-Weather Exterior Alkyd House Paint Primer. PAINTING 09900-6 ■* Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to m E. Manufacturer's written instructions. I. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. F. Tinting. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturers written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. I. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfacers, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas,as required,to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. S. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms,and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface P" deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions,sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. ee. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for PAINTING 09900- 5 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. particular area. B. Coordination of Work Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. I. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. so 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and we painting. I. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. I. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written .R instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. I. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper,as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. ++ a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides,and backsides of wood, including cabinets,counters,cases,and paneling. C. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 3. Previously painted surfaces: a. Gypsum Wallboard: Remove all peeling or scaling paint by scraping. Sand areas thoroughly to feather edges smooth with adjacent surface. b. Cracks, holes and blemished areas shall be filled and sanded flush with adjacent surfaces, then spot primed with finish coating. C. Surfaces that have been defaced with marking pens, crayons, or lipsticks, are to be solvent washed, then spot primed with white shellac. d. Glossy surfaces are to be dulled by sanding lightly with#00 sandpaper. e. Celings or walls that exhibit water stains shall be sealed with shite shellac. f. Where painting over existing dark paint, apply heavy hiding primer to conceal color. Ensure that existing color does not bleed through. g. Remove all stickers and adhesive from ceilings with solvent wash, then spot prime with white shellac. * PAINTING 09900-4 '"" Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F(7.2 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg Q above the dew point;or to damp or-wet surfaces. I. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and !* heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules. B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names,which are shown in parentheses: I. Devoe& Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. Fuller-O'Brien Paints (Fuller). 3. Glidden Co. (The) (Glidden). 4. Benjamin Moore& Co. (Moore). 5. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG). 6. Pratt& Lambert, Inc. (P& L). 7. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W). *! 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fliers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. I. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of me equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect No PART 3 - EXECUTION an 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be 40 performed for compliance with paint application requirements. I. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a 40 PAINTING 09900- 3 am Pearl Realty Trust December-14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Ift I. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications"for shop priming ferrous metal. 2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames"for shop priming steel doors and frames. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies"for surface preparation for gypsum board. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. I. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing,and applying each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for „ each type of finish-coat material indicated. I. After color selection,the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. me 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system ■o applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from an the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING on A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label,and the following information: an I. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. an 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. S. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. no 8. VOC content B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F(7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign w materials and residue. I. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing,and application. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS w A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg C). PAINTING 09900- 2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dieu&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09900- PAINTING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. ,o 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. 4. Blending with existing exterior paint,to match. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces,finished metal surfaces, operating parts,and labels. I. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. b. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. C. Attic spaces d. Crawl spaces. go 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following. a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. d. Copper. sw e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code- required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating,or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following. PAINTING 09900- 1 Now Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Diet=&Company Architects, Inc. I. Profile and Dimensions: As required for installation of resilient flooring, file flooring, and carpeting. 2. Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors produced for vinyl accessories complying with requirements indicated. 3. Available Products: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.,Johnson Rubber Co., Inc,Mercer Plastics Co., Inc. END OF SECTION 40 an an +e 4" RESILIENT FLOORING 09650- 7 Pearl Realty Trust December-14. 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. b. Clean flooring not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean flooring using method recommended by manufacturer. C. Scrub flooring with a neutral-detergent solution, using a single disc floor machine. .. d. If flooring is badly soiled or scratched, strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation. Decision to strip flooring shall be made at Architect's and Owner's discretion. Do not use brown or black pads in stripping machine. e. Do not flood floor with rinse water or with scrubbing or stripping solutions. f. Apply a total of 5 coats of protective floor polish to resilient flooring surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes. If initial two coats of polish are not stripped, they shall be counted as the first two of the required five coats. I) Use commercially available, metal, cross-linked acrylic product acceptable to flooring manufacturer. 2) Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 3. Cover flooring with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 3.7 TYPE II SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING PRODUCT DATA SHEET A. Wearing Surface: Smooth. B. Wear Layer Thickness: Grade I (minimum thickness of 0.050 inch.) per ASTM F 1303. C. Backing Class: Class A (fibrous). D. Overall Thickness: 0.085 inch. E. Sheet Width: 6 feet minimum. F. Seaming Method: Heat-welded seams. G. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns produced for sheet vinyl flooring complying with requirements indicated. Welding rods to color blend into floor. H. Available Products: Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Classic Corlon; Mannington, Inc. Fields. 3.8 VINYL WALL BASE PRODUCT DATA SHEET A. Product Description: Vinyl base. B. Profile and Dimensions: Straight at carpet and coved at resilient flooring installations, 1/8"x 4"high. w I• Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors produced for vinyl accessories complying with requirements indicated. M" 2. Available Products: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.,Johnson Rubber Co., Inc. 3.9 VINYL ACCESSORY PRODUCT DATA SHEET go A. Product Description: Carpet bar for tacklers installations. Carpet edge for glue down applications. Carpet nosing. Nosing for resilient floor covering. Reducer strip for resilient flooring. ■" RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-6 0M Pearl Realty Trust December-14,2001 Dietz,&Company Architects, Inc. A. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable. Tightly adhere wall w base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. I. Install inside and exterior corners before installing straight pieces. 2. Form inside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce snug fit to substrate. 3. Form outside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by shaving back of base at point where bending will occur. Remove a strip perpendicular to length of base and only deep enough to produce a snug fit without bends whitening or removal of more than half the thickness of wall base. B. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials of type indicated and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring and carpeting that otherwise would on be exposed. go 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. General 1. Comply with all recommendations of flooring product manufacturer. 2. Review cleaning and protection procedures with Architect before proceeding with installation. 3. Do not wash or wax floor until after time period recommended by resilient flooring product manufacturer. 4. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during entire construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by flooring manufacturer. 5. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over flooring. Place: plywood or hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. B. New Resilient Flooring and Wall Base: I. Immediately after completing resilient flooring installation,perform the following operations: a. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by flooring manufacturer. cw b. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. C. Damp-mop flooring and wall base to remove black marks and soil may be done immediately after installation. Use a very dilute neutral-detergent solution. Do not flood floor or create excessive moisture that will interfere with adhesive bonding and/or seam treatments. d. Do not machine scrub floor for five days minimum after installation. e. After five days, provide two coats of high quality commercial floor polish for temporary protection. 2. End of Construction Period: a. Resilient wail base, unless badly marked or soiled, will not require additional cleaning or polishing beyond the requirements above. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650- 5 Pearl Realty Trust DecembeM4,2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient flooring products immediately before .� installation. Following cleaning,examine substrates for moisture,alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with resilient flooring product manufacturers installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of resilient flooring product installation included in Project. B. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring products to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings,thresholds,and nosings. C. Extend resilient flooring products into toe spaces, appliance spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. 3.4 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING INSTALLATION 011! A. Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Maintain uniformity of sheet vinyl floor covering direction. 2. Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low traffic areas, but in no case less than 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 3. Coordinate location of seams with the Architect in the field. 4. Match edges of resilient floor coverings for color shading and pattern at seams. 5. Avoid cross seams. B. Install sheet vinyl floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. C. Adhere sheet vinyl floor coverings to flooring substrates by method approved by floor covering manufacturer. Provide heat welded seams. I. Produce completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. 2. Comply with floor covering manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, w adhesive mixing,and adhesive open and working times. D. Heat welding of the seams is the required installation method. Heat weld seams at all sheet vinyl floor coverings. Prepare seams and apply seam sealers to produce tightly fitted seams without gaps or overlaps. Heat welding shall be done by installer certified in manufacturer's system. I- Hand roll sheet vinyl floor coverings in both directions from center out to embed floor coverings in � adhesive and eliminate trapped air. At walls, door casings, and other locations where access by roller is impractical, press floor coverings firmly in place with flat-bladed instrument SIX 3.5 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION am RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-4 an Pearl Realty Trust December,14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Type If Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing: Product complying with ASTM F 1303, Type 11, and with requirements specified in Type 11 Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering Product Data at the end of this Section. B. Vinyl Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-WA, Type II, and requirements specified in the Vinyl O• Wall Base Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section. C. Vinyl Accessories: Products complying with requirements specified in Vinyl Accessory Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives (Cements)for Resilient Flooring Products: Water-resistant, stabilized type recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer to suit resilient flooring products and substrate conditions indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant,nonstaining type,strippable„nonflammable, low-odor,low VOC to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed material and that is recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer to suit resilient flooring products and substrate conditions indicated C. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds for Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Latex- modified, portland cement based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. D. Heat Welding Rods for Sheet Vinyl Flooring. Solid color rods as provided by floor covering manufacturer. Color as selected by Architect PART 3 - EXECUTION Will 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas where installation of resilient flooring products will occur, with Installer present,to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient flooring product installation PW and comply with resilient flooring product manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. B. Wood Subfloors: Examine subfloor and underlayment for evenness, ridging,proper nailing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive resilient flooring products. Jim B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per manufacturer's directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax. oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. 4W RESILIENT FLOORING 09650- 3 go Pearl Realty Trust December44,2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Smoke Density. Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. C. Certified Installer. Flooring installer shall be certified by product manufacturer that they are trained and .� certified to install specific flooring products provided and in installation method specified. D. Products Emissions: Provide adhesive, polish and other flooring products which have low indoor air pollution emissions, low overall VOC emissions, and low concentrations of toxic and irritating *•! components. Provide certification of low emission levels of flooring products. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ,. A. Deliver resilient flooring products and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C)and 90 deg F (32 deg C). C. Move all resilient flooring products and accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient flooring products for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). ..w B. Do not install resilient flooring products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during resilient flooring products installation. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install resilient flooring products and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. B. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS .� A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, resilient flooring products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, those specified in each Product Data Sheet at end of this Section. *" 2.2 RESILIENT FLOORING PRODUCTS RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09650—RESILIENT FLOORING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract. including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: r 1. Sheet vinyl floor coverings with fibrous backing. 2. Resilient wall base. 3. Resilient flooring accessories. B. Related Sections: !! I. Division I Section"Selective Demolition"for removal of existing floor finishes. 2. Division 6 Section"Miscellaneous Carpentry"for wood underlayrnent. wr< 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following: B. Product data for each type of product specified, including floor cleaner, polish, and stripper. I. Certification by resilient floor products manufacturer that products supplied for installation have low levels of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of sheet vinyl floor coverings,and resilient base and accessories showing full range of colors and patterns available for each type of resilient floor product indicated. 40 D. Maintenance data for resilient flooring products, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual. Maintenance data shall be as recommended by product manufacturer and specific to product provided. asp 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Resilient Flooring Products: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of sheet vinyl, wall base and accessories from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient flooring with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 40 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650- 1 ow Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's written instructions, but not less than recommendations in NOFMA's "Installing Hardwood Flooring,"as applicable to flooring type. B. Pattern: Lay wood flooring in pattern to match and extend existing flooring. C. Patch floor as required at openings and damaged areas. Comply with flooring manufacturer's written instructions, but not less than recommendations in NOFMA's "Installing Hardwood Flooring," as applicable to flooring type. D. Solid-Wood Strip: Blind nail or staple flooring to substrate according to NOFMA's written recommendations. E. Expansion Space: Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring of not less than 3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. I. Unless fully concealed by trim, fill expansion space with flush cork expansion strip. F. Felt Underlayment: Where strip or plank flooring is nailed to solid-wood subfloor, install flooring over a layer of asphalt-saturated felt •o 3.3 SANDING AND FINISHING A. Vacuum clean existing flooring as needed. „A B. Machine-sand flooring to remove offsets, ridges, cups, and sanding-machine marks that would be noticeable after finishing. Vacuum and tack with a clean cloth immediately before applying finish. C. Apply stain to match approved Sample if required. D. Apply floor finish according to finish manufacturer's written instructions. Apply in number of coati recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated, but not less than three. E. For water-based finishes, use finishing methods recommended by finish manufacturer to minimize grain raise. 3.4 PROTECTION w A. Cover installed wood flooring to protect it from damage or deterioration, before and after finishing, during remainder of construction period. Use heavy kraft-paper or other suitable covering. Do not use w� plastic sheet or film that could cause condensation. I. Do not cover site-finished floors with kraft paper, or any other material, until finish reaches full cure, but not less than seven days after applying last coat END OF SECTION .w WOOD FLOORING 09640-4 ■r Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. w 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS .w A. Vapor Retarder. ASTM D 4397,polyethylene sheet not less than 6.0 mils thick. B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226,Type I,No. 15,asphalt-saturated felt C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in NOFMA's "Installing Hardwood Flooring" on D. Cork Expansion Strip: Composition cork strip complying with FS HH-C-576,Type I-B, Class 2. E. Wood Trim: In same species and grade as wood flooring, unless otherwise indicated. I. Threshold: Tapered on each side and routed at bottom of one side to accommodate wood flooring. 2. Reducer Strip: 2 inches (51 mm) wide,tapered on one side,and in thickness matching flooring. 2.4 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Urethane Finish System: Complete system of compatible components that is recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated. I. Type: Solvent based, oil modified. 2. Floor Sealer Pliable, penetrating type. r 3. Finish Coats: Formulated for multicoat application on wood flooring. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following- a. Basic Coatings. b. BonaKemi USA, Inc. C, Dura Seal Division; Minwax Co., Inc. B. Finish materials: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonflammable, low-odor, low VOC to suit products and floor conditions indicated, and that is recommended by the flooring manufacturer. C. Wood Filler. Formulated to fill and repair seams, defects, and open-gain hardwood floors; compatible with finish system components and recommended by filler and finish manufacturers for use indicated. If required to match approved samples, provide pigmented filler. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of wood flooring. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION No !! WOOD FLOORING 09640- 3 mww on Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. am A. Deliver wood flooring materials in unopened cartons or bundles. B. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood flooring until after concrete, No masonry, plaster, ceramic tile,and similar wet-work is complete and dry. C. Store wood flooring materials in a dry,warm,well-ventilated,weathertight location. wo D. Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed,at least seven days before installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning- Maintain relative humidity planned for building occupants and an ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F in spaces to receive wood flooring for at least seven days before installation, during installation, and for at least seven days after installation. After post-installation period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants. 1. For unfinished products, open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize. WX 2. Do not install flooring until it adjusts to the relative humidity of and is at the same temperature as the space where it is to be installed. 3. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time period after installation No recommended in writing by flooring and finish manufacturers. B. Install factory-finished wood flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been go completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS so 2.1 SOLID-WOOD STRIP FLOORING (ALTERNATE NO. 5) ow A. Strip Flooring- Provide kiln-dried wood flooring as follows: 1. Species: Red oak. go 2. Grade: Clear. 3. Cut: Plain sawn. 4. Thickness: 3/4 inch. an 5. Face Width: 2-1/4 inches. 6. Matching- Tongue and groove, and end matched. 7. Backs: Channeled (kerfed) for stress relief. ow 8. Random Lengths: Provide standard random-length strips complying with applicable grading rules. 2.2 SOLID-WOOD STRIP AND PLANK FLOORING A. Strip and Plank Flooring: Provide kiln-dried wood flooring as follows: I. Species: Match Existing. 2. Thickness: Match Existing. 3. Face Width: Match Existing. 4. Matching- Tongue and groove, and end matched. 5. Backs: Channeled (kerfed) for stress relief. 6. Random Lengths: Provide standard random-length strips complying with applicable grading rules. WOOD FLOORING 09640- 2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09640-WOOD FLOORING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes protection and restoration of existing wood floors including the following. I. Provide wood flooring to match existing adjacent wood strip flooring. 2. Patching existing solid wood strip flooring. 40 3. Refinishing wood flooring. 4. Solid-wood strip flooring B. Related Sections include the following. �rw 1. Division I Section "Alternates"for information relative to alternates. 2. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood substrates, including sleepers and subflooring. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for approval for each type of product indicated. NOW 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed wood flooring similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in wood flooring installations with a record of successful in-service performance. 00 B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material and product from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. C. Hardwood Flooring Comply with NOFMA grading rules for species,grade,and cut. 1. Certification: Provide flooring that carries NOFMA grade stamp on each bundle or piece. r D. Floor Finish Emissions: Provide floor finishes which have low indoor air pollution emissions, low overall VOC emissions, and low concentrations of toxic and irritating components. Provide certification of low 40 emission levels of finishes. 40 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING WOOD FLOORING 09640- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. w I. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise,attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. ± ! B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges,and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: "► I. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. No 3.6 PROTECTION: A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, which ensures gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 40 pe an ON an r�ur GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260- 5 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc 3.1 EXAMINATION no A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollow metal frames, no cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. we 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. �w B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. .. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut *�* edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. G. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. H. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. I. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. .� 3.3 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: . On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent s. possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly,and minimize end joints. .e a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. B. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face- layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. aw GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260- 4 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Location: Ceiling surfaces. 2.3 VENEER PLASTER A. Plaster. ASTM C 587,two-coat veneer plaster. I. Type: Regular. on 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. I. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheer ± � 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. b. Exposed metal J bead or other exposed metal or plastic trine: not permitted. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: I. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. D. Joint Reinforcing Materials for Veneer Plaster. ASTM C 587 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. eo B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. C. Concealed acoustical sealant 2.7 TEXTURE FINISHES A. None. PART 3 - EXECUTION ox w GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260- 3 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. we 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS no A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. so PART 2 - PRODUCTS .o 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products „m that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: I. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum Corp. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and w correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: I. Regular Type,ASTM C 36: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. «. b. Long Edges: Tapered. 2. Type X: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch. b. Long Edges: Tapered. .. C. Location: for shaft enclosure. 3. For Plaster Veneer Finish, ASTM C 588, regular, moisture-resistant, foil-backed, and fire-rated .. types as required: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. b. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Sag-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular- type gypsum board. �+. I. Thickness: I12 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260- 2 .,� Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 09260-GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES of PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS !�* A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following. I. Interior gypsum wallboard attached to wood framing and furring members. 2. Interior gypsum wallboard with veneer plaster finish attached to wood framing and furring members. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry"for wood stud framing and furring. 2. Division 7 Section "Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarder.; installed in gypsum board as- semblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C I I for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval product data and fire test assembly ratings for each product indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE so A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by to an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory.", ITS's "Directory of Listed Products." ter 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. on Heading#6 Pocket Doors—Numbers 102, 103, 105, 114A,2068 Locking mechanisim,ADA-compliant 2 Pull handles, each side of door w� Heading#7 Bedroom Door—Number 209C I Lever handle Communicating Set, F80 I Door Stop, Ives#438 or 436 Heading#2 Program Rm Door—Number 115 I Lever handle Classroom Set,S70PD I Door Stop, Ives#438 or 436 END OF SECTION DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -6 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING,AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF HARDWARE A. Finishes: Provide new hardware in US4, Satin Brass and lever styles described. Provide split finish,dull chrome on inside,at bathrooms. B. Locksets: Provide interchangeable cores at all new locks. Lever handle lock and passage sets Schlage S series Neptune 2. Interconnected entry set Schlage S-200 series Neptune C. Hinges: Provide I A pair butts per door leaf: Stanley CB 1960,full mortise,standard weight HARDWARE SCHEDULE Heading#I Entry Doors—Numbers 1 0 1, 104, 106, 1 1 1 I Interconnected entry set, single locking, S2 OPD Deadbolt operated by key from outside or lever turn from inside. Turning inside lever always opens door. I Door Stop, Ives#438 or 436 1 Set head and jamb weatherstripping, Pemko S88 SilconSeal I Door bottom sweep, Pemko 18062WP Heading#2 Bedroom and Bathroom Doors— Numbers 202A,203A,205,206A, 207A, 209A, 2108 I Lever handle Privacy Set, S40D s Push button locking from inside; outside can be opened with screwdriver. I Door Stop, Ives#438 or 436 Heading#3 Closet Doors—Numbers 110, 1 14B, 2028, 2038, 207B, 209B,210A I Lever handle Passage Set, S I OD Both levers always unlocked. p. I Door Stop, Ives#438 or 436 Heading#4 Pair Laundry and Closet Doors—Numbers 114C, 116,208 on 2 Pull handles Heading#5 Basement Attic and Storage Doors—Numbers 108, 112,211 I Lever handle Storeroom Set, S80PD I Door Stop, Ives#438 or 436 eA 08711 - 5 DOOR HARDWARE Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Lock Throw: Provide 314-inch minimum throw for latch,and 1-inch minimum throw for all dead bolts. C. Interchangeable Core: Provide at all new locks. .. 2.6 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets). B. Provide non-ferrous hinges at all outswinging door units. C. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's sample. D. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturers standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. E. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer." F. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in w ANSI/BHMA A 156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. G. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry-recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect I. Hardware mounting heights shall conform with ADA and UFAS requirements. ww 2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. .w Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. +*� C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. r. D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -4 *® s Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. W 2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturers standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A 156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A 156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. i� C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. to D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, on if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint"surfaces to receive painted finish. E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work,provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. 1. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. 2. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system, and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system. 3. Furnish one extra blank for each lock. 4. Deliver keys to Owner. B. Review the function type and trim type with the Owner before ordering and provide the type required. Verify that trim required will not interfere with the proper functioning of the existing screen doors. C. Equip locks with manufacturer's standard 6-pin tumbler cylinders. D. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze,stainless steel,or nickel silver. 2.5 LOCKS A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame,finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated. " DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 3 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. B. Contractor and hardware supplier shall meet with the Owner to finalize function type, trim type, and keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. OR 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Locksets, Passage and Privacy Sets: a. Schlage b. Corbin-Russwin C. Sargent 2. Door Stops: ** a. Baldwin Hardware Corp. b. Builders Brass Works Corp. C. H.B. Ives 3. Butts and Hinges: a. Bommer Industries, Inc. b. Hager Hinge Co. C. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works eau 4. Weatherstripping: a. Hager Hinge Co. b. Pemko Manufacturing Inc. C. Zero International, Inc. 2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware e, the comparable type, p product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - 2 •w� Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08711 —DOOR HARDWARE PART I - GENERAL 1,1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swinging doors. B. This Section includes the following. I. Passage and privacy sets. 2. Lock sets. 3. Door stops. C. Related Sections include the following. go I. Division 6 Section "Micellaneous Carpentry"for hardware prepanxion for door frames. 2. Division 8 Section "Stile and Rail Doors"for hardware preparation for doors. 3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for hardware preparation for doors and frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification sections. The Owner has a locksmith on staff. Coordinate with the Owner's employee before ordering hardware. B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function,and finish of door hardware. D. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. E Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 DOOR HARDWARE 08711 - I Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.7 FINISHES e* A Color. white. I. Factory finish metal window components with baked enamel finish to match. to PART 3 - EXECUTION i 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing window openings before installation. Provide for additional wood trim, receptor trim, vinyl moulding or interior snap trim as required to finish window opening.. B. Provide repair or replacement of damaged wood sills as needed. Fill holes and dents in exposed wood. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set window units plumb,level,and true to line,without warp or rack of frames or sash. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. B. Provide panning and receptor system to insure watertight seal at exterior perimeter joints of windows. C. Provide fiberglass insulation stuffed in accessible voids surrounding window unit. war D. Isolate dissimilar materials as necessary to prevent galvanic or corrosive deterioration. PX E. Set sill members and other members in a bed of sealant or with joint fillers or gaskets to provide weathertight construction. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for compounds, fillers, and gaskets to be installed concurrently with window units. +* F. Provide snap on trim or other moulding to cover exposed gaps surrounding window. Install screens. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and at weatherstripping for smooth operation and a weathertight closure. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean PVC and preglazed glass surfaces promptly after installing windows. Exercise care to avoid scratches or other damage to protective coatings and finishes. B. Remove temporary manufacturer's labels. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts as needed. END OF SECTION am VINYL WINDOWS 08520- 5 mow Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Double hung window operation: Provide tilt in operation of both upper and lower sash for cleaning, with field adjustable spiral sash balances to hold sash open in any position,complying with AAMA 902.2. C. Provide double lift rail on bottom sash, interlocking meeting rails with cam type sweep locks. D. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Comply with AAMA 901 when tested according to ASTM E 405, Method A. .. E. Four-or Six-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904. 1. Locking mechanism and handles for manual operation. Im F. Friction Shoes: Provide friction shoes of nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining, noncorrosive, durable material. we 2.5 ACCESSORIES up A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories that comply with indicated standards. B. Insect Screens: Provide insect screens for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. Locate screens on '" inside or outside of window sash or ventilator, depending on window type. Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. At double hung windows, provide full height exterior screens to allow no screened opening at top or bottom window sash. . I. Screen Frames: Fabricate frames of tubular-shaped, extruded- or formed-aluminum members of 0.040-inch- minimum wall thickness, with mitered or coped joints and concealed mechanical fasteners. Finish frames to match window units. Screen fabric secured to the aluminum frame with a removable spline anchor concealing edge of screen frame requiring at least 40 Ibf-inches (4.52 Nm) of force to unseat screening when tested according to SMA/SMT 31. Comply with *� requirements of ANSI/SMA 1004. Finish: Baked-on organic coating as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Aluminum Screening: Aluminum wire fabric, 18-by-16 or 18-by-18 mesh, with a 0.011-inch- diameter wire that complies with FS RR-W-365, Type VII. C. Weatherstripping: Provide compression-type weatherstripping at perimeter of each operating sash. 1. Provide weatherstripping locked into extruded grooves in sash. ' 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate window units to comply with indicated standards. Include a complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units. I. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. 2. Glazing Stops: Provide screw-applied or snap-on glazing stops, coordinated with glass selection and glazing system indicated. Finish to match window units. Im B. Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at the factory. no VINYL WINDOWS 08520-4 Am Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following 1. National Vinyl 2. Harvey Industries 3. Alside Window Systems 4. Certainteed Vinyl Windows 2.2 MATERIALS ar A. PVC Materials: conforming to AAMA 101 or ASTM D 4099 requirements.. B. Fasteners: Provide materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with window members,trim,hardware,anchors,and other components of window units. I. Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware ,'m being fastened,as appropriate. C. Compression-Type Glazing Strips and Weatherstripping: provide compressible stripping for glazing and weatherstripping such as molded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000 Designation 2BC415 to 3BC620, or molded PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287,or molded expanded EPDM or neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Grade 4. D. Sliding-Type Weatherstripping: Provide woven-pile weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701.2. E. Sealant For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide type recommended by manufacturer for joint size and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating. F. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" of these Specifications for selection and installation of field sealants. G. Wire-Fabric Insect Screen: 18-by-18, 18-by-16, or 18-by-14 mesh of 0.013-inch- diameter, coated wire, complying with FS RR-W-365, Type VII. 2.3 GLAZING A. Low-E with Argon Gas Fill: Provide double paned minimum 1/8 inch thick DS clear glazing, factory fabricated in sealed insulating glass units, 13/16 inch minimum overall thickness, with low-E coating on one interior surface and argon gas fill. 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock windows and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Cadmium-plated hardware is not permitted. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide solid bronze, extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum, die-cast zinc ON with special coating finish, or nonmagnetic stainless steel. VINYL WINDOWS 08520- 3 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Structural Performance: No failure or permanent deflection in excess of 0.4 percent of any members span after removing the imposed load, for a positive (inward) and negative (outward) test pressure of 53 Ibf/sq.ft.. 4. Thermal Transmittance: Provide window units with a U-value maximum of 0.44 Btu/sq. ft x h x deg F at I S-mi./h exterior wind velocity,as certified by NFRC. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I ..s Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of window required, including product data and test data on window and glazing, construction details and fabrication methods, data on hardware, accessories, and finishes, and recommendations for maintaining and cleaning exterior surfaces. C. Samples for Verification: Provide minimum IS inch by 30 inch double hung window unit for approval, * showing fabrication techniques,workmanship,and design of hardware and accessories. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A- Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards: I. NFRC PCP Certification: Maximum U value of window unit as certified under the National Fen- estration Rating Council's Product Certification Program. 2. AAMA 101 Rating. Air infiltration, water penetration and structural performance, as certified by accredited independent testing laboratory. a. Minimum rating. AAMA 101 LC-35. 3. ASTM D 4099: Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Prime windows 4. ASTM E 774: Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass. 5. IGCC: Classification of Insulating Glass Units: Insulated Glass Certification Council.. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Field Measurements: Check window openings by field measurement before fabrication. Provide replacement windows to fill existing window openings within maximum variance of one inch tolerance, to be filled with metal panning, coil stock on wood framing or snap in trim. w,® B. Egress Windows: Verify that at least one window in each bedroom will have sufficient operable area to qualify as an emergency escape window under Massachusetts State Building Code requirements. C. Provide elevations as indicated on the drawings. 2 over 2 double hungs to conform in style with original wood sashes. Awing and casement types to match existing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS VINYL WINDOWS 08520- 2 "' Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08520—VINYL WINDOWS PART I - GENERAL I.I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Commercial Grade factory fabricated vinyl (PVC) windows of the performance class indicated. Window types required include the following: 1. Double-hung windows. so 2. Awnings. 3. Casements with fixed panel. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Performance class number, included as part of the window designation system, is the actual design pressure in pounds force per square foot used to determine structural test pressure and water test pressure. I. Structural test pressure, wind load test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. 2. Water-leakage-resistance test pressure is equivalent to 15 percent of the design pressure with 2.86 Ibf/sq.ft.as a minimum. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Fill A. General: Provide windows engineered,fabricated,and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading without failure, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's standard window assemblies representing types, grades, classes, and sizes required for Project according to test methods indicated. B. Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Pill C. AAMA Requirements: Testing shall demonstrate compliance with requirements indicated in AAMA 101 for air infiltration,water penetration, and structural performance for type,grade:, and performance class of window units required. Where required design pressure exceeds the minimum for the specified window grade, comply with requirements of AAMA 101,Section 3, "Optional Performance Classes," for higher than minimum performance class. 1. Air-infiltration Rate for Operating Units: Not more than 0.37 cfm/ft. of operable sash joint for an inward test pressure of 1.57 Ibf/sq.ft.. 2. Water Penetration: No water penetration as defined in the test method at an inward test pressure of 15 percent of the design pressure. VINYL WINDOWS 08520- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. A. Clean metal and glass surfaces of storm doors promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to finishes of new and existing surfaces. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, or other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. 3.5 PROTECTION " A. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required through the remainder of the construction period to ensure that, except for normal weathering, the storm door will be free of damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION to an ON ALUMINUM STORM AND SCREEN DOORS 08396 - 5 sm Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Provide doors with interchangeable inserts for glazed sash and screens: a. Self-storing interchangeable screen and glazed sash,with low kick plate: .w b. Base on Gerkin model 902 2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association "Designation System for Aluminum Finishes" for finish designations and application recommendations. For components assembled or welded in the factory, apply the finish after fabrication is complete. B. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42RIx (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. 1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 603.8, except with minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils(0.0381 mm), medium gloss. 2. Color. Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION .. 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that the opening sizes for storm doors are correct and conform to the following. I. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well-nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with all surfaces in the opening and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the opening. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations, and ASTM E 737 for installation of storm doors. B. Hang storm doors, including jamb and head frames, plumb, level, and without distortion, securely fastened to and aligned with main doors. Fasten storm doors in a manner that allows for expansion and contraction without damage to the door frame, pullout of fasteners, or effect on storm door operation. C. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified under paragraph "Dissimilar Materials" in the Appendix to ANSI/AAMA 101. D. Provide watertight and air-tight joints between existing construction and the jamb and head frames of .. storm doors with sealants or gaskets as standard with the manufacturer. Apply sealant to comply with the sealant manufacturer's recommendations, including preparation of joint faces and priming, where required. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust inserts, screen, and hardware to provide smooth operation, positive latching, and continuous w� contact of perimeter weather stripping with frames. 3.4 CLEANING .e ALUMINUM STORM AND SCREEN DOORS 08396 -4 op Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. E. Insect Screen: Screen inserts with screen fabric secured to the aluminum frame with a removable spline requiring at least 40 lbf-inches (4.52 Nm) of force to unseat screening when tested according to SMA/SMT 31. I. Aluminum Screening: Aluminum wire fabric, 18-by-16 or IB-by-18 mesh, with a 0.011-inch- (0.28-mm-)diameter wire that complies with FS RR-W-365, Type VII. 2. Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard formed or extruded aluminum frames and removable vinyl fabric-retainer spline. Comply with requirements of ANSI/SNIA 1004. P• a. Finish: Baked-on organic coating as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. F. Hardware: Equip doors with the following hardware items standard with the manufacturer. I. Latch: Equip each door with a spring-operated latch with the bolt operated by a turn knob, thumb piece, or lever handle,and lockable from the inside only. 2. Closers: Equip each door with two adjustable tubular pneumatic or hydraulic closer, top and bottom of each door leaf, complying with the requirements of ANSI/BHMA A 156.4 for Type C09363 or C09343 respectively. 3. Stop: Equip each door with a chain-type door stop, complying with the requirements of ANSI/BHMA A 156.16 for Type L02222. 4. Hinges: Equip each door with not less than 4 concealed hinges using oil-impregnated bearing surfaces. G. Narrow Joint Seam Sealers: Acrylic terpolymer, solvent-based, one-part, thereto-plastic sealant compound, with plus or minus 7-1/2 percent movement, complying with FS TT-S-00230, Class B, Type 11, and AAMA 803.3, recommended by the manufacturer for general use as an exposed building construction sealant H. Exterior Perimeter Sealing Compound: Silicone, rubber-based, one-part low-modulus, elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use M, G,A.and as applicable to joint substrate, O; and AAMA 808.3, recommended by the sealant manufacturer for porous and nonporous joint faces; in color matching frame finish or as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard colors. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Factory fabricate door members, including jamb and head frame,sills, door stiles,and rails, and insert frames from solid or hollow extrusions of sizes, shapes, and wall thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as standard with the manufacturer. I. Wall Thickness: Not less than 0.050 inch thick for door stiles, rails, and mullions. Not less than 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) thick for glass insert frames. Not less than 0.045 inch (1.14 mm) thick for screen insert frames. B. Corners: Factory assemble storm doors using corner joinery methods indicated to produce rigidly connected, mitered joints that are rackproof during normal handling, installation,and operation. ro I. Corner Joinery: Weld or braze corners of main frame at head, jamb, and screen insert joints. Weld or braze stiles, rails,and crossbars of doors. Mechanically join glazed insert frames. C. Combination Storm Doors: Fabricate combination storm door.; in sizes and design indicated; coordinate with prime doors to provide sizes and frame configuration required for close-fitting assemblies. ALUMINUM STORM AND SCREEN DOORS 08396- 3 00 Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide storm doors that are listed by product name and manufacturer in the AAMA Certified Products Directory under the applicable specification heading for combination storm doors. I. Provide storm doors complying with AAMA 1102.7, 'Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum Storm Doors," except where more stringent requirements are indicated. .w 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparing shop drawings and fabricating screen and storm doors. B. Provide storm and screen doors at all rear and side entrances. an PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS .. A. Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Gerkin, Classic, Custom Plus 2. Harvey Industries,Solid Core Storm Door 3. Viking,#800 2.2 MATERIALS .A A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish: comply with ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet or plate and ASTM B 22 I, alloy 6063-T5, or equivalent,for aluminum extrusions. w B. Reinforcing, Fasteners, and Hardware: Where metals other than aluminum are standard with the manufacturer for concealed reinforcing, fasteners, and hardware, use stainless steel or other noncorrosive materials that are compatible with aluminum. If steel is used for reinforcing members, provide steel electroplated with a zinc coating that complies with ASTM B 633, or another comparable coating. For exposed fasteners, match color and finish of the metal or hardware being fastened. C. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard weather stripping material that is compatible with aluminum, resistant to weathering, and effectively reduces air leakage. I. Pile Weather Stripping: Complying with AAMA 701. D. Glazing. Complying with ANSI Z97.1 and with the Consumer Products Safety Commission's requirements in CPSC 16 CFR. Part 1201. I. Tempered Glass: Complying with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A, Type 1, Class I, Quality q3. 2. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard channel-type gaskets compatible with aluminum and *• resistant to weathering. 3. Glazing Compounds: Manufacturer's standard back-bedding compounds or tapes, or both, used either singly or in a combination conforming to AAMA 800 and selected according to AAMA 850. ALUMINUM STORM AND SCREEN DOORS 08396- 2 '* .w Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dieu&Company Architects, Inc. �w SECTION 08396—ALUMINUM SCREEN AND STORM DOORS *R PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. B. SUMMARY C. This Section includes the following types of aluminum screen and storm doors: I. Combination screen and storm doors(AAMA Specification CSD). D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames"for door frames. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design Requirements: Provide storm doors that comply with ANSI/AAMA 1102.7 "Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum Storm Doors,"except where more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Testing Requirements: Test each application type of storm door by a recognized testing agency, according to ASTM E 330 for uniform load structural performance, ASTM E 283 for air infiltration, and ASTM E 331 for water drainage test for performance class required. I. Performance class equals the design pressure in psf. 2. Air Infiltration Test: Not more than 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (.00825 cu. m/s x sq. m) of rough opening at 1.57 psf(75 Pa). 3' Uniform Load Test Test pressure equals 1.5 times the design pressure for 10 seconds. 4. Water Drainage Test: Pressure drop of 0 for 3 minutes with no water on the interior. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of screen and storm door specified, including details of construction relative to materials, glazing, screens, weather stripping, dimensions of individual components, hardware, operations, test performance, profiles,and finishes. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of screen and storm doors. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, glass and frame thickness, screens, hardware, operating details, and attachments to other units of Work. D. Test Reports: Submit certified laboratory test reports showing that storm doors of the type application and class indicated comply with requirements specified in ANSI/AAMA 1102.7. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE wA ALUMINUM STORM AND SCREEN DOORS 08396 - 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01600: I. Before installation,verify that frames are proper size and type for door and are installed as required for proper installation of doors. 2. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to Architect B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by iinstailer. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Conditioning. Condition doors to average humidity in installation area prior to hanging. B. Prefitting: Prefit doors to frames and machine for hardware to whatever extent not previously worked at factory as required for proper fit and uniform clearance at each edge. C. Sealing: Before installation of hardware brush apply primer to all job site cut or planed surfaces. I. Primer. Type recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation's. I. Installation: By skilled finish carpenters or factory authorized installers. 2. Installer. Thoroughly familiar with the requirements of the manufacturer's door warranty as currently in effect and assure compliance with all provisions. OR B. Hanging I. After sizing doors,fit for hardware as scheduled. 2. Hang doors to be free of binding with hardware functioning properly. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Adjustment At completion of job, adjust doors and hardware as required and leave in proper operating condition. OR B. Protection: Advise General Contractor of proper procedures required to protect installed wood doors from damages or deterioration until acceptance of entire project. C. Replacement Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. I. Causes for Rejection: Include chips, scratches or gouges. D. Repair of Scratches and Gouges: Fill with auto body filler and sand with 120 grit sandpaper. END OF SECTION 08215- 3 STILE AND RAIL DOORS so Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Factory Primed Door Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard limited lifetime warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS on 2.1 MANUFACTURERS R A. Acceptable Manufacturers: I. TruStile Doors, Inc.,835 East 73rd Avenue, Denver,CO 80229 we 2.2 STILE AND RAIL DOORS A. Description: I. Type: TruStile TS 4000 Series MDF Doors with wood wedge edges. 2. Size and Panel Types: See Drawings. 3. Stile Thickness: 1-3/4" 4. Finish: No primerFactory primed. B. Stile and Rail (Sticking)Type: .w I. Reverse Roman (OG) Sticking C. Panel Type: I. Beveled Panel (Panel A2) D. Door Top Type: I. Square Top w� 2.3 FACTORY PREFITTING AND PREMACHINING A. Doors: Prefit and premachine doors at factory. I. Obtain accurate field measurements of hardware mortised in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in factory. 2. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. 3. Comply with accepted hardware schedules, door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware. B. Tolerances: Comply with NWWDA tolerance requirements for prefitting. 2.4 BI-FOLD DOOR HARDWARE .w. A. Manufacturer and Type: L.E. Johnson Products, Inc. Series I I I FD folding door hardware set including track, hangers, hinges, pivots, knobs, brackets, screws and all other accessory items. Provide ADA- compliant hardware. PART 3 - EXECUTION STILE AND RAIL DOORS 08215- 2 #* Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 08215 -STILE AND RAIL DOORS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following products manufactured in accordance with SDI Recommended Standards: I. Stile and Rail MDF Doors 2. Factory Prefitting and Premachining. 3. Stile and Rail MDF Bi-Fold doors with hardware B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware with the exception of door hardware provided with Pre-Hung Door and Frame Assemblies specified herein. 2. Division 9 Section "Painting"for field painting factory-primed doors and frames. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): I. ASTM D-1037 —91 Standard Methods for Evaluating the Properties of Wood-Based Fiber and Particle Board Panel Materials. ++ 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. Indicate location, size, elevation, details of w construction, and factory preparation requirements for each door type. B. Templates: Hardware templates for hardware mounted on doors will be submitted under Section 08710 directly to door manufacturer immediately after acceptance of hardware schedule. Report failure to receive templates with reasonable promptness to General Contractor. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Do not deliver doors to building until it is entirely enclosed, drywall, plaster and concrete work is completed and dry and humidity in the building has reached average relative humidity of locality. on B. Storage: Stack doors flat and off floor on a level surface in a dry, well ventilated area. Keep doors covered while allowing air circulation. ON C. Handling: Do not drag doors across one another. D. Protection: Do not subject doors to abnormal heat, dryness, humidity or drastic changes in these conditions. Allow sufficient time for doors to acclimate to average existing conditions of the area before so installation. !! STILE AND RAIL DOORS 08215- 1 IM Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. K. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware in accordance with final Door Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A[ 15 Series Specifications for door and faame preparation for .. hardware. L. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at project site. M. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and Frames," published by Door and Hardware Institute. N. Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. I. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil,grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint 2. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint w PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION w, A. General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data,and as herein specified. wer B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames," unless otherwise indicated. C. In wood stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on Wo hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb.Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. D. For in-place drywall partitions install knock down slip-on drywall frames. IM E. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI-100. am 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime .o coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors. C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. r� wee END OF SECTION STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4 ■• Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. �w I. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners, welded construction for exterior applications and knocked-down for field assembly at interior applications. Provide strike reinforcement. w 2. Form exterior frames in two piece design with 1/2" adjustability. Provide metal clad wood jamb extensions as required for wall thickness indicated. Provide 16-gage strike reinforcing and 16-gage reinforcing for all surface applied hardware, and 10 gauge steel hinge reinforcement Corners butted for hairline joint at intersections of head and jambs. C. Threshold/Sweep: Provide barrier free ADA-compliant aluminum/vinyl threshold and adjustable vinyl sweep. Thresholds shall meet the standards of the Massachusetts Access Board Regulations for accessibility. D. Hinges: Provide 4 1/2"x 4 1/2"standard weight ball bearing hinges.At all outswinging doors, provide non- ferrous hinges with a clear coated finish to meet or exceed ANSI A 156.18, Materials and Finishes, and related ANSI A 156 series standards. E. Weatherstripping. Provide kerf and magnetic/compression weatherstripping. F. Lites: Insulating glass units, %z"total thickness,with manufacturer's standard PVC surround. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects,warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI-100 requirements. B. Internal Construction: Manufacturer's standard honeycomb, polyurethane, polystyrene, unitized steel grid, vertical steel stiffeners, or rigid mineral fiber core with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets where appropriate in accordance with SDI standards. C. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads except between nion-fire-rated pairs of doors not more than 1/4 inch. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. D. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold-rolled steel. ww E. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117"Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." F. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, and moldings from either cold-rolled or hot- rolled steel. G. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel in accordance with SDI-112. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16-gage inverted steel channels. H. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. 1. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with on ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. J. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U factor of 0.41 Btu/(hr x sq ft x deg F.) or better. STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 3 so Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. so C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inches high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4-inches spaces between stacked 00 doors to promote air circulation. PART 2- PRODUCTS ■w 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS so A. Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steel doors and frames by one of the following: B. Steel Doors and Frames: Amweld Building Products, Inc., Benchmark Commercial Doors, Ceco Corp. *o Curries Company, Mesker Door Co., Pioneer Industries,Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. 2.2 MATERIALS wo A. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653, commercial quality, with A40 coating, and as follows: an 1. Doors for interior use: Minimum 18 gauge thickness. 2. Doors for exterior use: Minimum 16 gauge thickness. 3. Visible seams on face sheets not permitted. Im B. Core: Expanded polyurethane, foamed in place, withouit voids,and bonded to inside surfaces of both face sheets. w C. Vertical Edges: Continuous flush interlocking seams joining face sheets. D. Top and Bottom Edges: Flush closures, integral with door construction. E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 1 8-gage sheet steel; galvanized where used with galvanized frames. F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. G. Shop Applied Paint: Apply after fabrication. I. Primer. Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1. "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames." am 2.3 PRE-HUNG DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLIES so A. Provide metal doors as specified below. I. Exterior Doors: 18-gage cold-rolled sheet steel faces, insulated to minimum R-value of 14.5. No deadbolt edge preparation. 2. Front door configuration: Provide style with decorative lite and sidelites as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Other doors: Provide 6-panel pressed designs as indicated on the Drawings. w. B. Provide metal frames for doors, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 16-gage cold-rolled steel with 22-gage closure frame. Frames shall conform to ASTM A653, commercial quality, with A40 coating. STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. go SECTION 08110-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following products manufactured in accordance with SDI Recommended Standards: I. Doors: Flush, hollow or composite construction standard steel doors for interior and exterior No locations. 2. Pre-Hung Door and Frame Assemblies: Composite construction steel doors in pressed steel adjustable frames, installed as an assembly. �.r B. Related Sections include the following. I. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware with the exception of door hardware provided with Pre-Hung Door and Frame Assemblies specified herein. 2. Division 9 Section "Painting"for field painting factory-primed doors and frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification an Sections. B. Product data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance,sound ratings, profiles,and finishes. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location wr and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. D. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on 00 contract drawings. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 40 A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames"ANSI/SDI-100 and as herein specified. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. r STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 1 am Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. no 3.6 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE: A. The following schedule is intended as a general guideline for materials and applications throughout the .o project The following items and locations shall include, but not be limited to: Item/ Furnished and oft Location Material Installed under Color* Joint Sealant at Mildew Resistant Silicone 07920 White tub and shower surround and at bathtub and bath sink Kitchen cabinet Mildew Resistant Silicone 07920 Clear & countertops Joint Sealants at Acrylic -emulsion 07920 As selected interior joints between exterior walls& new doors or windows Perimeter joints of Mildew Resistant Silicone 07920 White .. toilet Exterior joints at Silicone- emulsion 07920 As selected replacement doors and windows * As selected - means as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of colors. �* END OF SECTION w ..a .w JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 6 �+ Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ew C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated,except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1 193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials,applications,and conditions indicated. ire C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: I. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch,twist, puncture,or tear joint fillers. C. Remove absorbent joint filters that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints. D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not ew approved by sealant manufacturer. I. Provide concave joint configuration, per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled)joints. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. �r JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 5 M Peari Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. am 2. Proprietary, reticulated, closed-cell polymeric foam, nonoutgassing, with a density of 2.5 pcf and tensile strength of 35 psi per ASTM D 1623,and with water absorption less than 0.02 gms/cc per ASTM C 1083. 3. Any material indicated above. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 4" A. Primer. Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests and field tests. up B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION me 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 00 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: I. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing,water repellents,water, surface dirt, and frost 2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4 �* PM Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.3 JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. B. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent I pa C. Silicone Emulsion Sealant Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792,with ASTM C 920 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 50 e� percent in both extension and compression for a total of 100 percent D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,joint sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: I. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant MR a. "AC-20," Pecora Corp. b. "Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc. C. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc. 4", 2. Silicone-Emulsion Sealant: a. 790 Building Sealant" Dow Corning Corp. 3. Mildew Resistant Silicone: a. Base Polymer. Neutral-curing silicone. b. Type: S(single component). C. Grade: NS(nonsag). d. Class: 25 e. Feature: Formulated with fungicide,for use in high humidity and extreme temperatures. f. Manufacturers: 1) "Dow Corning 786"; Dow Corning Corp. 2) "SCS 1702 Sanitary"; General Electric Co. 3) "863#345 White'; Pecora Corp. 4) "OmniPlus Sonneborn Building Products Division, Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc. 2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers;and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: I. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured state. JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 3 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and w mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their ■* deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants,or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS .a A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: I. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 2. When joint substrates are wet B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. *e B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: ..e I. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS am A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data on Sheet at end of this Section, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type. Grade, Class,and Uses. I. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in o Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at time of installation and remain in .w compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for Uses indicated. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealants that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Elastomeric Sealant Data Sheet am JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 2 IN Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. es SECTION 07920—JOINT SEALANTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces as indicated below: a. Joints between different materials,at window and door replacement 2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Perimeter joints of window openings. b. Joints at new kitchen countertops and walls. C. New penetrations between floors and ceilings. d. Perimeter joints of new bathroom fixtures. e. Joints between different new materials. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification Sections. I. Product dam from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. 2. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the primers and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds. w 3. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available; for each product exposed to view. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. JOINT SEALANTS 07920- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Door and window casings: to match existing profile. 2.4 COLORS AND TEXTURES A. Where manufacturers standard products are indicated, provide siding and accessories complying with the following requirements: I. Match existing colors and textures by referencing manufacturers standard designations for these characteristics. " PART 3 - EXECUTION �w 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for substrates, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of siding. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 3.3 INSTALLATION go A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal movement Overlap joints to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. B. Install vinyl siding, soffit,and accessories according to ASTM D 4756. I. Install siding in continuous lengths without seams. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged, improperiy installed, or otherwise defective siding materials with new materials complying with specified requirements. B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION t VINYL SIDING 07460- 3 MW as Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. an 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other no rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. go B. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by siding manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace siding that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming, fading, or otherwise deteriorating beyond so, normal weathering. Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by manufacturer, of more than 4 color-difference units as measured according to ASTM D 2244. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. ON PART 2 - PRODUCTS no, 2.1 MANUFACTURERS .. A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following. I. Vinyl Siding. a. Alcoa Building Products. b. CertainTeed Corp.;Vinyl Building Products Group. C. Wolverine Technologies, Inc. 2.2 SIDING A. Formed Vinyl Siding: Solid vinyl siding and accessories complying with ASTM D 3679. I. Horizontal Pattern: 6-1l2- or 7-inch exposure in standard clapboard style, to match existing profile. 2. Texture: Plain, to match existing. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Siding Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim, window head flashing, corner cap, and other items as recommended by manufacturer for building configuration; match type of siding. w B. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following types of decorative accessories as indicated: I. None. w. C. Fasteners: Noncorrosive aluminum siding nails, in sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of I inch into substrate. Provide prefinished fasteners in color to match siding where face nailing is unavoidable. D. Ventilating soffit panels: to match existing profile. E. Corner posts and trim: to match existing profile. *" VINYL SIDING 07460- 2 "" Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 07460—VINYL SIDING PART I - GENERAL I.I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ww 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Vinyl siding. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for sheathing and air-infiltration barriers, framing, sheathing, flashing,and gutters. 2. Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants"for field-applied sealants. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed siding installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Siding and Accessories: Obtain each color, texture, pattern, and type of siding and related accessories from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened packages or bundles with labels intact B. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storage, handling,and protection. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS s A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if existing and forecasted weather conditions permit siding to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and if substrate is completely dry. VINYL SIDING 07460- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Hip and ridge shingles. 2. Underlayment felt,ASTM D 226. 3. Rubberized asphalt perimeter underlayment. 4. Metal flashing and drip edge. PART 3 - EXECUTION VA 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual. B. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. w C. Install water protection sheet at valleys, ridges,and eaves. D. Restore damaged components. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION w .eer SHINGLES 07310-2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. IN SECTION 07310-SHINGLES go PART I - GENERAL �s 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide shingles for roofing applications. """ 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics on and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty. Include labor and materials to repair or replace defective materials. I. Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion. PM 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship. MW PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Asphalt Shingles: I. Manufacturers: Bird Roofing Products, CertainTeed Rolling Products, GAF Materials Corp., Owens-Corning Fiberglass or approved equal. 2. Type: Square tab, fiberglass, laminated strip shingles with three-dimensional appearance: Mineral- surfaced, self-sealing, 3-tab, fiberglass-based, strip asphalt shingles, complying with both ASTM D 3018, Type I, and ASTM D 3462. Provide shingles with a Class A fire-test-response classification that pass the wind-resistance-test requirements of ASTM D 3161,Type 1 3. Colon to be selected from manufacturers full range of colors. B. Accessories: pe SHINGLES 07310-1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse,and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject r to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.Insert specific protection requirements here. END OF SECTION BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 5 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Provide continuous layer under slab on grade areas. Turn insulation up at slab edge and extend flush to surface of slab. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces,except for firestopping. I. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. B. Install sound attenuation blankets and fiberglass blanket insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: I. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. C. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: I. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling flanges to sides of framing members. Au 2. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to produce airtight installation after concealing finish material is in place. D. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where abutting an exterior wall. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. r. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. E Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.6 PROTECTION BUILDING INSULATION 07210-4 .. Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders for below grade use: a. Raven Industries, Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW. b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65. 2. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder for wall construction: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. C. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. I. If not indicated,extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches below exterior grade line. Will BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 3 .f. Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company.Architects, Inc. am I. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. " 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. w PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products "* that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following. I. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. C. Owens Corning. d. Tenneco Building Products. 2. Glass-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville Corporation. C. Knauf Fiber Glass. ' d. Owens Corning. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. .w I. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,widths, and lengths. B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively: I. Type VII. 2.20 lb/cu. fL. C. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation (for horizontal installation): ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from glass; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. D. Foil-Faced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Insulation and Sound Attenuation Blankets ASTM C 612, Type IA or ASTM C 553, Types I, 11, and 111; faced on one side with foil-scrim-kraft vapor retarder, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively;and of the following properties: 1. Minimum thermal resistivity of 3.2 deg F x h x sq. fL/Btu x in.at 75 deg F. BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 2 ,,,� O Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. No SECTION 07210- BUILDING INSULATION on PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following- I. Insulation under slabs-on-grade. 2. Concealed building insulation. 3. Sound attenuation blankets 4. Vapor retarders ("vapor barriers"). B. Related Sections include the following: 1.3 SUBMITTALS on A. Product Data For each type of product indicated. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing ON agency,for insulation products. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation. ON 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE on A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response on characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. fm I. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 40 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING C. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling,storing, and protecting during installation. D. Protect plastic insulation as follows: BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 1 so Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. oft b. Taped and finished joints C. Plaster veneer wallboard with plaster veneer skim coat d. 3 1/2 inch fiberglass acoustic insulation OR e. 2 x 4 studs 16 inch o.c. f. Plaster veneer wallboard with plaster veneer skim coat g. Taped and finished joints h. Paint finish go B. Blocking: Provide solid wood blocking and miscellaneous framing as required to support all items. 3.3 FLOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, provide floor construction of type indicated below: I. Joists: 16 inch o.c. maximum. 2. Supports: Support each end of framing securely on minimum I Y2 inch wide wood ledger or w. metal joist hanger. 3. Wood ledgers: Bolt wood ledgers into adjoining framing using minimum Y2 inch diameter lag bolts by length required to extend minimum of 3 inches into adjoining framing. a. Space lag bolts as required for load, but maximum of 24 inches o.c. 3.4 WOOD TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. w� I. Match color and grain pattern across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum board joint-finishing operations are completed. 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads and fill holes. 4. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation. .w 3.5 TUB AND SHOWER PANELS uw. 1. Measure and neatly trim panels as required to cover length and two ends of tub. Use one piece panels for each wall — no joints permitted except at corners. Provide single piece panel for shower ceiling. M 2. Adhesive attach panels in place to cover surface. Install edge trim pieces, covering all cut edges. 3. Caulk panel material and accessories securely in place. Brace panels in place until adhesive sets. END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 -8 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. Veneer Matching. Book match. e„ F. Finish: Site finish. 2.16 DOOR FRAMES A. Interior door frames aw I. Wood: Fingerjoint pine, primed for paint finish 2. Frame: Single rabbeted, I % inch overall thickness by width as required. 3. Casings:to match existing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching;other construction. C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. D. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized standards. E. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler. OR F. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood. 3.2 WALL CONSTRUCTION A. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, provide wall construction of types indicated below: 1. New exterior walls: a. Siding b. Air barrier membrane C. 518 inch plywood wall sheathing d. 6 inch fiberglass insulation e. 2 x 6 studs 24 inch o.c. f. Vapor retarder g. Gypsum board h. Taped and finished joints i. Paint finish 2. Interior walls: a. Paint finish MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 7 MW go Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.12 GUTTERS AND METAL FLASHING A. Provide standard aluminum flashing and gutters to extend to and match with existing construction. ■w B. Coil stock cladding. Where more than I inch of flashing is exposed to view, provide aluminum flashing with factory finished coating to match color of adjoining trim or siding. 2.13 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. I. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, '"° provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails,Wire, Brads,and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME 818.2.1. G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated,flat washers. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. I. Framing Hangers and Ties: Wood construction connectors fabricated of hot dip galvanized steel, recognized by BOCA and National Evaluation Service, with manufacturer's listed allowable loads. 2.14 AIR INFILTRATION BARRIER A. Air Infiltration Barrier. Woven polyolefin sheet w 2.15 WOOD WAINSCOT A. Type: Hardwood veneer paneling, ANSI/HPMA HP. rw� B. Species: Plain sliced red oak veneer,ANSI/HPMA HP. C. Core: Plywood. wu D. Face Pattern: V-grooved. pattern. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 6 +* Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. E. Exterior Railings: Clear, kiln-dried, pressure-treated SPF, Coventry Forest Products #1205 Colonial Handrail top and bottom rails. F. Exterior Balusters: Clear, kiln-dried,pressure treated SPF, 36", 2 Y4" square. G. Post cap: Clear, kiln-dried,pressure treated SPF, 3 3/8"square pyramid cap. H. Posts: 4 x 4 inch pressure treated colums,continuous from footing to cap. 1. Bracket: Brosco Corbel Pattern A,#3501. J. Handrails at ramp: I %+ inch nom. diameter steel pipe and fittings,with welded steel anchor plates - 2.10 PORCH CONSTRUCTION PM A. General: Rebuild framing and portions of rotted porch components to match existing, including decorative and required trim, fasteners, flashing, and fittings. Miscellaneous materials: either pressure treated wood if wood or stainless steel,aluminum or other permanent, non corroding metal. w B. Decking and treads at porch: 5/4 by 6 inch clear fir, with semi-transparent stain finish. Fasteners to be concealed. C. Risers: 314-inch finish boards. D. Posts: to match existing. E. Balusters: to match existing. F. Rails:to match existing. G. Decorative trim: to match existing. 2.11 SHEATHING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Wall and roof sheathing. APA rated sheathing, exterior I. Marked with span rating suitable for joist or stud spacing indicated. 2. Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch for wall sheathing 3. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch for roof sheathing. B. Underlayment: APA rated Underlayment Ext I. %2 inch plywood panels with fully sanded face. C. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underiayment DOC PS 1, Exposure I, Underlayment single-floor panels. I. Span Rating. Not less than 24 oc. 2. Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch. 3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. 4. Delete subparagraph below unless required for finish floor selected. aw MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 5 a. Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2.6 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS A. Shelving in Handicapped Accessible Units: 3/4-inch (19-mm) MDO plywood with banded edges with adjustable shelf brackets by Knape & Voight Provide KV-85ANO Standard with ANO-KV double bracket Provide single 12"deep shelf with rod at storage rooms and closets. B. Shelving in Laundry: Provide single 12" deep, 3/4-inch (19-mm) MDO plywood with banded edges with + + shelf brackets by Knape&Voight C. Vinyl Coated Wire Shelves: Provide Closet Maid vinyl coated wire shelves with integral clothes rod, w mounting brackets and accessories. Provide single 12" deep combination shelf and rods at all storage rooms and closets. At linen closets, except handicapped accessible units, provide five 12" deep shelves. Provide single 15"deep shelf over all washer/dryer areas. 2.7 TUB AND SHOWER SURROUND ENCLOSURE PANELS A. Panels: %. inch thick, 60 inches high, reinforced integral color compression molded modified acrylic, filled with natural minerals and coloring, solid surface product, NEMA LD3-3.09 stain resistant, ASTM E 84 flame spread less than 15, NSF approved, 25 year warranty against defects and cracking, color as selected by Architect from complete line of solid and aggregate colors: Swanstone solid surface material, by Swan Corporation or approved equal. B. Shower Floors: Barrier-free unit Swanstone LBF-3060 with ramp. Shower stalls: Swanstone SS-3636 C. Accessories: Manufacturer's trim kit with 5/8 inch by 3 5/8 inch recessed back trim edge pieces and interior corner moldings, Swanstone TK. Corner soap dish: Swanstone ES-2. Folding shower seat and grab bars. .w 2.8 WALL PANELS M. A. Panels: Y. inch thick. reinforced integral color compression molded modified acrylic, filled with natural minerals and coloring, solid surface product NEMA LD3-3.09 stain resistant, ASTM E 84 flame spread w less than 15, NSF approved, 25 year warranty against defects and cracking, color as selected by Architect from complete line of solid and aggregate colors: Swanstone solid surface material, by Swan Corporation or approved equal. Im B. Accessories: Manufacturer's trim base: 5/8 inch by 3 5/8 inch. Top cap: 5/8 inch by 3 5/8 inch with chamfered edge. we 2.9 RAMP, DECK AND STAIR CONSTRUCTION A. General: Provide complete deck construction system, including required trim, fasteners, flashing, and fittings. Miscellaneous materials: either pressure treated wood if wood or stainless steel, aluminum or other permanent, non corroding metal. B. Decking. 5/4 by 6 inch pressure treated wood with eased edges, with semi-transparent finish, two fasteners per joist Fasteners to be concealed. C. Treads: 5/4 by 6 inch pressure treated wood with half-round or rounded edge nosing, with semi- .w transparent finish, two fasteners per joist Fasteners to be concealed. D. Risers: 3/4-inch (I 9-mm) kiln-dried, pressure-preservative-treated SPF finish boards. MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 -4 .� ro Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. go C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. I. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece, or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: I. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2. Decking. 3. Wood porch and ramp framing, railings, newel posts, balusters and other railing system components. w.� 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. ' B. All framing, No. 2 or better grade and the following species: I. Spruce-pine-fir, NELMA, NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA. 2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: A composite of wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. Product has the following allowable design values as determined according to ASTM D 5456: I. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2850 psi for 12-inch nominal- depth members. 2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000.000 psi . 3. Fv: 250 psi minimum. 2.5 INTERIOR WOOD TRIM A. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), either finger-jointed or solid lumber, of one of the following species and grades: I. Grade Finish or 2 Common eastern white pine; NELMA or NLGA. 2. Grade 2 Common (Sterling) Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; NLGA or WWPA. 3. Grade A Finish alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple, sycamore, so tupelo, or yellow poplar, NHLA. B. Interior Window Sills: Window Sills: 514" MDF, Medite 11. go C. Door and window casings: Match existing profiles. D. Baseboard molding: Match existing profile. E. Window aprons: Match existing profile. o MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 3 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for each material specified. I. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and .w certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. C. Shop drawings for ramp and porch construction details. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. I. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. awe 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. ww 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). I. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and the following a. Copper, boron, azole (CBA),as provided by Wolmanized Natural Select wood treatment 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. wo MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 2 00 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. w SECTION 06105 -MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY Im PART I -GENERAL rw 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS w„ A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: po I. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking. 4. Wood furring. 5. Interior wood trim. 6. Shelving and clothes rods. on 7. Tub and shower surround enclosure panels. 8. Wall panels. 9. Ramp, deck and stair construction. 10. Porch construction. 11. Sheathing and underlayment. 12. Gutters and metal flashing. 13. Fasteners. ON 14. Air barrier membrane. 15. Door frames and jambs. 16. Wood wainscots. 17. Remodeling of existing architectural woodwork. 18. Wall Construction. 19. Floor Construction. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 7 Section "Vinyl Siding"for siding. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Lumber grading agencies,and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following. I. NELMA- Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA- National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 4. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. - 1.4 SUBMITTALS on MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105 - 1 N" Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Mft 4. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, WX hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M. 5. Zinc-Coating: Hot-dip galvanized coating for materials in exterior assemblies or exterior walls. B. Fasteners: I. Bolts and Nuts: Hexagon head type,ASTM A 307, Grade A. 2. Lag Bolts: Square head, FS FF-B-561. 3. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. 4. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-I 11. 5. Plain Washers: Round carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. 6. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: FS FF-S-325. 7. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588. 8. Lock Washers: Spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. 9. Zinc-Coating: Fasteners in exterior assemblies or exterior walls. C. Auxiliary Materials: ` I. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: CE CRD-C621. 2. Shop Primer. Alkyd primer, FS TT-P-645, compatible with topcoats. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay job; allow for cutting and fitting if field measurement not practical. B. Form work true to line with sharp angles and edges. Weld continuously, grind flush and make smooth on exposed surfaces. C. Install work plumb and level with hairline joints and ground flush welds. +■+� D. Lintels: Provide sizes indicated with 8" bearing at each end. E. Touch-up damaged coatings with shop primer and galvanize repair paint. F. Paint items scheduled in accordance with painting section. w.A END OF SECTION .� METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2 '"'�' Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 05500- METAL FABRICATIONS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. go 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide the following metal fabrications: I. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 2. Miscellaneous framing and supports for vertical and stair lifts. 3. Prefabricated building pipe columns. 4. Countertop supports. 5. Ramp handrails. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating material characteristics, details of construction, connections, and relationship with adjacent construction. I. Shop drawings shall be prepared and stamped by a qualified engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the project C. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics po and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, so and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS P" 2.1 MATERIALS A. Ferrous Materials: I. Steel Plates.Shapes and Bars:ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Steel Pipe, Black Finish: ASTM A 53, standard weight(Schedule 40. 3. Brackets, Flanges,and Anchors: Cast or formed metal. OPP METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1 Pearl Realty Trust December�14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Repointing Mortar. Match existing with strength suitable for project conditions. Match existing color, .. texture,and appearance. I. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207,Type S. ■* 3. Aggregate for Mortar. ASTM C 144. 4. Colored Mortar Aggregate: Colored sand. 5. Colored Mortar Pigment: Iron oxides and chromium oxides. 4W 6. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. B. Patching Materials: Compatible with existing materials;visual matching. ow C. Cleaning Materials: Medium pressure water and steam. D. Cleaning Materials: Alkaline prewash cleaner, chemical paint remover,and chemical cleaner. E. Manufacturers: Diedrich Chemical Restoration Technologies, Hydrochemical Techniques, National Restoration, ProSoCo or approved equal. F. Restoration Materials: Masonry repair anchors and stone consolidation treatment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Chemical Cleaning: I. Comply with cleaning chemical manufacturer's instructions, recommendations,and precautions. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces with masking agent or other effective means. 3. Clean surfaces in strict conformance with approved field tests and match mock-up panels. 4. Provide uniform final appearance. B. Repointing: .. 1. Obtain materials from one source to maintain color/texture/quality consistency. 2. Work only when ambient 40 degrees F to 80 degrees F temperature will be maintained until 72 hours after completion. 3. Remove old mortar by hand chisel and mallet, unless Contractor can demonstrate that power tools will not damage masonry. 4. Rake-out old mortar to depth equal to 2-1/2 times joint width and in no case less than 1/2" or depth required to expose sound mortar. 5. Do not damage masonry units. 6. Rinse joints and install pointing mortar in 1/2"deep layers. 7. Tool joints to match existing and cure mortar for not less than 72 hours. 8. After pointing, clean masonry using Tampico fiber brushes and running water. END OF SECTION MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04900-2 �` Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. SECTION 04900- MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING PART I —GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and 'Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide masonry restoration. I. Repointing mortar joints. B. Provide masonry cleaning. 1. Washing and cleaning exposed masonry surfaces. C. Schedule: I. Repointing Mortar Joints: 50 percent of exterior foundation wall. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Mortar Mix: Submit for approval mortar mix proposed for use. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform test cleaning to demonstrate/select appropriate cleaning materials, mixes,and methods. B. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship for each type of repointing and cleaning. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect persons and property from injury and damage from cleaning operations. Do no work when go winds prevent control of sand, cleaners or rinse water. Dispose of run-off in a legal manner. For chemical cleaning, clean only when ambient 40 degrees F temperature and above will be maintained during cleaning and seven days after. ee on MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04900-1 MW no Pearl Realty Trust December-i4. 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. .. 3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 4. Color to match existing. C. Accessories: I. Loose lintels: Galvanized steel, 3 A by 3 A by A inch minimum 2. Rigid Anchors: Galvanized steel straps. 3. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A,galvanized. 4. Post-installed Anchors: Chemical or expansion anchors. 5. Nonmetallic expansion joint strips. 6. Bond breaker strips. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation of Masonry Assemblies: I. Comply with Brick Institute of America BIA Tech Notes. 2. Comply with cold weather and warm weather protection procedures as recommended in BIA Tech Notes. 3. Sawcut units when required. Maintain uniform joint width. Provide full bed, head and collar joints except at weepholes. 4. Install lintels and accessories in masonry construction. 5. Coordinate installation of flashings. 6. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for spacing of ties and horizontal reinforcing. 7. Provide expansion and control joints in accordance with BIA and NCMA recommendations. 8. Remove and replace damaged units. 9. Clean brick using bucket and brush method, BIA Tech Note 20. w END OF SECTION BRICK MASONRY 04800-2 �"" Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 04800—BRICK MASONRY PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide unit masonry construction: I. Repair and remodeling of existing masonry construction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each material and product used. B. Samples: Submit two representative samples of each material specified indicating visual characteristics and finish. Include range samples if variation of finish is anticipated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mock-Ups: Provide mock-up as required to demonstrate quality of workmanship. B. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Face Brick I. Size and color. Match existing. 2. Grade: ASTM C 216, Grade SW,severe weathering type for areas subject to freeze-thaw. 3. Type: ASTM C 216,Type FBS, for general exposed use. 4. Bond Pattern: Match existing. B. Mortar and Grout 1. Mortar Materials: Ready mixed,ASTM C 207,Type S. 2. Mortar Aggregate: Natural color,ASTM C 144. '�!' BRICK MASONRY 04800- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. No C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the to following methods: I. Moisture Curing. Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect Remove and so replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar. Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one parr Portland cement to two and go one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve,using only enough vrater for handling and placing. C. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: The Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests,and submit test reports during concrete placement. B. Nondestructive Testing. Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. C. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect END OF SECTION "�"' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-7 ow Pearl Realty Trust December-44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. N. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. ,. S. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold-Weather Placement Comply with ACI 306.1. G. Hot-Weather Placement Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R •* 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES w. A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch in height 3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS �. A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1 R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth,granular texture. 3.9 FINISHING WALKS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.I R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform,smooth,granular texture. C. Broom Finish: After floating, complete troweling and finish surface with fine-hair broom drawn across concrete at right angles to edge of walk. 3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following �* methods: am CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6 ®" Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. 3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder. Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch or minus 3/4 inch. 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for placing reinforcement I. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,earth,ice,and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. rlr B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Architect C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. D. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic,to avoid cold joints. I. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 3098. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. wr E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. I. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 5 .. Pearl Realty Trust December,44,2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. .. H. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice." 2.10 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information. ow PART 3 - EXECUTION an 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. .. D. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. ., E. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. F. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 1W 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is °' attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions,and directions furnished with items to be embedded. I. Install anchor bolts,accurately located, to elevations required. 3.3 REMOVING FORMS A. G eneral: Formwork, for piers and walks that does not support weight of concrete, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Completely remove cardboard forms. "! CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 "f° Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible; with other admixtures and g■ cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. g, 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder. ASTM E 1745, Class C. of one of the following materials; or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick: on 1. Nonwoven, polyester-reinforced, polyethylene coated sheet; 10 mils thick. 2. Three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced, laminated, high-density polyethylene sheet; 7.8 on mils thick. B. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand;ASTM D448, Size 10,with 100 percent passing a No.4 sieve and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve; meeting deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for line aggregates. rr 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover. AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq.yd. dry. B. Water. Potable. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases,as follows: I. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. w C. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mirc as follows: I. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi . D. Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: ON I. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3500 psi. E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than pordand cement in concrete as follows: I. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. F. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete exposed to deicers or subject to freezing and thawing while moist. �w G. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. "' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 3 Pearl Realty Trust Decembert14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Smooth interior spiral wrapped cardboard tubing that will provide continuous,true,and smooth concrete surfaces. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit C. Form-Release Agent Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. I. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. I. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than I inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. M 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60,deformed. B. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded cold-drawn plain-steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185, of size 6 x 6 W 2.9 x 2.9 unless other wise indicated. Furnish in flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Anchor bolts: Steel anchor bolts, minimum %s inch diameter by 15 inch length, with threaded end for attachment B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete. C. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS No A. Portland Cement ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded C. Water. Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. .� 2.5 ADMIXTURES CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 "'� �rw Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE go PART I - GENERAL I.I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. PM 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete,including formwork, reinforcement,concrete materials,mix design,placement procedures,and finishes. B. Related Sections include the following. 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork"for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement,fly ash and other pozzolans,ground granulated blast-furnace slag,and silica fume. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design,and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: I. ACI 301,"Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117,"Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." ON PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK g" CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. E Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION no w R• on °a HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 5 Pearl Realty Trust December44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown,grade,and smoothness. Repair surfaces by loosening displaced material, filling with hot-mix asphalt, and rerolling to required elevations. C. Second Rolling. Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot. Continue second rolling until mixture has been evenly compacted. D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm. Continue rolling until course has attained 95 percent compaction density. .� E. Edge Shaping. While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while still hot, with back of rake or smooth iron. Compact thoroughly using tamper or other satisfactory method. F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials. Remove paving course over area affected and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Surface Smoothness: Compact final course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: I. Surface Course: 3/16 inch. B. Surface Elevations: Verify that final elevations match indicated grades and that surface water drains evenly onto street, without forming puddles. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. I. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements. .A B. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549. D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances. HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02511 -4 " ON Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. 40 B. Notify Architect in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving installation until these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION a�. A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. 1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course. r B. Prime Coat Apply uniformly over surface of compacted-aggregate base at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd.. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum. I. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt Use just enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated. w 2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving. 3.3 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt mix on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section,and thickness,when compacted: I. Base course: minimum 2 inch thickness. 2. Surface course: minimum I % inch thickness 3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat. B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide, except where infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. I. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete asphalt base course for a section before placing asphalt surface course. eea C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. 3.4 COMPACTION e� A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - 3 Peari Realty Trust December 44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. "M 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if substrate is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met I. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 2. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of placement 3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATES A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations. B. Coarse Aggregate: Sound; angular crushed stone; crushed gravel; or properly cured, crushed blast- furnace slag; complying with ASTM D 692. C. Fine Aggregate: Sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone; gravel, properly cured blast- furnace slag, or combinations thereof, complying with ASTM D 1073. 2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Asphalt Cement ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material. B. Prime Coat Asphalt emulsion prime conforming to state DOT requirements. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Sand: ASTM D 1073, Grade Nos. 2 or 3. 2.4 MIXES A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Provide dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction and designed according to procedures in AI's "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types." I. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located. .W PART 3 - EXECUTION No 3.1 EXAMINATION ■ A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads. HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02511 -2 we Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dieu&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02511 -HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Hot-mix asphalt paving. ON B. Related Sections include the following. I. Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for aggregate subbase and base courses. po 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION W A. Provide hot-mix asphalt pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of the standard specifications of the state or of authorities 'having jurisdiction. on I. Standard Specification: Class I bituminous concrete pavement 2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section. e. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that each material complies with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed hot-mix asphalt paving 00 similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot-mix asphalt similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AI's "The Asphalt Handbook„" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. " " HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 02511 - I a Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material,compact, and reconstruct surfacing. I. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.22 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including; unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris,and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. ow END OF SECTION w an ter, w# EARTHWORK 02300-9 Pearl Realty Trust December-�44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. E. Provide grass seed evenly broadcast at minimum rate of 4 pounds per 1,000 sf area Rake seed lightly into top 118 inch of soil, roll lightly and water with a fine spray. F. Protect seeded areas by spreading hay mulch in uniform blanket net less than I M inches loose measurement G. Provide watering and care of new and existing lawn areas until substantial completion. Return at final completion and regrade and reseed areas which fail to show a uniform growth. 3.19 PLANTER BED A. Excavate minimum of one foot below finished planter elevation. Place a layer of gravel at least 4 inches thick in bottom of planter,cover with nonwoven filter fabric,and fill with planter soil mix. B. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to elevation indicated, providing at least 8 inch depth of topsoil mix. I. Planter Soil Mix: One part topsoil, one part coarse sand, one part peat, and 3 lb of dolomitic limestone per cubic yard of mix. 3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922,and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests may be performed at the following locations and frequencies: ews I. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. .. 2. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests. D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.21 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces *! become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. EARTHWORK 02300-8 "� Pearl Realty Trust December-14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. I. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent 3.16 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface,free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines,and elevations indicated. I. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots,fill low spots,and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: I. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus I inch. 2. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of Ill inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. 3.17 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade and as follows: I. Place base course material over subbase. 2. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to go ASTM D I S57. 3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a on single layer. S. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers,with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted. 3.18 TOPSOIL AND SEED A. At disturbed areas, place minimum of 4 inches of topsoil. B. Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 8 inches. Remove stones larger than I inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. C. Finish Grading: Grade to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and ws. rake, remove ridges,and fill depressions to meet finish grades. D. Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. "" EARTHWORK 02300- 7 MW Pearl Realty Trust December44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. C. Provide 4-inch thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. D. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material,free of particles larger than I inch,to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit I. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing,and as sheeting is removed. G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. 3.13 FILL A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills. B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than I vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: I. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy,frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight 3.15 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 40 EARTHWORK 02300- 6 MP Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. �w I. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. C. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades. D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities,as directed by Architect. 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect I. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect so 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown +0 dust I. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of ON remaining trees. 3.11 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: I. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing,and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL go A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of wr conduits. B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings;fill with concrete e� to elevation of bottom of footings. '"" EARTHWORK 02300-5 ow Pearl Realty Trust December�44,2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock,soil materials,and obstructions. I. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock replace with satisfactory soil materials. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus I inch. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork for installing services and other construction,and for inspections. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections,elevations,and grades. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths,and elevations. I. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells,joints,and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. I. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. no 3.8 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. No EARTHWORK 02300-4 .. Pearl Realty Trust December-J4,2001 Direr&Company Architects,Inc. E. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F. Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,and natural or op crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No.200 sieve. G. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand;ASTM D 2940;with at least 90 percent passing a I-I/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No.200 sieve. .w H. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a I-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No.200 sieve. I. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7,a minimum of 6 percent organic material content; free of stones I inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. I. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep;do not obtain from agricultural land,bogs or marshes. ON J. Grass seed: Fresh, clean, new-crop seed complying with tolerance for purity and germination established by Official Seed Analysts of North America. Provide seeds with minimum germination by weight of 75 percent, consisting of mixture of 60 percent Kentucky Bluegrass, 20 percent Chewing No Fescue and 20 percent Perennial Ryegrass. r0 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork aw operations. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil- bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades,and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. ,sw B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining,washout,and damage by rain or water accumulation. I. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. EARTHWORK 02300- 3 am Pearl Realty Trust December44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. .. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical .m appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. I. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving,or layer placed Im between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk. J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase,drainage fill,or topsoil materials. o. K. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. No 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE WA A- Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving adjacent buildings unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: .,. 1. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 2. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. Im PART 2 - PRODUCTS No 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a w■ combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris,waste, frozen materials, vegetation,and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols. I. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum **� moisture content at time of compaction. D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. o EARTHWORK 02300- 2 am Pearl Realty Trust December-14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 02300- EARTHWORK PART I - GENERAL I.I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade,walks,pavements,lawns,and plantings. 2. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. w 3. Backfilling. 4. Subbase course for walks and pavements. 5. Topsoil and seed. 6. Planter bed. B. Related Sections include the following- 40 I. Division I Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls." 2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete"for concrete walks. 3. Division 15 and 16 Sections for utilities and coordination for backfllling. 40 1.3 DEFINITIONS g" A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. I. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support 40 sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving. ON C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. No D. Borrow. Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. E. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water. O. F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. I. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect on Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions so without direction by Architect Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect,shall be without additional compensation. on EARTHWORK 02300- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December=l4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. S. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local JOIN laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. ON Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. I. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of eo Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas,of rubbish, waste material, litter,and other foreign po substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. ON C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth,even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery,and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. g. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. i. Remove labels that are not permanent j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. I) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. 1. Replace pare subject to unusual operating conditions. M. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose:of lawfully. on END OF SECTION NO CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770- 5 Pearl Realty Trust December-44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. spine with the printed title"OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name,and subject matter of contents. wo 1.8 WARRANTIES on A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. I. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents,and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-I I-inchpaper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Marls tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name,address,and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. I. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days'advance notice. .� 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following: 1. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-4 "�` Pearl Realty Trust December-]4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show go cross-reference on Contract Drawings. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. ow 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and on similar identification where applicable. S. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING' in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. ■ C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data. I. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturers written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings,where applicable. w 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem,and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. C. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal,and weekend operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. 2. Maintenance Data a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name,address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. C. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770- 3 A" Pearl Realty Trust December-4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. an either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. Wo 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, ~` complete the following. I. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division I Section "Payment Procedures." ++ 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, *� Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. .� 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS(PUNCH LIST) .w A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. I. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls,floors,equipment,and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue-or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. I. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is ., Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity,to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. "** CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-2 """ M Pearl Realty Trust December-i4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. e. SECTION 01770-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART I - GENERAL No 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to,the following: I. Inspection procedures. 40 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. "r` 6. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: ON 1. Division I Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division I Section "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning,of Project site. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections. .s 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining slate of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request I. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, on and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 3. Complete startup testing of systems. 4. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 5. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools,and similar elements. so 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use,operation,and maintenance. 7. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 8. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, 'go CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December=l4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following: I. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Protect items from damage during storage. 3. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. E. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw,then remove concrete between saw cuts. F. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw,then remove masonry between saw cuts. G. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished,then break up and remove. H. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in ON RFCI-WP and its Addendum. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 4.0 B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. w C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. go END OF SECTION Sm 4M 40 40 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 5 .. Pearl Realty Trust December-44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. am C. Temporary Shoring. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. aw I. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. am 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of up dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. I. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions,such as ice,flooding,and pollution. an B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. .w C. Cleaning. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 4. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 7. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls,floors,or framing. 8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 9. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before ,. selective demolition operations began. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following: s.es 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Store items in garage for Owner. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-4 *■* Pearl Realty Trust December-14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. e. PART 2- PRODUCTS - NONE PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. ew C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. 40 D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. oft 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities serving areas to be selectively demolished. I. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. I. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people and vehicles around demolition area. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction,to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 40 4. Cover and protect furniture,furnishings,and equipment that have not been removed. B. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, me and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. I. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated 40 temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 3 NNEW ON Pearl Realty Trust Decembed4,2001 Dieu&Company Architects, Inc. am A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. ,w B. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage am each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following. I. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Coordination for shutoff, capping,and continuation of utility services. . B. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. go 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE wo A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination:' Review list of proposed items to be removed and salvaged. .. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain access to existing driveways,sidewalks,and other adjacent occupied facilities. B. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far ... as practical. 2. Before start of demolition, Owner will remove furniture, contents of closets and all stored items. C. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work I. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage .® during selective demolition operations. I. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 2 "'' w Pearl Realty Trust December-14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. SECTION 01732-SELECTIVE DEMOLITION sw PART I - GENERAL I.I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A This Section includes the following: I. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. rae B. Work of Prior Separate Contract: 1. Removal of asbestos or materials containing asbestos. a. Found in the abandoned boiler and the first floor bathroom linoleum flooring. 2. Removal of hazardous materials. a. Lead was detected on various building components, specifically interior doors, door iambs, door casings, window systems, painted exterior doors and trim, and front and side porch components. go C. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Summary"for use of the premises and phasing requirements. OW 2. Division I Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 3. Division I Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective 40 demolition operations. 1.3 DEFINITIONS so A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. MW B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall OR them where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not „" otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP e* on SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December-l4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. I. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum Ar,r disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. a. Remove pipe or conduit where possible. Otherwise, cap, valve, or plug and seal remain- ing portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter af- ter cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching. Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. wr I. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance- Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary,to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. am 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. e0 END OF SECTION ON am Or ON ew 40 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 3 Pearl Realty Trust Decembeel4.2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. I. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. no PART 3 - EXECUTION am 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be so performed. I. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including so compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Ift 3.2 PREPARATION A Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut .. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. no C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. .f 3.3 PERFORMANCE sm A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time,and complete without delay. I. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting. Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 -2 go Pearl Realty Trust December--]4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ON SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. s� 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting. Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching. Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 4" 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. "o C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended,or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. I. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of 40 cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - I Pearl Realty Trust December.J4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. END OF SECTION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-4 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place,accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. No I. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. WA G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,arrange joints for the best visual effect Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. ew H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. am 3.4 STARTING AND ADJUSTING ow A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units,and retest so B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace 00 damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authori zed service representative is required to inspect field- Pa assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division I Section "Quality Requirements." go 3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or o, deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. ee• 3.6 CORRECTION OF THE WORK an A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Cutting and Patching." Am I. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials,and properly adjusting operating equipment B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. �w C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E Remove and replace chipped, scratched,and broken glass or reflective surfaces. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 3 Pearl Realty Trust Decembe"4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions,including substrates. C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be .w installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. ON 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, ow as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease "" of removal for replacement 3. Conceal pipes,ducts,and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of T-6 inches unless otherwise specifically approved in writing. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. •"" C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-2 Pearl Realty Trust Decembef 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01700-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS ■ PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS w A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following. I. General installation of products. 2. Starting and adjusting. 3. Protection of installed construction. 4. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels,and final cleaning. PART 2 - PRODUCTS(Not Used) a�. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and ws location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. I. Before construction,verify the location and points of connection of utility services. no B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. ew C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. I. Written Report Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: ,ear EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 1 ow Pearl Realty Trust December=!4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability,visual effect,and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. f. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the • Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. g. Contractors waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify w* Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 7 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. " PART 2 - PRODUCTS .�. 2.1 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing. Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: I. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 2. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 3. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION .ter PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A SECTION 01600-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS �* A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions;and comparable products. 40 B. Related Sections include the following. I. Division I Section"References"for applicable industry standards for products specified. e� 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the germs "material," "equipment," "system,"and terms of similar intent I. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature,that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. e2 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project Prod- ucts salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as ap- plicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. go PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December-14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects,Inc. e 2. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics, following approved layout to be provided by Architect. 3.3 OPERATION,TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. I. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. C. Temporary Facility Changeover. Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when w it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 4W 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division I Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION NO TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 5 Pearl Realty Trust Decembe04,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. ., 3. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel who handle materials that require wash up. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each type of material handled. 4. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units. D. Heating and Cooling. Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. I. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities,and 65 deg F for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed. ■. E Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. F. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment. I. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio. G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. I. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations, traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed. H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common- use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. 1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. .. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Owner's office. ow e. Principal subcontractors'field and home offices. 2. Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving telephone im calls when away from field office. I. Project Identification Sign: Provide project identification sign of 3 It by 6 ft size, painted on % inch thick HDO exterior plywood, mounted on 4 x 4 pressure treated wood posts. I. Install sign where directed in field by Architect Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-4 '*" ■ Pearl Realty Trust December--A 4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. B. Drinking-Water fixtures: tap-dispenser or bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper cup supply. C. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide vented, self- contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. " I. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having ,® jurisdiction,and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed. D. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light. E. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, �w wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac,20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable. PART 3 - EXECUTION on 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with Aw performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed IV permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. I. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for, time when service can be us interrupted, if necessary,to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before: temporary utility is available, provide trucked-in services. B. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. I. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for ±e* disposal of used material. SO TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 3 .A Pearl Realty Trust Decembern14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings,and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A 10.6, NECA's"Temporary Electrical Facilities,"and NFPA 241. I. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. *�! 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. 1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: I. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS am A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Water. Potable. C. For signs and directory boards, provide exterior-type, Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood of sizes and thicknesses indicated. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500.2 Pearl Realty Trust December--.14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. e SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities,and security and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to,the following. ffiv I. Water service and distribution. 2. Sanitary facilities, including toilets,wash facilities,and drinking-water facilities. 3. Heating and cooling facilities. 40 4. Electric power service. 5. Lighting. 6. Telephone service. 40 C. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementa- go lion and termination schedule and utility reports. 2. Division I Section "Execution Requirements"for progress cleaning requirements. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities r without cost. including, but not limited to, the following: I. Owner's construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project 3. Architect 4. Testing agencies. 5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Water Service: Use water from Owner's existing water system without metering and without payment of use charges. C. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. K. "Project site" is the space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the '• most stringent requirement Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal,to Architect for a decision before proceeding. I. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as ^` appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with industry .. standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. I. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them available on request E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." PART 2 - PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION REFERENCES 01420- 2 ""` e Pearl Realty Trust Decemberg4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. R SECTION 01420-REFERENCES ■ PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ■' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract B. "Approved": The term "approved," when used to convey Architect's action on Contractors submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed;' "requested," "authorized," "selected,""approved,""required,"and "permitted" mean directed by Architect, requested by Architect,and similar phrases. `. D. "Indicated": The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on Drawings or to other paragraphs or schedules in Specifications and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. an Terms such as shown," "noted, scheduled,„ "specified”specified„ are used to help the user locate the reference. E. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. 11111111 F. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,assembly, installation,and similar operations. G. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at Project site including; unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. '! H. "Provide": The term"provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 1. "Installer": An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection,application,and similar operations. J. The term "experienced," when used with an entity, means having successfully completed a minimum of three previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated;and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry” does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. ? ► REFERENCES 01420- 1 Pearl Realty Trust Decembei-=44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. e PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. I. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these w Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division I Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION +�w QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400- 5 Pearl Realty Trust December._#4,2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 4. Testing agency will interpret tests and Inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 5. Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work. D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility,provide quality-control services,including retesting and reinspecting,for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. I. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection,and similar quality-control " service through Contractor. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. y. 5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: I. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. a. 4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. I. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples,and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 15 days of date established for commencement of the Work. I. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS(Not Used) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-4 *� Pearl Realty Trust Decembee44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in ■ construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the +� kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design,and extent F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. w 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names,addresses,and telephone numbers of testing agencies '" engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. I. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when w they so direct. C. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. I. Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies im observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial go Completion,which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400- 3 Pearl Realty Trust December44, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. I. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following. I. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following. I. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name,address,and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the ,;.. Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-2 `"" s Pearl Realty Trust Decembee-44,2001 Dietz.&Company Architects, Inc. r4 SECTION 01400-QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ■ PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS +. A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality m control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. I. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section"Construction Progress Documentation"for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Division I Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not 4" include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 1.4 DELEGATED DESIGN QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400- 1 e Pearl Realty Trust DecembeuJ4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Name,address,and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s)covered by subcontract 3. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate,covered by subcontract PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections an field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect, B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and PIN approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. F" 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will �w mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. C. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION Will on 01330- 5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES .A Pearl Realty Trust Decembee#4, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-112 by I I inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three blue- or black-line prints of each submittal, unless prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will return one print. Make xerox copies as required for distribution. Retain original returned print as a Project Record Drawing. D. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following. I. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Quality Requirements"for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors,textures,and patterns available. 3. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following. a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer. . C. Sample source. 4. Additional Information: On attached transmittal, provide the following as applicable: a. Size limitations. b. Compliance with recognized standards. C. Availability. **^ d. Delivery time. 5. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these .. characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample,submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate , workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics. 6. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 7. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. E Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Construction Progress .� Documentation." F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Payment Procedures." G. Subcontract List Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-4 .� e Pearl Realty Trust Decembee44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. e h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. i. Remarks. ■ j. Signature of transmitter. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for iperformance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. I. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return three copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information,as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. g. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. oo h. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop ON Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data I. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power,signal, and control wiring. f. Templates and patterns. g. Compliance with specified standards. h. Notation of coordination requirements. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 3 Pearl Realty Trust Decembee!14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review. Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. If intermediate submittal is necessary,process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Allow 7 days for processing each resubmittal. 4. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. I. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: .■, a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor or f. Name and address of supplier or g. Name of manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision number. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references,as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect MR observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and am will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. ow Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements "" of the Contract Documents. 2. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: ON a. Project name. b. Date. C. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer,and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-2 �. ■ Pearl Realty Trust Decembet!-4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples,and other miscellaneous submittals. B. Related Sections include the following. I. Division I Section"Payment Procedures"for submitting Applications for Payment 2. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 3. Division I Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test; and inspection reports and Delegated-Design Submittals. 4. Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties and Project Record r„ Documents. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. �w 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES No A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction we activities. I. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and 40 related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. ro a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. go C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. ON SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330- 1 e, Pearl Realty Trust Decembee44,2001 Dieu&Company Architects, Inc. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractors Construction Schedule Updating. I. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect and Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. END OF SECTION on �w so CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 3 Pearl Realty Trust Decembeeg-4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, ** fabrication,and delivery when establishing dates. I. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. .. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with Contractor's schedule List those items required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required eariy because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's"Construction Planning&Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of •. Substantial Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows a different completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following. I. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 3. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar Chart Schedule: Submit horizontal bar chart type construction schedule within seven days of date .� established for Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320-2 Pearl Realty Trust Decembee44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01320-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART I - GENERAL rA. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ** A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of an construction during performance of the Work, including the following. 1. Submittals Schedule. 2. Contractors Construction Schedule. B. Related Sections include the following. 1. Division I Section"Payment Procedures"for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division I Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. ew 3. Division I Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division I Section"Quality Requirements"for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular 40 format I. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. B. Contractors Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies of initial schedule, large enough to e* show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests,and other required schedules and reports. I. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320- 1 w Pearl Realty Trust December-44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. so 5) Access. 6) Site utilization. 7) Temporary facilities and controls. 8) Work hours. 9) Hazards and risks. 10) Progress cleaning. 1 1) Quality and work standards. 12) Change Orders. 13) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to subcontractors, suppliers and other parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary,in narrative form, of progress. 4. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) on END OF SECTION Will �s ee PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 3 Pearl Realty Trust December44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. AM 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. - 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. on 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Staff Names: Within 7 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names,addresses,and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project Im 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS .m A. General: Schedule meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, .p of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. B. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present,including the following. 1) Sequence of operations. 2) Status of submittals. 3) Deliveries. 4) Off-site fabrication. ..� PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-2 ""' 0,w Pearl Realty Trust December--44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. so SECTION 013 10- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION go PART I - GENERAL •ft 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS "" A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ow 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to,the following 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division I Section "Execution Requirements' for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division I Section"Closeout Procedures"for coordinating Contract closeout. on 1.3 COORDINATION " A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. I. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on Installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service,and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures rrw with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: I. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310- 1 Pearl Realty Trust DecembeeA4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. S. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work PART 2 - PRODUCTS(Not Used) ON PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 4W END OF SECTION No go w PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-4 '"' Pearl Realty Trust Decembe�4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document, Contractor's Requisition, with updated Schedule of Values submitted on AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without ew action. I. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 4 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Initial Application for Payment Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following. 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list S. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. Copies of building permits. 8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 9. Performance and payment bonds. 10. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. I. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for on Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment: with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited,to the following: w� 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706,"Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." S. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." ° 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. ee ON PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290- 3 no Pearl Realty Trust December-44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. C. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor or d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator or e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers)that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest percent,adjusted to total 100 percent 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar,total shall equal the Contract Sum. S. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. „® a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in- place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense,at Contractor's option. 8. Schedule Updating. Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. I. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for w Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement Am PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-2 ow Pearl Realty Trust DecembeeA4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ,a. SECTION 01290- PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART I -GENERAL I.I RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. w 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division I Section"Contract Modification Procedures"for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract 2. Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements *■ governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to "" various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment Wx 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's gs Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. s 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290- 1 Pearl Realty Trust Decembee44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. I. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. �. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested,furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes,delivery charges,equipment rental,and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 5. Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. m 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES am A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. am PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Used) so PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION `~ CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-2 '""' on Pearl Realty Trust December-A4,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01250-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS " A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: e1 I. Division I Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving r adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. I. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to on substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment: rental, and amounts of trade discounts. C. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the on change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. on B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract. Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change. ,err CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&CompanyArchitects, Inc. C. Alternate No. Three: Delete all labor and materials as required to provide solid surface kitchen countertops as described in Specification Section 12356, Kitchen and Bathroom Casework In lieu of solid surface, furnish and install all labor and materials as required to provide plastic laminate kitchen countertops as described in Specification Section 12356. D. Alternate No. Four. Delete all labor and materials as required to provide plumbing fixtures in Staff Bath 102. Furnish and install all labor and materials as required to provide rough in piping to the future fixture locations only. E. Alternate No. Five: Provide all labor and materials as required to provide new wood strip flooring on 15 lb felt underlayment over existing wood subfloor in Bedrooms 201 and 203 in lieu of sheet vinyl flooring and underayment. Provide wood transition strips at transitions to different flooring materials and tapered wood thresholds to uneven adjacent flooring materials. Reference Specification Section 09640, Wood Flooring. F. Alternate No. Six: Provide all labor and materials as required to provide 5/8" gypsum board over existing plaster ceilings and paint Existing furred ceilings are to be removed prior to gypsum board installation. Reference Specification Section 09260, Gypsum Board Assemblies. END OF SECTION MW IM am ow so s Ift ALTERNATES 01230-2 Pearl Realty Trust Decergber 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. w SECTION 01230—ALTERNATES �• PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. «s. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment,systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. I. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 2. Contractor shall hold prices for Alternates for a period of three months following the Notice to Proceed. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. I. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. + ► B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. r C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.i SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No, One: Delete all labor and materials as required to provide plantings and plant beds at the front and left sides as indicated on Drawing L-110 and described under Specification Section 02300, Earthwork. B. Alternate No. Two: Delete all labor and materials as required to provide power and lighting to the garage as indicated on Drawing E-1. ALTERNATES 01230- 1 No Pearl Realty Trust Decembee44,2001 Dieu&Company Architects, Inc. • Provide manufacturer's shaft door with vision panel. e 3.6 INTERIOR RENOVATIONS • Remove fixtures,fittings, counters,cabinets and piping at kitchen and bathrooms. • Provide new fixtures and fittings at 4 new bathrooms,including new solid surface bathtub and shower solid surface surrounds and shower pans,cast iron bathtub,waterclosets and solid surface integral lavatory and counter with vanity cabinet below,plus bath accessories. • Provide new accessible bath,fixtures and fittings,with solid surface roll in shower/surround, ramp and floor drains,folding seat,grab bars and bath accessories. Provide kitchen cabinets and counters,with solid surface countertop and backsplash. 40 • Provide plastic laminate wall covering between kitchen counters and cabinets. Patch walls and ceilings to blend with and match existing. Provide adjustable shelves in closets. 40 • Provide one shelf and closet pole in bedroom closets • Provide wall cabinets and shelf in laundry. • Vent range hood vents. on • Provide bathroom exhaust fan vents through walls and roof. • Provide lights,fixtures, outlets as noted. 00 END OF SECTION tier +�w JIM so SCOPE OF WORK 01101 - 3 Peari Realty Trust DecembeeA 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. • New windows to match existing. • Replace gutters,downspouts and splashblocks and add at new roofs. • Raise rear deck level with first floor • Replace water line with new main for sprinklers • Patch wall sections and rebuilt exterior walls as needed at resized openings. • Paint exterior trim. • Rebuild two chimneys from roof deck • Clean up disturbed areas; provide topsoil and seed • Remove overgrown shrubs. • Provide new planting beds. 3.3 GENERAL INTERIOR • Raise sunroom and office floors level with first floor. • Paint all rooms inside:walls, ceilings,doors,trim. • Remove carpet and sheet vinyl flooring and underlayment throughout • Install stair lift. • Install vertical platform lift. • Provide new sheet vinyl flooring as noted. • Refinish existing wood floors. • Provide new interior doors and stud walls as indicated. • Replace all existing interior doors with new. ' • Provide new window and door casing to match existing. • Provide smoke and heat detectors, carbon monoxide and horn/strobes wired to new fire alarm panel. • Provide new water main out to street,water meter and back flow preventer * • Provide residential fire sprinkler system and fittings, tied into alarm system • Replace existing hot water heaters. • Remove abandoned boiler. • Provide all appliances. • Install new electric panel, remove old wiring. • Replace lighting fixtures as noted, remove sections of ceiling as necessary. • Provide telephone and data outlets and door bell system. 3.4 RENOVATIONS AT SIDE ENTRY AND RAMP • Excavate concrete pier locations, four feet deep. • Provide pressure treated wood framed ramp and porch and porch roof. +.. • Ramp and porch floor pressure treated decking. • Stairs: pressure treated treads • Ramp and porch railings: pressure treated wood posts,top and guard rails and balusters. • Handrails: Painted pipe top rail and intermediate rail attached to posts. • Asphalt shingle roof. • Gutters and downspouts. • Vented soffit 3.5 VERTICAL PLATFORM LIFT .• • Excavate pit for platform lift • Cut and reframe opening through wall for interior door to lift SCOPE OF WORK 01 101 - 2 ww Pearl Realty Trust Decemberl14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. uw SECTION 01 101 —SCOPE OF WORK PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes a general description of the Scope of Work for the Project B. Related Sections include the following. 1. Division I Section "Summary"for general information about the project, 2. Refer to Other Sections for specific requirements and technical requirements of the work described herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3 - EXECUTION ew 3.1 GENERAL +�* A. Contractor shall provide the Scope of Work as generally described herein. Provide all work required, whether mentioned herein, mentioned in the technical specification sections or indicated on the drawings. Refer to specific specifications for materials and methods to be utilized in the performance of the work 3.2 GENERAL EXTERIOR RENOVATIONS !mot • Replace front porch decking, framing and pier foundations, replace rotted decorative porch components to match existing. r • Remove existing metal bulkhead,stairs and interior doors. • Replace existing exterior doors. • Replace existing windows. 0 Remove existing rear porch, roof and stairs. • Add concrete grade beam and rigid insulation from existing pier to pier at sunroom exterior perimeter. • Regrade for concrete walk to entry ramp— remove existing walk • Regrade at new driveway addition, pave entire driveway,add accessible parking space. • Regrade and pave at entrance to vertical lift • Wooden entry ramp, stairs,porch, and roof at new accessible entry • Concrete pier foundations for ramp and side porch • New roof,siding and doors at vertical lift enclosure to match existing SCOPE OF WORK 01101 - 1 am Pearl Realty Trust December!44,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ow stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. ., 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so an noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are ap implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.6 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS PART 2- PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION END OF SECTION .A SUMMARY 01100-2 Pearl Realty Trust DecembelE-�14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 01 100-SUMMARY PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS "a A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 0-0 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Project consists of renovations to I. Project Location: 37 Franklin Street, Northampton, MA 2. Owner. Pearl Realty Trust B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated December 14, 2001, were prepared for Project by Dietz& Company Architects, Inc., 17 Hampden Street, Springfield, Massachusetts 01 103. C. The Work consists of interior and exterior renovations at the existing residence at37 Franklin Street, as further described in Division I Section SCOPE OF WORK. 1.3 CONTRACT on A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract 1.4 USE OF PREMISES 4 A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to ON perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project 1.5 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS �w A. Specification Format The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's"MasterFormat" numbering system. I. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the � intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: I. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not SUMMARY 01100- 1 Pearl Realty Trust December 1401 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. op ARTICLE 12:UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 Delete subparagraph 12.2.1 in its entirety and substitute the following. 12.2.1 The contractor shall promptly,but in all events within 10 days, correct all Work rejected by the Architect as defective or failing to conform to the Contract Documents whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,installed or completed.The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work, including compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary thereby, and any cost, loss, or damages to the owner resulting from such defect or failure. These obligations shall survive termination of the Contract under Article 14. am END OF SECTION on ww sm no 40 O. w� on ems! SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800- 5 aA Pearl Realty Trust December 14,3901 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 9-3.2 Add the following new subparagraphs 9.3.2.1 after paragraph 9.3.2-- 9.3.2.1 in no event will any materials and/or equipment be deemed delivered and suitably stored an or off the site unless in the judgement of the Architect,the following requirements are met: 9.3.2.1.1 The Contractor has used its best efforts to schedule delivery of materials so that they are ready for prompt use. 9.3.2.1.2 The Contractor shall adequately store and safeguard the materials and/or equipment until they are incorporated in the Work. The Contractor shall provide insurance certificates and lists of materials as required by the Funding Agency. OR Add the following new subparagraph 9.3.4 and 9.3.5 after 9.3.3: 9.3.4 In the event a lien is filed or Claimed against the Work by a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, laborer or supplier of materials, the Contractor agrees, unless covered by the lien bond required pursuant to subparagraph 9.10.2 hereof, immediately to bond such lien in accordance with the provisions of M.G.L. C254 or to cause such lien to be discharged. If the Contractor shall fail to do so, the Owner may, at the owner's option and at the expense of the Contractor, bond such lien or cause it to be discharged. 9.3.5 Unless the Contractor asserts in writing in an Application for Payment that an unpaid claim of a Subcontractor,laborer, or materialman is in dispute as to the amount owed,the Owner shall have the right to pay any such unpaid claim by check payable to the Contractor and the claiming party, and any such payment shall be a ' pro tanto discharge of the Owner's obligation to pay the Contractor hereunder. 9.8-1 Add the following at the end of subparagraph 9.8.1: and any remaining work is minor and can be completed within 30 days and will not interfere with the Owner's use and occupancy of the building. The Contractor shall secure and deliver to the Architect a certificate of occupancy as a condition precedent to Substantial Completion. Provided that the Contractor shall not be responsible for the non-issuance of a certificate of occupancy if, despite the Contractor's best efforts. such non-issuance is not due to the fault or omission of the Contractor. Compliance with the requirements of paragraph 13.5.4 shall be a condition precedent to substantial Completion. 9.10.1 Add the following sentence at the end of subparagraph 9.10.I: If the Architect finds the Work unacceptable, the Architect will prepare a final list of items to be completed or corrected ("punch list"). When such items are completed or corrected to the satisfaction of the Architect, the Architect shall promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment as provided above. A ARTICLE 11: INSURANCE AND BONDS 1 1.1.2 Add the following to the end of subparagraph 1 1.1.2: The insurance required by subparagraph 1 1.1.1 shall include all major divisions of coverage, and shall be on a comprehensive general basis including Premises and operations (including X-C-U), Owner's and Contractor's Protective, Products and Completed Operations,and Owned, Non-Owned,and Hired Motor Vehicles. In addition to the Comprehensive General Liability coverage required to be carried by the Contractor, the Contractor shall also Provide the owner with Certificate(s) of Insurance under a Blanket Excess Liability Policy. Said policy shall contain limits of coverage for Personal Injury and Property Damage in amounts not less than $ 5,000,000 per each occurrence,$ 5,000,000 aggregate and the Owner shall be added as a named insured thereon. SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800-4 +aur Pearl Realty Trust December 14,4001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. ARTICLE 4:ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT or Add new paragraphs 4.1.4 and 4.1.5 as follows: 4.1.4 The Owner and the Architect have acknowledged that nothing in the Architect's engagement implies any undertaking by the Architect for the benefit of or which may be enforced by the Contractor, its subcontractors,or the surety of any of them; it being understood that the Architect's obligations are to the Owner and that, in performing such obligations, the Architect may increase the burdens and expense of the Contractor, its subcontractors or the surety of any of them. 4.1.5 The Contractor agrees to execute a separate letter of agreement with the Architect which provides that (i) neither the Contractor, nor its subrogee or surety (collectively 'the Contractor'), will bring any civil suit,action or other proceeding in law,equity,or arbitration against the Architect or the officers,employees,agents,and servants of the Architect,for or on account of any cause of action which the Contractor may have arising out of or in any manner connected with the Project;and (ii) the Architect will not bring any civil suit,action or other proceeding in law, equity, or arbitration against: the Contractor or the officers, employees, agents, and servants of the Contractor, for or on account of any cause of action which the Architect may have arising out of or in any manner connected with the Project. ARTICLE 7: CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1.2 Add at the end of subparagraph 7.1.2: Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, the Contractor agrees that there shall be no Change Orders except (a) those specifically requested by the Owner, or (b) those approved for funding by the Funding Agency '" from available proceeds. 7.3.6 At the end of the first sentence,insert the following after"profit": As used in this subparagraph, a "reasonable allowance for overhead and profit" shall mean the following percentages: (a) overhead of 2% of the cost of the proposed change, and (b) profit at 6% of the cost of the proposed change. Add the following new subparagraph 7.4.2 after 7.4.1: 7.4.2 If the Contractor claims that any such instructions or orders whether oral,written, by drawings, or otherwise, involve extra cost or time,and such instructions or orders are not accompanied by a written acknowledgement by the Owner or Architect that extra payment will be made or time extended, the Contractor shall so notify the Architect within 5 working days promptly in writing and shall not proceed with the Work until the Contractor has received from the Architect a further written order to Proceed,except as provided in Paragraph 10.6 in the case of any emergency affecting life or property. No claim for extra cost or time on account of such instructions or orders shall be valid unless the Contractor has so notified the Architect and Owner before proceeding and has received a further written order to Proceed. ARTICLE 9: PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.3.1 Add the following new subparagraph 9.3.1.3 to paragraph 9.3.1: 9.3.1.3 Until Substantial Completion, the Owner will pay ninety percent(90%) olf the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. Any reductions in retainage shall be as approved by the Owner and the Funding Agency. Applications for payment shall be made as outlined in Section 01290 of the Project Manual, "Payment Procedures." SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800-3 Pearl Realty Trust December 14AW I Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall be furnished free of charge one set of prints and one set of reproducible copies of all Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor's cost of reproducing, for use by the Subcontractors, all copies of the Drawings and Specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work shall be included in the Contract Sum. ARTICLE 3: CONTRACTOR Add new subparagraph 3.2.4 after 3.2.3: 3.2.4 Prior to execution of the Contract,the Contractor has been given full access to the Work by the Owner for the purpose of examining the site and the existing conditions on the site. The Contractor represents that it has made a prudent investigation of the site in order to determine the reasonable existence and extent of usual concealed conditions on the site. Accordingly, the Contract Price includes such sums which the Contractor believes to be necessary to meet any such usual concealed conditions on the site. 3.6.1 Add the following sentence at the end of subparagraph 3.6.1: .. The Owner is exempt from payment of sales taxes. The Owner shall provide the contractor with the tax-exempt identification number at the signing of the contract �. Add new subparagraphs 3.10.4- 3.10.7 after 3.10.3 as follows: 3.10.4 The Contractor's schedules shall be based on an orderly progression of the Work, allowing adequate time for each operation, and leading to a reasonable certainty of Substantial Completion by the date established in the Agreement The schedules will be reviewed by the Architect for compliance with the requirements of this article and HUD and will be accepted by the Architect or returned to the Contractor for revision and re-submittal as with any Shop Drawing. 3.10.5 If there is any actual, anticipated or reasonably foreseeable delay from the approved schedules, the Contractor shall revise and reissue the schedules accordingly. 3.10.6 If the Architect, Owner, and the Funding Agency have determined that the Contractor should be permitted to extend the time for completion as provided in paragraph 8.3, the calendar dates in the schedules shall be adjusted accordingly to retain their same relationship to the adjusted date of Substantial Completion. 3,10.7 Nothing herein shall limit the Owner's right to liquidated or other damages for delays by the Contractor or ..� to any other remedy which the Owner may possess under other provisions of the Contract Documents or by law. 3.12.1 Delete subparagraph 3.12.1 in its entirety and substitute the following. 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams, illustrations,schedules, performance charts,and other data which are prepared by the Contractor, manufacturer,Supplier, or distributor,and which illustrate some portion of the Work- Printed brochures will not be accepted as a substitute for shop drawings,although they may be required separately " or in addition to shop drawings. Shop drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor in the form described in Section 01 330 of the Project Manual, "Submittal Procedures". Each submittal shall he accompanied by a transmittal form describing the submittal. Approval of shop drawings by the Architect and/or engineer is for general conformance to the Contract Documents and does not represent approval of dimensions,quantities, or methods of installation. The Contract Documents remain the controlling factor in case of disputes over installed items or work, and the Contractor shall replace any item or work which does not conform to the Contract Documents at the Contractor's own expense. SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800-2 w. Pearl Realty Trust December K-2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SECTION 00800-SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS The following supplements modify, delete and/or add to the General Conditions (AIA Document A201, 1997 Edition). Where any article, paragraph or sub-paragraph in the General Conditions is supplemented, amended, voided, or superseded by any of the following paragraphs, the provisions of such article, paragraph, or sub- paragraph not so supplemented,amended,voided,or superseded shall remain in effect. ARTICLE I: GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1.2 Change the fourth sentence of subparagraph 1.1.2 to read: Except as provided in Paragraph 3.18, nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall be construed to create any contractual relationship (1) between the Architect and the Contractor, (2) between the Owner or the Architect and any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner sand the Architect, or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. aw 1.2.1 Add the following sentence to the end of subparagraph 1.2.I: All work mentioned or indicated in the Contract Documents shall be performed by the contractor as part of this Contract unless it is specifically indicated in the Contract Documents that such work is to be done by others. Should the Drawings or the Specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, the contractor shall request Orr written clarification from the Architect pursuant to paragraph 4.2.1. Add new subparagraphs 1.2.4 through 1.2.6 as follows: 1.2.4 All manufactured articles, materials, and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with the manufacturer's written or printed directions and instructions unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 1.2.5 The Mechanical, Electrical and Fire Protection Drawings are diagrammatic only,and are not intended to show the alignment, physical locations or configurations of such Work. Such Work shall be installed without additional cost to the Owner to clear all obstructions,permit proper clearances for the Work of other trades.and present an orderly appearance where exposed. Prior to beginning such Work, the Contractor shall prepare coordination drawings showing the exact alignment, physical location and configuration of the Mechanical, Electrical and Fire Protection installations and demonstrating to the Architect's and Contractor's satisfaction that the installations will "11111 comply with the preceding sentence. Exact locations of fixtures and outlets shall be obtained from the Architect as Provided in paragraph 3.12 and 1110 subparagraph 4.2.1 before the work is roughed in; defective work installed without such information from the Architect shall be relocated at the Contractor's expense. ARTICLE 2: OWNER 2.2.3 Add the following sentence at the end of subparagraph 2.2.3: The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor any information available to the Owner concerning the location of utilities on the project site.The Contractor is solely responsible for identifying and verifying the precise locations of utilities on the project site. 2.2.5 Delete subparagraph 2.2.5 in its entirety and substitute the following: SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800- 1 am rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery .. thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4;and r■ .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. ' 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1,the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. wo 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. ■o 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension,delay or interruption as described in Subparagraph 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be WN made to the extent: .1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or "* .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. so 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall: .� .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work;and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work e.. executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. ,w AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#40 ,,,,� act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner.,whichever occurs last. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,for any of the following reasons: .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which requires all Work to be stopped; .2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to be stopped; .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a a� Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions,delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period,whichever is less. 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Subparagraph 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages. 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.3. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; a .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1991 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMFRICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying wlatc�, u S copy right laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#39 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, .. rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. ww 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable *■ to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner's expense. 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable,at the normal place of testing. 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. 13.6 INTEREST 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as *■ the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD ow 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring �nbsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment;and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause .. of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under Paragraph 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE %%IfRK AN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK .AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying -latcs l S cop right lass and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201-CON-- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#38 .. 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Paragraph 12.2. 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the ON Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves,their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to PIN the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Subparagraph 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. 13.2.2 The Owner may,without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an :institutional lender providing construction financing for the Project. In such event, the lender shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 1013241,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#37 agreement as the parties in interest may reach,or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.6. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. 11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved as provided in Paragraphs 4.5 and 4.6.The Owner as fiduciary shall, in the case of arbitration,make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators. If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required,the arbitrators will direct such distribution. ON 11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. 11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of .. obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. .m ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK MW 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. �.. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,shall be at the Contractor's expense. 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the ri�,hts to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 12/29/2001 -- Page#36 no Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or go reduction of insurance. 11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance.The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by to the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner;this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors-and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. an 11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance.The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards,however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. 11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of ss loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. 11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both,at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 11.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other s. causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.4. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the ! " Contractor. 11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors,agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated *m herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification,contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 1 1.4.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying iolates U.S copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324.,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page 435 ow a" Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. „w 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. �wr 11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project Management Protective Liability insurance from the Contractor's usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's, Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction operations under the Contract. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner. The minimum limits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under Clauses 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5. 11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance, the Owner, Contractor and .. Architect waive all rights against each other for damages, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance. The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. aw 11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner, Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Paragraph 11.1. wr 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's risk "all-risk" or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11.4 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project. 0% 11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage)and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and .m debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. 11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and ., Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. �w 11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles,the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. 11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site,and also portions of the Work in transit. 11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The a AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#34 �,,, M 10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Paragraph 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents. 10.5 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. 10.6 EMERGENCIES 10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss.Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE w� 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, 40 or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: .1 claims under workers'compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable 40 to the Work to be performed; .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or, disease, or death of the Contractor's ON employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself,because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; .7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and r� .8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.L I shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages., whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying ON violates U.S. cop right laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON-- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#33 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage,injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. ! 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the .A Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3,except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by .� anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. 10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present,to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall famish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The �.. Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Subparagraph 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease "■" or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) and provided that such damage, loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LCON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 -- Page#32 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'prior written notice has ," been given to the Owner, (3)a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as may be designated 40 liens, the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all ow costs and reasonable attorneys'fees. 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment,except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from: eo .1 liens,Claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;or go .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims go by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. O ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in WA connection with the performance of the Contract. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: on .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors;and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. stw AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTI1I1 FE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below, Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LCON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 -- Page#31 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or ., corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list,which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case,the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion,shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the ..� Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 4s 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that ow is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such .s portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Clause 11.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete,provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments,retainage, if any,security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor .� shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final 1ppltcatton for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable undct the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment ,tating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. MR \1 1)(M AII_NI A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE \%II RK AN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying wlate, U S copy right laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be ' 1n,,0u,cd k%ithout iolation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 l Iser Document: 97A201.CON-- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#30 ,,� PR .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; tw .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;or ww .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously go withheld. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall mate payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify the Architect. 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions + * of the Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for w those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor,shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT +m 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration,then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Wort. until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its 0* intended use. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying ads violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LCON -- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#29 delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures .� satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance,storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall,to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor,for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that,to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief,the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(1)made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Subparagraph 3.3.2,because of: so .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third parry claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable .. to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor,materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying we violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 -- Page#28 ,,,, Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. I 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. iw Unless the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages,mechanic's liens and other security interests. go 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. ow 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect,or of an employee of either,or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner,or by changes ordered in the Work, go or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control,or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. on 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraph 4.3. ON 8.3.3 This Paragraph 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either parry under other provisions of the Contract Documents. go ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required,and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for in the on Contract Documents. 9.3.1.1 As provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying +s violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#27 Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: .1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom,and workers'compensation insurance; .2 costs of materials,supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation,whether incorporated or consumed; +� .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use or similar taxes related to the Work;and �* .5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. 7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any,with respect to that change. 7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties' agreement with part or all of such costs. For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute, the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs. That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4. 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. WN ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. so 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. 8.1.4 The term "day"as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. ow 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced"ithout violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LCON -- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#26 ,, Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS go 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 change in the Work; No .2 the amount of the adjustment,if any, in the Contract Sum;and .3 the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time. 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The on Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; tew .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;or .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work "a involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum,a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page 425 Aw Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Paragraph 4.3. 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, .�. the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor �. with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them.The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate contractors and the Other until subsequently revised. 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to ■■ the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. am 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities,and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner .. or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or .� partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. 6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Subparagraph 3.14. no 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may am clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK up 7.1 GENERAL 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this MW Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change on AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying +iolates U S copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LCON -- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#24 „�, the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect,after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply Iw promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable 4W and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the to substitute Subcontractor's Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. No 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of wa the Subcontractor's Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall an allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of *" the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor,identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such. documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Paragraph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor Ir in writing;and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any,obligated under bond relating to the Contract. am 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. �w ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. if the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner,the AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying on violates U.S. copyright laves and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20 LCON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#23 settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4.6 ARBITRATION .� 4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5,shall,after decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to arbitration. Prior to arbitration,the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by mediation in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 4.5. 4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association,and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. 4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Subparagraphs 4.4.6 and 4.6.1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7. 4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,parties other than the Owner, Contractor,a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question * of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. No person or entity other than the Owner, Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therein. The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. •+ 4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. 4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. no ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)proposed for each principal portion of AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201-CON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 -- Page#22 .. M and persons or entities other than the Owner. nw 4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3)approve the Claim, (4)suggest a compromise, or(5)advise the parties that the Architect 9W is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that, in the Architect's sole discretion,it would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim. 4.4.3 In evaluating Claims,the Architect may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either parry WX or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering a decision. The Architect may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. t 4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data, advise the Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no supporting data will ,tr be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. 4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons therefor and which shall an notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The ,approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. w 4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that(1)the decision is final but subject to mediation and arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision,then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days'period shall result on in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. *a 4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter, the Architect or the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default, the Architect or the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving on the controversy. 4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the parry asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance on with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect, by mediation or by arbitration. 4.5 MEDIATION go 4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall, after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable proceedings by either party. 4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but, in such event,mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 go days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. 4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#21 MW such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision. If the conditions encountered are materially different, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect O. for initial determination,subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph 4.4. 4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work.Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Paragraph 10.6. 4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to(1)a written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5)termination of the Contract by the Owner,(6)Owner's suspension or(7)other reasonable grounds,Claim shall be filed in accordance with this Paragraph 4.3. • 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time 4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. 4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time,could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. 4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. 4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such ""' unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 00 4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes: .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and w reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons;and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed .a there, for losses of financing, business and reputation,and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Subparagraph 4.3.10 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. No 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under Paragraphs 10.3 through 10.5, shall be referred initially to the Architect for decision. An initial decision by the Architect shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation, arbitration or litigation of all Claims between the Contractor and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the Architect. The Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor am AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON -- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#20 ,a,e me 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final ON completion,will receive and forward to the Owner,for the Owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. """ 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in �e writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2,then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. ee�u 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and initial decisions, 4M the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. tw 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or an relating to the Contract. Claims must be initiated by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either parry must be initiated within 21 clays after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim,whichever is later. Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other parry. 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Subparagraph 9.7.1 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or(2)unknown w physical conditions of an unusual nature,which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, a* the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying W violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 ll User Document: 97A201.CON -- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#19 o 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated,the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect. 4.2 ARCHITECTS ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be an Owner's representative(1)during construction,(2)until final payment is due and(3)with the Owner's concurrence,from time to time during the one-year period for correction of Work described in Paragraph 12.2. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. 4.2.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner,will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's operations(1)to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of ..� the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and (3)to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Subparagraph 3.3.1. 4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for e acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review and certify ..► the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in .. accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop .. Drawings. Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the A. purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S copyright lases and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201-CON-- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 -- Page#18 ,�„ no shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably go withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 3.15 CLEANING UP ar! 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery and surplus materials. No 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. o 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be on responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design,process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, al process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. O. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 11.3,the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and 40 against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys.' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the 00 negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of ww. indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,the indemnification !! obligation under Subparagraph 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT on 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. go 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be w0 unreasonably withheld. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying '40 violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON-- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page 417 such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. .� 3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or .® will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and(1)the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written on notice the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means,methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, .o specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, .w accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Subparagraph 3.12.10,the Architect will review,approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. w 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. no 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. �w 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor ■® AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be ow reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#16 ,.,,, go .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.2. 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work. 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work.The superintendent shall represent the Contractor,and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES „ 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the condlitions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents,and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is wr coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction, and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor. Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which tiu the Work will be judged. 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way b,, which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop w. Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 199'7 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 40 User Document: 97A201.CON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#15 ow AM 3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not *� executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. Im 3.6 TAXES 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into ' effect. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances,rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner,the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. MW 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall .w not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: ,m .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; tm .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; , , AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE \\IFRICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying wlates US copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with p permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#14 , WA either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract,or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. we 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor shall rW carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work,as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in ow the Contract Documents; however, any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. 4W 3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect, but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is not required to ascertain that so the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations, but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. 3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the ON Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.6 and 4.3.7. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency, omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall so be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and,except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods,techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, go equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. no AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 10 1324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#13 AM 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 The Owner shall,at the written request of the Contractor,prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the 0* Contract. Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work. After such evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. wo 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees, including those required under Subparagraph 3.7.1, which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. 2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness. Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services. so 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. WX 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. .. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within ow a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period. If the Contractor within such three-day period after receipt of such second .. notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. so ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 GENERAL 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The tetra "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents ow AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK .AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying � violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced«ithout violation until the date of expiration as noted below Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#12 .�. str 1.3 CAPITALIZATION e 1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. 1.4 INTERPRETATION 1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents,the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request. �. 1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site,become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE 1.6.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The auw Contractor may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyrights. All copies of Instruments of Service,except the Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect,on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect's consultants. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants'copyrights or other reserved rights. am ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 GENERAL so 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Subparagraph 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary > and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein. +te* AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 -- Page 4 11 AM ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .. The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract(General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications,Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1)a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties,(2)a Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders,sample forms,the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements) . 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Contractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and Architect or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall,however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractors. 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work,generally including plans, elevations, sections,details, schedules and diagrams. 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. Im 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. me 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the no Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all: performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. No 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. am 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. ®. AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with Y P permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201.CON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#10 .,, 13.4.2 4.3.7.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor Work,Definition of NO 4.3.10,9.10.5, 11.4.7, 13.4.2 1.1.3 Waiver of Claims by the Owner Written Consent 4.3.10, 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 11.4.3, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 12.2.2.1, 1.6, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.6.4, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, so 13.4.2, 14.2.4 9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 Waiver of Consequential Damages Written Interpretations 4.3.10, 14.2.4 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Waiver of Liens Written Notice go 9.10.2,9.10.4 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.3, 4.4.8, 4.6.5, 5.2.1, Waivers of Subrogation 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7 13.3, 14 M Warranty Written Orders 3.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.5.3, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.6, 7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 13.7.1.3 14.3.1 t� Weather Delays t +�w a AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying t•s violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#9 ow- WX Site Visits,Architect's 9.10.2,9.10.3 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 Surveys Special Inspections and Testing 2.2.3 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Specifications, Definition of the 14.4 1.1.6 Suspension of the Work Specifications,The 5.4.2, 14.3 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.2.2, 1.6,3.11,3.12.10,3.17 Suspension or Termination of the Contract Statute of Limitations 4.3.6,5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 Taxes *' Stopping the Work 3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.6.4 2.3,4.3.6,9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Termination by the Contractor Stored Materials 4.3.10, 14.1 .. 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11.4.1.4 Termination by the Owner for Cause Subcontractor, Definition of 4.3.10,5.4.1.1,14.2 5.1.1 Termination of the Architect SUBCONTRACTORS 4.1.3 5 Termination of the Contractor Subcontractors, Work by 14,2,2 1.2.2,3.3.2, 3.12.1,4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6.7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT Subcontractual Relations 14 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10 10.2.1, 11.4.7, 11.4.8, 14.1, Tests and Inspections 14.2.1, 14.3.2 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, Submittals 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1,13.5 1.6, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, TIME 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3 g Subrogation, Waivers of Time,Delays and Extensions of 6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7 3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4.1, Substantial Completion 7.5.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.4.2, Time Limits 12.2, 13.7 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, Substantial Completion, Definition of 4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6, 5.2, 5.3,5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3,7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1, 9.8.1 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, �. Substitution of Subcontractors 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Time Limits on Claims Substitution of Architect 4.3.2,4.3.4,4.3.8,4.4,4.5,4.6 4.1.3 Title to Work Substitutions of Materials 9.3.2,9.3.3 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 7.3.7 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK Sub-subcontractor, Definition of 12 5.1.2 Uncovering of Work Subsurface Conditions 12.1 4.3.4 Unforeseen Conditions .. Successors and Assigns 4.3.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 13.2 Unit Prices Superintendent 4.3.9, 7.3.3.2 3.9, 10.2.6 Use of Documents ..® Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.1.1, 1.6,2.2.5,3.12.6, 5.3 1.2.2. 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3,6.2.4, Use of Site 7.1.3, 7.3.6. 8.2. 8.3.1,9.4.2, 10, 12, 14 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Surety Values, Schedule of 4.4.7, 5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2 9.2,9.3.1 Surety,Consent of Waiver of Claims by the Architect AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA • COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be rw reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A201-CON -- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#8 .,, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.10.1, 9.10.2 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Representations Atw Payment,Failure of 1.5.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 4.3.6,9.5.1.3, 9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 9.10.1 Payment,Final Representatives aw 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 11.4.5, 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2, 13.2.1 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Resolution of Claims and Disputes Payment Bond,Performance Bond and 4.4,4.5,4.6 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 Responsibility for Those;Performing the Work Payments, Progress 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 10 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 Retainage PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,19.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 9 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Payments to Subcontractors Contractor 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3,9.6.2,9.6.3,9.6.4,9.6.7, 11.4.8, 14.2.1.2 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,3.12.7,6.1.3 �. PCB Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect 10.3.1 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 Performance Bond and Payment Bond Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 Contractor Permits, Fees and Notices 3.12 2.2.2,3.7,3.13, 7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 Rights and Remedies PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 4.3.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.3, 5.4, am 10 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, Polychlorinated Biphenyl 13.4, 14 10.3.1 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights Product Data, Definition of 3.17 3.12.2 Rules and Notices for Arbitration Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 4.6.2 3.11, 3.12,4.2.7 Safety of Persons and Property Progress and Completion 10.2, 10.6 4.2.2,4.3.3, 8.2,9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4 Safety Precautions and]Programs Progress Payments 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3.1,10.1, 10.2, 10.6 4.3.3,9.3,9.6, 9.8.5,9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3 Samples, Definition of Project, Definition of the 3.12.3 I 1 4 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Project Management Protective Liability Insurance 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 1 1 3 Samples at the Site,Documents and Project Manual, Definition of the 3.11 1.1.7 Schedule of Values Project Manuals 9.2,9.3.1 2.2.5 Schedules,Construction Project Representatives 1.4.1.2,3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2,4.3.7.2, 6.1.3 4.2.10 Separate Contracts and Contractors Property Insurance 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 4.6.4, 6, 8.3.1, 11.4.7, 10.2.5. 11.4 12.1.2, 12.2.5 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Shop Drawings, Definition of t 10 3.12.1 Regulations and Laws Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 1.6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6, 9.6.4, 3.11,3.1 2,4.2.7 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 1 1.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 Site,Use of Rejection of Work 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.2.1 Site Inspections Releases and Waivers of Liens 1.2.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.3, 3.7.1,4.2,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.10.1, 13.5 AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 ON User Document: 97A201.CON-- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#7 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, Occupancy 4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6, 5.2,5.3, 5.4,6.2.4, 7.3,7.4, 8.2,9.2,9.3.1, 2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8, 11.4.1.5 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, Orders, Written 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 4.3.6, 7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, Loss of Use Insurance 14.3.1 11.4.3 OWNER Material Suppliers 2 'M 1.6,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6, 5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.6,9.10.5 Owner,Definition of Materials, Hazardous 2.1 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5 Owner, Information and Services Required of the Materials, Labor, Equipment and 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 43.3, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.6.1, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.23, 3.12, 3.13, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 Owner's Authority Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of 1.6, 2.1.1, 2.3,2.4, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2,4.1.2,4.1.3, Construction 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 4.3.6, 4.4.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, ow 3.3.1, 3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, Mechanic's Lien 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.4.3, 11.4.10, 12.2.2, 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 4.4.8 14.4 Mediation Owner's Financial Capability .o 4.4.1,4.4.5,4.4.6,4.4.8,4.5,4.6.1,4.6.2, 8.3.1, 10.5 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 Minor Changes in the Work Owner's Liability Insurance 1.1.1, 3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.6, 7.1, 7.4 11.2 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner's Loss of Use Insurance 13 11.4.3 Modifications, Definition of Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.1 1.1.2, 5.2,5.3,5.4,9.6.4,9.10.2, 14.2.2 .� Modifications to the Contract Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.7.3, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, 2.4, 12.2.4. 14.2.2.2 10.3.2, 11.4.1 Owner's Right to Clean Up ++ Mutual Responsibility 6.3 6.2 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of Contracts 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 6.1 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of Owner's Right to Stop the Work 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1.4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1,9.8.2, 9.9.3,9.10.4, 12.2.1, 2.3 13.7.1.3 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work Notice 14.3 2.2.1. 2.3, 2.4, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.9, 4.3, 4.4.8, Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 4.6.5, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 14.2 12.2.4, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Notice, Written Instruments of Service 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.3, 4.4.8, 4.6.5, 5.2.1, 1.1.1, 1.6,2.2.5, 3.2.1,3.11.1, 3.17.1,4.2.12,5.3 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, Partial Occupancy or Use 13.3, 14 9.6.6, 9.9, 11.4.1.5 Notice of Testing and Inspections Patching,Cutting and 13.5.I. 13.5.2 3.14,6.2.5 go Notice to Proceed Patents 8.2.2 3.17 Notices, Permits, Fees and Payment, Applications for o. 2.2.2. 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.6.4, 10.2.2 4.2.5, 7.3.8, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7.1, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, Observations, Contractor's 9.10.3, 9.10.5, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 1.5.2.3.2, 3.7.3,4.3.4 Payment,Certificates for AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date ofexpiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 -- Page#6 W 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 11.4.2 Equipment,Labor,Materials and Insurance,Contractor's Liability ON 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.3,3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,4.2.6, 11.1 4.2.7, 5.2.1,6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, Insurance,Effective Date of 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 8.2.2, 11.1.2 Execution and Progress of the Work Insurance,Loss of Use 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.7, 3.10, 11.4.3 3.12, 3.14, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.3.3, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 9.5, Insurance,Owner's Liability 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3 11.2 on Extensions of Time Insurance,Project Management Protective Liability 3.2.3, 4.3.1,4.3.4, 4.3.7,4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4.1, 9.5.1, 11.3 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 Insurance,Property on Failure of Payment 10.2.5, 11.4 43.6,9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6 Insurance, Stored Materials Faulty Work 9.3.2, 11.4.1.4 vp (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) INSURANCE AND BONDS Final Completion and Final Payment 11 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 4.3.2, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 11.4.5, Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy 12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 9.9.1, 11.4.1.5 00 Financial Arrangements,Owner's Insurance Companies, Settlement with 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.5 11.4.10 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Intent of the Contract Documents on 11.4 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13, 7.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS Interest 1 13.6 Governing Law Interpretation 13.1 1.2.3, 1.4,4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1, 6.1.2, 8.1.4 Guarantees(See Warranty) Interpretations, Written Hazardous Materials 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6, ! 10.2.4, 10.3, 10.5 Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required Identification of Contract Documents 4.6.4 1.5.1 Judgment on Final Award Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 4.6.6 5.2.1 Labor and Materials, Equipment Indemnification 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.:5.1,3.8.2, 3.8.3,3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,42.6, 3.17, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.5, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.7 4.2.7, 5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, Information and Services Required of the Owner 10.2.4, 14.2.1.2 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 4.3.3, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, Labor Disputes 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 8.3.1 ow 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4 Laws and Regulations Injury or Damage to Person or Property 1.6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6,9.6.4, 4.3.8, 10.2, 10.6 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14 Inspections Liens 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 2.1.2,4.4.8, 8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 122.1, 13.5 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder Instructions to Bidders 4.6.4 1.1.1 Limitations, Statutes of Instructions to the Contractor 4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.8.1,4.2.8, 5.2.1, 7, 12, 8.2.2, 13.5.2 Limitations of Liability Insurance 2.3, 3.2.1, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18,4.2.6, 3.18.1,6.1.1, 7.3.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.2,9.8.4, 9.9.1,9.10.2, 9.10.5, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 11 10.2.5, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.4.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery Limitations of Time .NIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON,D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying iolates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON -- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#5 3.1,6.1.2 2.4, 3.2.3, 3.7.4, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 4.3, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, Contractor's Construction Schedules 7.3.3.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.5, 11.3, 11.4, 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 12.1, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14 ..� Contractor's Employees Cutting and Patching 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 6.2.5,3.14 11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1, Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors Contractor's Liability Insurance 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 9.2.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.1, 11.4, 11.1 12.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner's Damage to the Work Forces 3.14.2,9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.4, 12.2.4 3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6, 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 Damages,Claims for Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors 3.2.3, 3.18, 4.3.10, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4 no 11.4.7, 11.4.8 Damages for Delay Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 6.1.1, 8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7, 10.3.2 1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.4.2,3.5.1, 3.7.3, Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of .� 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 8.1.2 4.4.7, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, .5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5 8.1.3 Contractor's Representations Day,Definition of 1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2, 8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 8.1.4 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work Decisions of the Architect 3.3.2, 3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8, 5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 10 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.5, 4.4.6, aw Contractor's Review of Contract Documents 4.5,6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 1.5.2,3.2, 3.7.3 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.7 9.4.1,9.5,9.7, 14.1.1.3 .� Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and 4.3.10, 14.1 Correction of Contractor's Submittals 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.1.3 9.8.3,9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.5.2 Defective Work,Definition of Contractor's Superintendent 3.5.1 3.9, 10.2.6 Definitions Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1, 3.5.1, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1,4.3.1, 5.1, 122, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3, 6.1.3,6.2.4, 7.1.3, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.3.6, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14 Delays and Extensions of Time .� Contractual Liability Insurance 3.2.3, 4.3.1, 4.3.4, 4.3.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4.1, 11.1.1.8, 1 1.2, 11.3 7.5.1,8.3,9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 10.6.1, 14.3.2 Coordination and Correlation Disputes 1 2, 1.5.13.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3,6.2.1 4.1.4,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6, 6.3, 7.3.8 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications Documents and Samples at the Site 1.6,2.2.5, 3.11 3.11 Copyrights Drawings, Definition of 1.6, 3.17 1.1.5 Correction of Work Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 23, 2.4, 3.7.4, 4.2.1, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 1.1.1, 1.3,2.2.5,3.11, 5.3 13.7.1.3 Effective Date of Insurance Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 8.2.2, 11.1.2 1.2 Emergencies Cost, Definition of 4.3.5, 10.6, 14.1.1.2 7.3.6 Employees,Contractor's Costs 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying r violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-i997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 -- Page#4 1.3 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.4.2, Certificate of Substantial Completion 12.2, 13.7 w� 9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 Compliance with Laws Certificates for Payment 1.6.1, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6.4,4.6.6, 4.2.5, 4,2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.10.1, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, tie 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3 Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval Concealed or Unknown Conditions 13.5.4 4.3.4,8.3.1, 10.3 Certificates of Insurance Conditions of the Contract 9.10.2, 11.1.3 1.1.1, 1.1.7,6.1.1,6.1.4 Change Orders Consent,Written 1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.8.2.3, 3.11.1, 3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.4,4.3.9, 1.6, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.6.4, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, +!w 5.2.3, 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 83.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 11.4.1.2, 11.4.4, 9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2 11.4.9, 12.1.2 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE Change Orders, Definition of CONTRACTORS .. 7.2.1 1.1.4,6 CHANGES IN THE WORK Construction Change Directive,Definition of 3.11,4.2.8,7, 8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 11.4.9 7.3.1 Claim,Definition of Construction Change Directives 1011" 4.3.1 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8.,4.3.9,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1 Claims and Disputes Construction Schedules,Contractor's 3.2.3,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.1.1, 6.3,7.3.8, 9.3.3,9.10.4, 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 w 10.3.3 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 5.4, 14.2.2.2 4.6.5 Continuing Contract Performance Claims for Additional Cost 4.3.3 3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1,7.3.8, 103.2 Contract, Definition of Claims for Additional Time 1.1.2 32.3,4.3.4,4.3.7, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2 CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14 4.3.4 Contract Administration. Claims for Damages 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 32.3, 3.18, 4.3.10, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating to 11.4.5, 11.4.7. 14.1.3, 142.4 3.7.1,3.10, 5.2,6.1, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 11.5.1 Claims Subject to Arbitration Contract Documents,The 4.4.1,4.5.1,4.6.1 1.1, 1.2 Cleaning p g U Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of 3.15, 6.3 1.6,2.2.5,5.3 Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period Contract Documents, Definition of 13.7 1.1.1 Commencement of the Work. Conditions Relating to Contract Sum 2.2.1, 3.2.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 4.3.5, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 3.8, 4.3.4, 4.3.5, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2, 6.2.2, 8.12, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 1 1.1, 11.4.1, 11.4.6, 11.5.1 9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2 Commencement of the Work, Definition of Contract Sum,Definition of 8.1.2 9.1 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration Contract Time 3.9.1, 4.2.4 4.3.4, 43.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2, 8.3.1, Completion,Conditions Relating to 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2 1.6.1, 3.4.1, 3.1 1, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8,9.9.1, Contract Time,Definition of 9.10. 12 2, 13.7, 14.1.2 8.1.1 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND CONTRACTOR 9 3 Completion, Substantial Contractor, Definition of AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#3 ow INDEX Architect's Administration of the Contract Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 3.1.3,4.2,4.3.4,4.4,9.4,9.5 9.6.6,9.9.3, 12.3 Architect's Approvals MW Acceptance of Work 2.4,3.1.3,3.5.1,3.10.2,4.2.7 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.3 Architect's Authority to Reject Work Access to Work 3.5.1,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 OF 3.16,6.2.1, 12.1 Architect's Copyright Accident Prevention 1.6 4.2.3, 10 Architect's Decisions Acts and Omissions 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.5,4.4.6, we 3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.3.8, 4.4.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 4.5,6.3, 7.3.6,7.3.8, 8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 10.2.5, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4 Addenda Architect's Inspections .® 1.1.1,3.11 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 Additional Costs,Claims for Architect's Instructions 4.3.4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1.1, 10.3 3.2.3,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8,7.4.1, 12.1, 13.5.2 Additional Inspections and Testing Architect's Interpretations 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Additional Time,Claims for Architect's Project Representative 4.3.4,4.3.7, 8.3.2 4.2.10 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Architect's Relationship with Contractor 3.1.3,4, 9.4,9.5 1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.3, Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, a 1.1.1 4.4.7, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, Aesthetic Effect 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.4.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5 4.2.13,4.5.1 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors Allowances 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.4.7 3.8 Architect's Representations All-risk Insurance 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 11.4.1.1 Architect's Site Visits Applications for Payment 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2, 9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.5 4.2.5, 7.3.8, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7.1, 9.8.5, 9.10, Asbestos 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 10.3.1 Approvals Attorneys'Fees 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 3.12,4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.2, 13.5 3.18.1,9.10.2, 10.3.3 Arbitration Award of Separate Contracts 4.3.3,4.4,4.5.1, 4.5.2, 4.6, 8.3.1,9.7.1, 11.4.9, 11.4.10 6.1.1,6.1.2 Architect Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the 4.1 Work Architect, Definition of 5,2 4.1.1 Basic Definitions Architect, Extent of Authoritv 1.1 2.4, 3.12.7, 4.2. 4.3.6, 4.4, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.6, 7.4,9.2, Bidding Requirements 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.1, 1.1.1, 1.1.7, 5.2.1, 11.5.1 13.5.2 14.2.2. 14.2.4 Boiler and Machinery Insurance Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 11.4.2 2.1.1. 3.3.3, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1,4.2.2, Bonds,Lien 4.2.3. 4.2.6. 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.4, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.10.2 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.6 Bonds, Performance,and Payment Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5 *� 2.4, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4 Building Permit 3.7.1 Capitalization AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying w violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#2 tW go # General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201 - 1997 1997 Edition - Electronic Format This document has important legal consequences.Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.AUTHENTICATION !N OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT I)401. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. imm Copyright 1911. 1915. 1918. 1925. 1937. 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966. 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987,®1997 by The,American Institute of Architects.Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the A1A violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. OWNER 3. CONTRACTOR +!! 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 5. SUBCONTRACTORS �w 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK 8. TIME 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS +wr 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT t� AIA DOCUMENT A201-GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W., WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A201-1997 User Document: 97A20LCON -- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#1 8.1.6 The Addenda,if any,are as follows: Number Date Pages Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 8. 8.1.7 Other documents, if any,forming part of the Contract Documents are as follows: 40 (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents.ALA Document A201-1997 provides that bidding requirements such as advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms and the Contractor's bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. They should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.) w` This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least three original copies, of which one is to be delivered to the Contractor, one to the Architect for use in the administration of the Contract, and the remainder to the Owner. g OWNER(Signature) CONTRACTOR(Signature) 00 on (Printed name and title) (Printed name and title) M op e �M 111N fill AIA DOCUMENT A101 -OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W..WASHINGTON.D.C.20006-5292, WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and %kill subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A101-1997 User Document:TEST.DOC-- 12/5/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#5 ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 6.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201-1997. 6.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201-1997. ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201-1997 or another Contract Document,the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.) (Usury lams and requirements under the Federal Truth in Lending Act,similar state and local consumer credit laws and other regulations at the Owner's and Contractor's principal places of business, the location of the Project and elsewhere may affect the validity of this provision. Legal advice should be obtained rrrM with respect to deletions or modifications,and also regarding requirements such as written disclosures or waivers.) 7.3 The Owner's representative is: (Name,address and other information) 7.4 The Contractor's representative is: .ra (Name,address and other information) 7.5 Neither the Owner's nor the Contractor's representative shall be changed without ten days written notice to the other party. •* 7.6 Other provisions: go ARTICLE 8 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 8.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement,are enumerated as follows: 8.1.1 The Agreement is this executed 1997 edition of the Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, AIA Document A 10 1-1997. no 8.1.2 The General Conditions are the 1997 edition of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201-1997. 8.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated , and are as no follows: Document Title Pages No 8.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Subparagraph 8.1.3, and are as follows: (Either list the Spec{cations here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) No Section Title Pages 8.1.5 The Drawings are as follows,and are dated unless a different date is shown below: .. (Either list the Drau ings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.) Number Title Date AIA DOCUMENT A101 -OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W..WASHINGTON,D.C.20006-5292. WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until ww the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A I O l-1997 User Document: TEST.DOC-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324, which expires on 12/29/2001 -- Page#4 �, 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. 5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: w .1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed 'Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the q" Work in the schedule of values, less retainage of percent( %). Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute shall be included as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8 of AIA Document A201-1997; Aw .2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing),less retainage of percent es. .3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner;and .4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5 of AIA Document A201-1997. 5.1.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Subparagraph 5.1.6 shall be further modified under the following circumstances: .1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to the full amount of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for incomplete Work, retainage applicable to such work and unsettled claims; and (Subparagraph 9.8.5 of AIA Document A201-1997 requires release of applicable retainage upon Substantial Completion of Work with consent of surety, if any.) .2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.3 of AIA Document A201-1997. OR 5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any,shall be as follows: (If it is intended.prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work,to reduce or limit the retainage resulting from the percentages inserted in Clauses 5.1.6.1 and 5 1 6 2 above,and this is not explained elsewhere in the Contract Documents. insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.) 40 5.1.9 Except with the Owner's prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or on equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. 5.2 FINAL PAYMENT 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when: .1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201-1997, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment;and .2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. 5.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follows: ttw AIA DOCUMENT A101 -OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCIIITIY TS 173> NI:W YORI:.AVENUE N.W..WASHINGTON.D.C.20006-5292. WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and on will ubico the %iolator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A 101-1997 User Document: TEST.DOC-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#3 ANN the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION .� 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. (Insert the date of commencement if it differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable,state that the date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.) If, prior to the commencement of the Work, the Owner requires time to file mortgages, mechanic's liens and other security interests,the Owner's time requirement shall be as follows: w� 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement. 3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than days from the date of ,. commencement,or as follows: (Insert number of calendar days.Alternatively,a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of commencement. Unless stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, insert any requirements for earlier Substantial Completion of certain portions of the Work.) �* , subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. (insert provisions, if any,for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete on time or for bonus payments for early completion of the W'ork.) etas ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be Dollars($ ),subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: (State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If decisions on other alternates are to be made by the Owner subsequent to the execution of this Agreement.attach a schedule of such other alternates showing the amount for each and the date when that amount expires) t®s 4.3 Unit prices, if any,are as follows: ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued .. by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month,the Owner shall 11111l.e pa%ment to the Contractor not later than the day of the month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect .titer the application date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Owner not later than days after the Architect receives the '*s' Application for Payment. 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. AIA DOCUMENT A101 -OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF %R(CI IITECTS. 173>NEN YORK AVENUE N.W..WASHINGTON.D.C.20006-5292. WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and o dl ,uhlect the%iolator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until t ttre date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format AIOI-1997 User Document: TEST.DOC-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#2 ,,,. Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM AIA Document A101-1997 1997 Edition -Electronic Format THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES. CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS wo COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401 AIA Document A201-1997,General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,is adopted in this document by:reference.Do not use with other general conditions on unless this document is modified. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. 40 Copyright 1915, 1918. 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987,(0 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. AGREEMENT made as of the Today day of in the year of (In words, indicate day.month and year) BETWEEN the Owner: (Name.address and other information) and the Contractor (.fame.address and other information) The Project is: (.\time and location) The Architect is: (.Fame.address and other information) 111)1 The Owner and Contractor agree as follows. on ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract(General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement; these form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if "" attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than Modifications,appears in Article 8. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in AIA DOCUMENT A101 -OWNER - CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT - 1997 EDITION - AIA - COPYRIGHT 1997 - THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.,WASHINGTON. D.C.20006-5292. WARNING:Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S.copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the:AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A 101-1997 User Document: TEST.DOC-- 12/5/2001.AIA License Number 10132:4,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. (i) When the architect has stock or any financial interest in the contractor. (j) When the contractor or any officer, director,stockholder or partner of such contract provides any of the required architectural services; or where the contractor, or any officer, director, stockholder or partner of such providing an architectural service,acts as a consultant to the project architect. (k) When there exists (or comes into being) any side deals, agreements, contracts or undertaking, thereby altering,amending, or canceling any of the required closing documents. Signature of Bidder, if the Bidder is an individual; aw By Partner, if the Bidder is a partnership; Title Officer, if the Bidder is a corporation. Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of . 20 Signature My commission expires 20 NON-COLLUSIVE/NON-IDENTITY OF INTEREST AFFIDAVIT Page 2 of 2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. w NON-COLLUSIVE/NON-IDENTITY OF INTEREST AFFIDAVIT AFFIDAVIT Bidder Name e� State of County of being first duly sworn,deposes and says: �r (1) That undersigned is (a partner or officer of the firm of, etc.,) the party making the foregoing proposal or bid; (2)that such proposal or bid is genuine and not collusive or sham;that said Bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any Bidder or person, to put in a sham bid or to refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference,with any person,to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against Safe Passage or any person interested in the proposed contract;and (3)that no identity of interest exists or will exist between Bidder and the Owner or Architect WARNING: U.S. Criminal Code, Section 1001, Title 18 U.S.C. provides as follows: Whoever, in any matter within the jurisdiction of any department or agency of the United States knowingly and willfully falsifies, conceals or covers up by any trick, scheme or device a material fact, or makes or uses any false writing or document knowing the same to contain any false, fictitious or fraudulent statement of entry, shall be fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned not more than five years, or both. w An identity of interest will be construed to exist: (a) If there is any financial interest of the Owner in the general contractor, (b) If any of the officers or directors of the Owner is also an officer, director, or stockholder of the general contractor, wo (c) If any officer or director of the Owner has any financial interest whatsoever in the general contractor, (d) If the general contractor advances any funds to the Owner, including providing a land option or any of the costs of obtaining a land option; (e) If the general contractor provides and pays, on behalf of the Owner, the cost of any architectural or engineering service other than those of a surveyor, general superintendent, or engineer employed by a general contractor in connection with his/her obligations under the construction contract; (0 If the general contractor has any interest in the Owner corporation as part of the consideration for payment; (g) When there exists (or comes into being) any side deals, agreements, contracts or undertaking entered into or contemplated, thereby altering, amending, or cancelling any financial interest whatsoever in the architectural firm; (h) When the contractor or any officer, director, stockholder, or partner of such contractor has any financial w interest whatsoever in the architectural firm; NON-COLLUSIVE/NON-IDENTITY OF INTEREST AFFIDAVIT Page I of 2 MW (Principal) (Seal) (Surety) (Seal) ..p am (Title) (Title) a� w . r AIA DOCUMENT A310- BID BOND-AIA-FEBRUARY 1970 EDITION-THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292. Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A310-1970 User Document: A310.CON-- 12/17/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 -- Page#2 on v � y Bid Bond AIA Document A310 - Electronic Format THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES: CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS w COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION. AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. w KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,that we (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Contractor) as Principal,hereinafter called the Principal,and (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety) �A a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of as Surety,hereinafter called the Surety,are held and firmly bound unto (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner) as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of Dollars (S ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS,the Principal has submitted a bid for (Here insert full name,address and description of project) ws NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof,or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, ws then this obligation shall be null and void,otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Si_ned and sealed this day of 19 y (Witness) (Witness) w AIA DOCUMENT A310- B1D BOND-AIA-FEBRUARY 1970 EDITION-THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE N.W.. WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292. Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. Electronic Format A310-1970 User Document: A310.CON -- 12/1712001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 -- Page#1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. Labor, that Bidder has, has not, filed all required compliance reports, signed by proposed subcontractors, will be obtained prior to subcontract awards. 8. The Bidder agrees that Bidder shall, if notified of Bid acceptance by mail,telegram or delivered notice, execute .. a contract in the prescribed form and furnish the required assurance of completion (i.e.,either a performance- payment bond in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price or separate performance and payment bonds each in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price,or a cash escrow in the amount of 25 percent of the contract price) at on the day and at the time specified in the Notification of Bid Acceptance, such date to be not less than 10 days subsequent to the date of notification, nor more than 60 days subsequent to bid opening unless by mutual consent between Bidder and Owner. 9. The Bidder agrees, if awarded the Contract, to commence the work within 10 calendar days after the date of execution of the construction contract w 10. In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by Pearl Realty Trust to reject any and all bids; and in the event the lowest responsible bid is too high to permit the award of a construction contract, and if a reduction in cost less than one half (1/2) percent of the low bid and less than one half (1/2) the difference .. between the low and next lowest bid would result in an acceptable award, and acceptable reductions in the work can be identified and monetized by Owner and Low-Bidder, a deductive change order reflecting such reductions may be proposed to the Low-Bidder for concurrent execution with the construction contract 11. The undersigned certifies that he/she is duly authorized to bind the Bidder to the terms and conditions of this bid proposal. WARNING: U.S. Criminal Code,Section 1001,Title IS U.S.C. provides as follows: whoever, in any matter within the jurisdiction of any department or agency of the United States knowingly and willfully falsifies, conceals or covers up by any trick, scheme or device a material fact, or makes or uses any false writing or document knowing the same to contain any false, fictitious or fraudulent statement of entry, shall be fined not more than $10,000 or imprisoned not more than five years, or both. Date 20 (Name of bidder) ,w Official address : By Title No so (SIGN ORIGINAL ONLY) ow .. No am .. FORM OF BID Page 2 of 2 am in Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz& Company Architects, Inc. 40 FORM OF BID TO: Pearl Realty Trust P.O. Box 1494 Northampton, MA 01061 am BID FOR Pearl Realty Trust Renovations and Addition go 37 Franklin Street Northampton, MA BIDDER: Name of Bidder so Address City, State and Zip ", Gentlemen: I. The undersigned being familiar with the local conditions affecting the cost of work, and with the bid package (including Invitation for Bids, Instruction to Bidders, this Bid form of Bid Security, Bid Bond, Affidavit of Non- '°�" Collusive/Non-Identity of Interest, Form of Assurance of Completion, Form of Contract, General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Special Conditions, Technical Specifications and Drawings) and Addenda thereto, as prepared by Dietz & Company Architects, Inc. and on file at the Office of Dietz& Company Architects, Inc., hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services required to construct and complete the project, as described in the Invitation for Bids (including the contents of all documents on file), all in accordance therewith for the Base Bid price of (Dollars in words) 40 For the Alternates,ADD the following amounts from the Base Bid: ALTERNATE DESCRIPTION ADD OR DOLLARS IN WORDS DOLLARS NO. DEDUCT One Plantings DECUCT $ Two Garage Power and Lighting DECOCT $ Three Plastic Laminate Countertops DEDUCT $ on Four Staff-Plumbing Fixtures DEDUCT $ Five Wood Floors ADD $ Sic G sum Board Ceilings ADD $ +o 2. This Bid includes Addenda numbers 3. Bid Guarantee in the amount of dollars ($ ) in the No form of is submitted herewith in accordance with the Project Manual. 5. Affidavit of Non-Collusive/Non-Identity of Interest as proof that the undersigned and other principals and on officers of Bidder have not entered into any collusion with any person in respect to this proposal or any other proposal or the submitting of proposals for the contract for which this proposal is submitted; and that no identity of interest exists or will exist between the Bidder, Bidder's principals or officers, and the Owner or .e Architect or their principals or officers as a result of the contract for which this proposal is submitted is attached hereto. 6. The Bidder represents that Bidder has, has not participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to !m the Equal Opportunity clause prescribed by Executive orders 10925, 1 1 114, or 11246 or the Secretary of FORM OF BID Page I of 2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14, 2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. SUPPLEMENT TO INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS W ARTICLE 2- BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 Before submitting a bid, Bidders shall make a thorough examination of the conditions at the site, checking No the requirements of the Plans and Specifications with the existing conditions. The Owner should be contacted, one week in advance,when Bidders wish to examine building interiors. ARTICLE 3 - INTERPRETATIONS OR CORRECTIONS OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS w. 3.2.1 Interpretation, correction, or change in the Contract Documents will be made by Addendum which will become part of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not be held accountable for any oral *„ instructions. 3.2.3 Addenda will be mailed by the Architect to the General Contractor for distribution to all sub-contractors. 4' ARTICLE 4- BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.2 Bid Security - Note that bid security is not required. on 4.4.1 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid: Bids shall not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by any Bidders for a period of one hundred eighty (180) calendar days following the time and date designated for the receipt No of Bids. ARTICLE 5 - CONSIDERATION OF BIDS no 5.1 Opening of Bids - Note that the bids shall be opened privately and the results will be released at the sole discretion of the Owner. w 5.3 Acceptance of Bid (Award) - The Owner reserves the exclusive right to award a contract based on factors other than low price alone. ON ARTICLE 6— POST-BID INFORMATION 6.1 Certification: Bidder shall submit with its Bid the Affidavit of Non-Collusive/Non-Identity of Interest an Within five days of the notification of Bid acceptance, the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner a schedule of values allocated to the various portions of the Work, such breakdown to satisfy the General Conditions requirement in subparagraph 9.2.1 pertaining to schedule of values. go ARTICLE 7 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 7.1 Bond Requirements - A Performance and Payment Bond for 100% of the total construction amount shall go be required. The Owner reserves the right to request Lien Waivers at each Application for Payment ARTICLE 8— FORM OF AGREEMENT 8.1 Form to be used:The Agreement of the Work will be written on AIA Form. ARTICLE 9 -ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS 9.1 Sales taxes are applicable to work on this Project END OF SECTION SUPPLEMENT TO INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page I 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity,the Bidder may,at the Bidder's option,(1)withdraw the Bid or(2)submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification,bid security will not be forfeited. 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. a ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents,the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. ww 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. a.. 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources,changes in cost will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent,the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Subparagraph 7.2.1. 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. no 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. am ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA Document A101, **� Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum. AVENUE N.W'.. WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the viiolatorto legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted •w below. Electronic Format A701-1997 User Document: 97A70LCON-- 12/13/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#6 we the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder. Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received, and date- and time-stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 4.4.4 Bid security, if required,shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. 10 ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS „tt 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS At the discretion of the Owner, if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids received on time will be publicly opened and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids may be made available to Bidders. 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents,or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to rejection. 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest quailed Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in Am accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the fiends available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's own best interests. on 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 6.1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request,a properly executed AIA Document A305, Contractor's Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements we have been made to fullfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. 6.3 SUBMITTALS +wa 6.3.1 The Bidder shall. as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, after notification of selection for the ak%ard of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing: JIM 1 a desi-nation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the manufacturers, products, and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work; and r .3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work. AVENUE NAk . WASHINGTON D.0 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the viiolatorto legal 110 prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced wiithout violation until the date of expiration as noted belo%N. Electronic Format A701-1997 User Document: 97A70LCON-- 12/13/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#5 to 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium. 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy,the amount written in words shall govern. 4.1.4 Interlineations,alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required,enter"No Change." 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested,the Bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal form of the Bidder. The Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract.A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. 4.2 BID SECURITY 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required if so stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders. The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Paragraph 6.2. 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required, it shall be written on AIA Document A310, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents, and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either(a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn or(c)all Bids have been rejected. 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security, if any, and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable,the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. .w 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic,telegraphic, facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will not be considered. �. 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids,and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid. 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to AVENUE N.W. WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the viiolatorto legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted belo%N. Electronic Format A701-1997 User Document: 97A70LCON -- 12/13/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page 44 ow 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid,or in supplementary instructions to bidders. 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. "a 3.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work.No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding Documents. go 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions,and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding;Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely e upon them. 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension,appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the we Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings,performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials,equipment or other wo portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract Documents. 3.4 ADDENDA no 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS tw 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents. 1991 - 1 AVENUE N W.. WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the viiolatorto legal �w prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted beloµ Electronic Format A701-1997 User Document: 97A70 LCON-- 12/13/2001. AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 -- Page#3 on ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid form, and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract(General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract. 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,AIA Document A201, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions,deletions,clarifications or corrections. 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein,submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. ..e 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base,to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. w. 1.6 An Alternate Bid(or Alternate)is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work,as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials,equipment or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that: "'■ 2.1.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, and for other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction. 2.1.2 The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents. 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials,equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1 COPIES 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or In, itauon to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's deposit will be refunded. , AVENUE N'A . NASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the viiolatorto legal prosecution Phis document Has electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted ww belo%% Electronic Format A701-1997 User Document: 97A70LCON-- 12/13/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 -- Page#2 Instructions to Bidders AIA Document A701 - 1997 1997 Edition -Electronic Format This document has important legal consequences.Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.AUTHENTICATION ss OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. Copyright 1970. 1974, 1978, 1987,© 1997 by The American Institute of Architects.Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. �w w TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. DEFINITIONS 2. BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3. BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4. BIDDING PROCEDURES CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6. POST-BID INFORMATION t� 7. PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND t� 8. FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR s� AVENUE N.".. WASHINGTON D.C. 20006-5292. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the viiolatorto legal prosecution. I hi;document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced without violation until the date of expiration as noted belo«. Electronic Format A701-1997 User Document: 97A701.CON-- 12/13/2001.AIA License Number 101324,which expires on 12/29/2001 --Page#1 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. we w DRAWINGS G-00I.............COVER SHEET................................................................................................................................................ I ........................SURVEY..................................................................................................................,..........................................I noL-110..............SITE PLAN.................................................... .........................................I AD-101 .........BASEMENT DEMOLITION PLAN............................................................................................................I AD-I 10.........FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN.........................................................................I N AB-101 ..........BASEMENT PLAN..........................................................................................................................................I A-I 10.............FIRST FLOOR PLAN..................................................................................................................................... I A-120.............SECOND FLOOR PLAN............................................................................................................................. I AR-130..........ROOF PLAN ...................................I ................................................................................................................ A-201.............EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS............................................................................................................................ I A-202.............EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS............................................................................................................................ I A-203.............ADDITION ELEVATIONS........................................................................................................................... I A-204.............ADDITION ELEVATIONS........................................................................................................................... I ew A-205.............INTERIOR ELEVATIONS............................................................................................................................. I A-401.............WALL SECTIONS AND MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS......................................................................... I A-501.............PORCH / DECK ELEVATION AND SECTION..................................................................................... I ! A-502.............DECK CONSTRUCTION............................................................................................................................ I FP-I................FIRE PROTECTION SCOPE, NOTES AND BASEMENT PLAN.......................................................I FP-2................FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR FIRE PROTECTION PLANS............................................................I P-I..................PLUMBING SCOPE, NOTES AND BASEMENT PLAN.......................................................................I P-2..................FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING PLANS............................................................................I H-I.................HEATING AND VENTILATION SCOPE, NOTES AND BASEMENT PLAN................................I H-2.................FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR HEATING AND VENTILATION PLANS......................................I usr H-3.................ATTIC PLUMBING, HEATING AND ELECTRICAL PLAN...............................................................I E-I ..................ELECTRICAL SCOPE, NOTES AND BASEMENT PLAN....................................................................I E-I ..................FIRST AND SECOND FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLAN...........................................................................I END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS +s.0 rwr TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz&Company Architects, Inc. 07460.............VINYL SIDING............................................................................................................»...........................3 07920.............JOINT SEALANTS.........................................................................................................................................6 ®„ DIVISION 8- DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110.............STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES................................................._......._................._..4 08215.............STILE AND RAIL DOORS........................................................................................................................ 08396.............ALUMINUM STORM AND SCREEN DOORS......_..............................................................................5 08520.............VINYL WINDOWS....................................................................................................................._................5 08711.............DOOR HARDWARE .............................................................................................................................. _..6 DIVISION 9- FINISHES 09260.............GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES.................................................................................................................5 09640.............WOOD FLOORING.................................................................................................................._................4 09650.............RESILIENT FLOORING................................................................................................................................ 7 09900.............PAINTING.......................................................................................................................................................9 DIVISION 10 -SPECIALTIES 10801.............TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES.......................................................................................................5 DIVISION I I - EQUIPMENT 11451.............APPLIANCES...................................................................................................................................................7 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12356.............KITCHEN AND BATHROOM CASEWORK........................................................................................7 DIVISION 13 -SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13851.............FIRE ALARM....................................................................................................................................................2 13930.............WET-PIPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS...................................................................................... 3 DIVISION 14 -CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14420.............PLATFORM AND STAIR LIFTS.................................................................................................................4 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15010.............BASIC MECHANICAL METHODS...........................................................................................................6 15080.............MECHANICAL INSULATION....................................................................................................................2 15110.............VALVES.............................................................................................................................................................1 15140.............DOMESTIC WATER PIPING......................................................................................................................2 15150.............SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING...............................................................................................I 15194.............FUEL GAS PIPING.........................................................................................................................................2 15410.............PLUMBING FIXTURES.................................................................................................................................2 15430.............PLUMBING SPECIALTIES............................................................................................................................2 15480.............DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS................................................................................................................. 2 15810.............DUCTS AND ACCESSORIES.....................................................................................................................2 15838.............POWER VENTILATORS..............................................................................................................................I 15855.............DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,AND GRILLES.................................................................................................I DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010.............BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS....................................................................................................5 16140.............WIRING DEVICES.........................................................................................................................................2 16410.............ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS..........................................................................1 16442.............PAN ELBOARDS.............................................................................................................................................2 16500.............LIGHTING.......................................................................................................................................................2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 Pearl Realty Trust December 14,2001 Dietz.&Company Architects, Inc. TABLE OF CONTENTS ivision.........Section Title.........................................................................................................................................:............Page no DIVISION 0—BIDDING &CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 00001.............TITLE PAGE......................................................................................................................................................1 00002.............TABLE OF CONTENTS................................................................................................................................3 BID.................INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS(AIA DOCUMENT A701-1997).....................................................6 BID.................SUPPLEMENT TO AIA DOCUMENT A701............................................................................................I BID.................FORM OF BID.................................................................................................................................................2 BID.................BID BOND (AIA DOCUMENT A310)....................................................................................................2 BID.................NON-COLLUSIVE/NON-IDENTITY OF INTEREST AFFIDAVIT....................................................2 CON..............OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT (AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997)...................................5 CON..............GENERAL CONDITIONS(AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997)..............................................................40 00800.............SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS......................................................................................5 DIVISION I -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 100.............SUMMARY.......................................................................................................................................................2 01 101.............SCOPE OF WORK........................................................................................................................................3 01230.............ALTERNATES.................................................................................................................................................2 01250.............CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES...................................................................................2 01290.............PAYMENT PROCEDURES..........................................................................................................................4 01310.............PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION.........................................................................3 01320.............CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION.........................................................................3 01330.............SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES........................................................................................................................5 OR 01400.............QUALITY REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................................5 01420.............REFERENCES....................................................................................................................................................2 01500.............TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS........................................................................................5 01600.............PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................................................................2 01700.............EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................................4 01731.............CUTTING AND PATCHING.....................................................................................................................3 01732.............SELECTIVE DEMOLITION..........................................................................................................................5 01770.............CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES.......................................................................................................................5 DIVISION 2-SITE CONSTRUCTION 02300.............EARTHWORK................................................................................................................................................9 02511.............HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING...................................................................................................................5 DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE 03300.............CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE...................................................................................................................7 DIVISION 4 -MASONRY 04800.............BRICK MASONRY.........................................................................................................................................2 04900.............MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING .............2 ....................................................................... DIVISION 5—METALS 05500.............METAL FABRICATIONS..............................................................................................................................2 DIVISION 6 -WOOD AND PLASTICS 06105.............MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY...............................................................................................................8 wwr DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210.............BUILDING INSULATION............................................................................................................................5 07310.............SHINGLES........................................................................................................................................................2 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page I PROJECT MANUAL PEARL REALY TRUS,r 37 FRANKLIN STREET NORTHAMPTON,MASSACHUSETTS Architect Dietz& Company Architects,Inc. 17 Hampden Street Springfield, MA 01 103 "" Telephone(413) 733-6798 FAX (413) 732-4385 Architect's Project#20122 DATE: December 14,2001 02/04/02 10:11 FAX 413 73Z 4355 cause she alarm in all rrgWrEd smoke detectors in the dwelling unit to sound. 3603.16.9 Alarm Slgoyjng All required alarm-sounding appliances shall have a min.rating of 85 dBA at 10 feet in _IDLknft accordance with she retluirements of NFPA 72. 3603 16 10 Required Smoke Smoke detectors shag be installed in the following locations. QW&&19r Hsat II L In the immediate vicinity of bedrooms 2. In all bedrooms; 3. In each story of a dwelling unit,including basements and cellars.but not including crawl spaces and uninhabitable attics: 4. In residential units of 1200 square feet or more,automatic fire detectors,in the forth of smoke detectors shall be provided for each 1200 square feet of area or part thereof, S, Fixed temperature heat detectors shall be installed In accordance with the requirements of 780 CMR 3603.16.4. Exceptions: In buildings equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system. smoke detectors are not rewired in bedrooms. Code Review for 37 Franklin Street 5 02/04/02 10:11 FAX 413 732 4385 VILIL Cc uU. Anxn. the full length of the stairs. Ends shall be returned or shall terminate in newel posts or safety terminals. Handrails adjacent to a wall shall have a space of not less than I A inches between the wall and the handrails. 3603.14.1.2 Handrail Grlo Sze Stairway handrails,shall i�ivea ciWuiar cross section with an outside diameter Of at (out I X inches and not greater dw 2 inches. 16-03.1 J2 Guardrails 360314.2,1 Guardrail Details Porches,balconies.docks or raised floor surfaces located more than 30 inches above the floor or grade below shall have guardrails not less than 36 inches in height Open sides of stairs with a total rise of more than 30 inches above the floor or grade below shall have guardrails,which may also serve as handrails,not less than 34 inches in height measured Yer-tiq)!y_from the nosing of the treads. 360114.2-2 QjMWW Opening Required guardrails on open sides of stairways,balconies,prches,decks and raised Limitations floor areas,shall have intermediate rails.balusters or ornamental closures which prevent the passage of an object S inches or more in diameter. Exception: Triangular spaces formed by the riser,tread and bottom rail or a guard at the open side of a stairway may be of sized to prevent the passage of a sphere 6 inches in diameter. 3.6C)3..-I-- �om All egress ramps shall have a max slope of one unit vertical in eight units horizontal (12.5%slope)- Exception 1: The max.slope of ramps for persons with disabilites shall be one unit vertical in 12 units-horizo tal- 3603.1 S.2 Guar_drai T-1sw-j Guardrails shall be provided on both sides of all ramps and shall be contructed in Handrads -accordance with 780 CMR 3603-14.2. Handralls conform4n to 780 CMR 3603.14.1 shall be provided on at least one side of all ramps exceeding a slope of one unit vertical in 11 units horizontal f8%slope). Exception 1: For persons with disabilltes,handrails shall be provided on both sides of the ramp vt!n the vertical rise.between 1;!Iddinis-exceeds 6 inches. 3603.1 S.3 Landl A min.}foot by 3 foot level latnding shall be provided at the top and bottom of ramps where doors open onto the ramp and where the ramp changes direction. Exception 1: Ramps required for persons with disabihtes shall not have a vertical rise greater than 30 Inches between!a.nAin 3603.16 Fire protection Systems 3603.16.1 General All one and two family dwellings hereafter constructed shall be equipped with a household fire warning system.In accorance with the provisions of 780 CMR 3603.16. All devices shall be installed and maintained in accordance with the requirements of 780 CMR 3603.16,manufacturers instructions and listing criteria and otherwise shall be installed and maintained in accordance with Chapter 2 of NFPA 72 and 527 CMR 12.00 as listed in Appendix A. 3fiO3.16.2 CogjLa;gbjI!Sr. 3663.16.31'Smoke Detevyrs All detached one-and two family buildings shall contain listed single and multiple station smoke detectors or other household fire waming systems in compliance with ANSIIUL 217 and.or ANSMUL 20 and conforming to M CMR_3603.16. 3603,16-4 He"Detectors jrj�e�td)_ 3603,16.5 PrimaM Electrical Power for Single Station and Mul " anon Smoke Detectorx 3603.16.6 Primary Electrical Power for Other Housebgld ------j603.16.7 SecoodM Bactric,a- Power -- 3603.1 .8 Required Alarm Where more than one smoke or heat detector is required by 780 CMR 3603.16-10, bl9tification Aoaliances all required detectors shall be installed so that the activation of any#etector shall Code Review for 31 Franklin Street 4 02/04%02 10:10 FAX 413 73Z 4JU3 423 9.3 Other Tests Other tests are not necessary and shall not be required by the building official. It shall be the resporsibility of the residence manager of the group residence to provide immediate suitable accommodations elsewhere for any occupant deemed unacceptable by the building of lclal. Each occupant must be certified at regular intervals but not less than every quarter at the group residence by the licensing or operating agency. The building official my require an inspection at his disc_reckm when he feels that either the building or the occ antmaygotronforrm _ 423_10 Certificate of Any certificate of occupancy Issued for a building intended to be used as a group residence,as Otcuoaacy _defined in 7$0 CMR 4231,shall become invalid if the premises have not been licensed or authorized by an agency of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts within 90 days of the date of issuance of the certificate of Chapter 36,One and Two---- •� ._.._........._— ..._....._._. ..�.� _ 3603.1 Structural Design Criteria dive Loads: Decks 60 psf Roof Snow Load-Zone 3: 3S psf basic snow load 3603_._7 Ro_om_D �nsQ 3603.7.1 Floor Area Habitable rooms,except kitchens,shall have an area of not less than 70 square feet. Every kitchen shall have not less than 50 square feet. Habitable rooms,except kitchens shalt not fie less than seven feet in any horizontal direction. 3603-5 Ceiling MeiehtY...�— ----°w__ _._....—.__-- ._._.. ReguireWnu 3603.8.1 Minimum Ceiling Habitable rooms,except kitchens,shall have a ceiling height of not less than seven feet three inches for at least 509'.of their required areas. Exception; All other rooms,including ketchens,bathrooms and hallways shall have a mtnumum ceiling height ofsevm feet measured to the-lowest projection from the 3603.10 Means of Gress_ _ See also 423.6 3b03.10.4 Emergency ESM Each sleeping room shall have a t least one operable window,with a sill height of 44 From Sleeping Rooms inches maximum above the floor,and a minimum net clear-opening of 3.3 square fees The mir„mum net clear opening shall be 20 inches by 24 inches in either direction. ------....,....__.�.._._.—._ _......._--- .______.............-__-- 3603.1 i Doors and Hallways 3603.!1.1 Exit Doors At least one of the exit doors shall be 36 inches minunwm width and six feet eight inches minimun height. Ali other exit doors shall,be 32 inches minimum width and six feet eight inches minimun height Exception: Existing buildings-new and replacement doors are permitted to be six _ feet six Inches 3603.11.2 Interlxtr Doors Minimum width of 30 inches and min height of six feet six inches. Exception: Existing buildings-bathroom doors are permitted to be 24 inches in widtha.. 3603.13_5taLr __� 3603-13.1 Width Stairways shall not be less than 36 inches in clear width at all points above the permitted handrail height and below the required headroom height. The min.width at and below the handrail height shall not be less than 32 inches where a handrail is installed on one side and 28 inches where handralls art Provided on both sides. _3_603.131 Treads and Risers Max.riser height shall be 8% Inches and the min.tread depth shall be 9 Inches 3603.13.2..1 NOSinYS -Nosings shall not project more than I A inches beyond the face of the riser below. �~ 3603.13.3 Headroom Min.headroom in all parrs of the stairway shall not be less than 6 feet 6 inches measured vertically from the sloped plane adjoining the tread nosing or from the floor surface of the landing or platform. 6.03.14 Hand5uardrails 3603.14.1 Handrails Handrails having min,and max heights of 30 Inches and 38 inches,respectively, measured vertically from the nosing of the treads,shall be provided on at least one ___.—_.—._�.........� side of stairways of three or more risers. All required handrails shall be continuous Code Review for 37 rranklin Street 3 02/04/02 10:10 FAX 413 73Z 4353 ........... 423.2,1 Special Self preservation: Having the capability,both mentally and physically,to take action to — Defmiae s preserve one's own life. Specifically,toegress the building within 2 Y: minutes. (Reference insnctiqn Lpro�edures in 780 CMR 423.8 and 423.9) 423.3 h is ft Stfildings The requirements of 780 CMR 423A shall also apply to existrig dwelling units which are to be converted to a group residence and alternative requirements set forth in 780 CMR 34 that conflict with the reauirements of 780 CMR 423,0 shall nos apply. Existing buildings,of Type 513 constructi(m,greater than 2 Vz stories,or 35 feet in height may be allowed to.be used (w an exception to Table 503)as agroup residence- -ftns and leans—shall be filed with the building official having jurisdiction in accordance with 0 CMR 110.0 5MIficatiy= for any building to be constructed a&or altered for use as,a group residence under 780 CMR 423.0. The floor plans shall show all rooms,spares,closets.doors,corridors,windows,stairs and stairways,hazardous vertical openings and the location of all required fire warning equipment and proposed fire suppression equipment Finishes Only Class I and Class It interior finish materials shall be allowed in the principal means of egress. In refinishing any other am material having a Class III flame spread rating shall be allowed provided'it does not decEease_tq_existing 423.6 Egress In existing buildings there shall be one means of egress and one escape route serving each floor, remote as possible from each other and leading to grade. The stairway between the first and second floors,if unenclosed,may remain unenclosed to preserve functional and aesthetic requirements. Exception: 1. Where the Group Residence is protected with a fire suppression system according to NFPA 13D or better as listed in Appendix A only one means of egress shall be required from-floors above the grade floor in existing buildings. 2. Where the Group Residence is protected with a fire suppression system according to NFPA 13D as listed In Appendix oi�temer-�the*mt red. 423.7.2 Automatic Flre An approved automatic fire warning system shall be provided in accordance with 780 CMR 7. WarnI%j)g.= 4,23.8 InsRections There shall be three mandatory types of inspections as described below. The results of such inspections shall be on file in the dike of the building official with copies-sent to the licensing or n agency on a prepared checklist and signed by the authorized inspectors operating_tr 423.8.2 Final Certificate Before issuance-of the final-certificate of occupancy.-the authorized inspectors shall mutually conduct a test(see 780 CMR 423-9.1)to ensure that the occupants are capable of self- -preservation. Upon complete satiskMon of-all reqwrements,the building-official shall then issue a permanent certificate of occupancy. This test shall be conducted once a year in accordance with 780 CMR 1063 for-purposes of.Tc!tq, Ln&bs�th the building and the occupariv. 423.9 Inspectim The building and the occupants'capability of self-preservation constitute a system of life safety Procedures which are unique for each bugdtnl and for each occupant in a group residence. Therefore,a simple direct cost is specified herein to determine the capability of the occupant and/or the suitability of the buildinjt as a life safety system. � �'Tqfffflre A fire drill shall be conducted as the direct test required by 780 CMR 423.9. The building official Drill may require that he be present for the fire drill,or may accept an affidavit signed by the residence manager citing the names of the authorized inspectors present the names of the occupants who participated,the names(s)of any occupants who failed to egress the building within 2 Y2 minutes,the date,time and place where said fire drill was held. During the conduct of the drill,all staff personnel of the group residence shall isolate themselves from the occupants. The authorized inspector(s),when present,shall then cause to be blocked any one point in an egress route where the choice of an alternate route is possible.to simulate a hazardous condition,and the internal alarm system shall be activated for 2 Y2 minutes. 4219TGaiii Any occupant who falls to escape from the building and achieve egress outside the building at ground level within the 2 Ya minute period shall not be permitted to remain living in the residence. Note. The occupant or the building may be at fault;therefore,the system has failed to perform adequately to provide life safety and is,consequently,unacceptable for that occupant. Code Review for 37 Franklin Street 2 -- 02/04/02 10:10 FAX 413 73Z 4350 DMIL Code Review for 37 Franklin Street Northampton.Massachusetts July 12,2001 Rev January 30,2002 v:\20122-pearl realty trust\sd-cd\rasreq\code revw.doc Proiea#20122 Location: 37 Franklin Street Northampton,Massachusetts Code: Commonwealth of Massachusetts State Building Code (Sixth Edition) Principle Use (Section 300) Use Group: RA (Residential) Refer to Chapter 36 One and Two Family Dwelling Code Type of Construction: SA Height and Area Limitations of Building(Table 503): Required: 3 st.40'; 10.200/Actual: 2 sc X40';<2,400 Chapter 3,Use and -_--°°.._---.--._._-__-.._ -Occupmsy 310.0 Resld jai Use 310.7 Use rou9R-4 This use group shall include all detached=e-or two family dwellings not more than three . T Structures stories in height,and the accessory structures. All such structures shall be designed In accordance with 780 CMR 36 or in accordance-with the requirements of 780 CMR applicable to Use Group R-3. . _.__..._....._._..._-_- Chapter 34,Repair, _ Alteration,Addition, and Change of Use of Ex{sting Buildings 3400.3.1 Buildings 1*jch The provisions of 780 CMR 34 shall apply to existing buildings which have been legally occupied �valih ardor used for a.period of at least five-years... Exceptions: (2) Existing buildings or portions thereof,which are changed in use from any use to a Group Residence—shall not qualify as existing btiildinps for she purposes of 780 CMR 34,but shall�p�with the provlslons of 780 CMR 4:as alicable. Chapter 4,Special --- -�•- - Use and Occupant. _._......_•--- 423._0 Grou _ 423.2 Definition A group residence is a premises licensed by or operated by an agency of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts or subdivision thereof,as a special residence for those who are capable of self- preservation in the following categories: I. not more than 12 unrelated persons between the ages of seven and 15 years of age inclusive;or 2_ not more than 25 unrelated persons, 16 years of age or over;or 3. a combination of 780 CMR 423.2 category I and 2 above consisting of not more than 18 unrelated persons over seven years of age calculated at the rate of two such persons.or portion thereof,from Category 2 being equal to one such person in Category I ail in accordance with Table 423.2. Note: in-determining the-dassificatlon for proposed-use,group residence shall not be construed as being similar in any way to a multi-family dwelling„two-family dwelling,boarding house,lodging Muse,dormitory.hotel,school or msmition-of'-any kind. -For building code purposes,it shall be treated as a single-famih±residential buiidin Code Review for 37 Franklin Street I 02/04/02 10:09 FAX 413 732 4385 )ILIL & w. anon. ��- 02/01/2002 13:07 413-549-5593 JOANNE FAITH SMITH PAGE 02 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM NARRATIVE FOR, 37 FRANKLIN ST., NORTHAMPTON, MA. uSE GROUP- R-4 TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION, SA HEIGHT AND AREAL ALLOWED, 3 STORY, 40' HIGH, 10,200 SOFT. ACTUAL, 3 STORY, UNDER 40' HIGH, UNDER 2,400 SOFT. THE STATE BUILDING CODE, SECTION 4232 SPECIFICALLY STATES THAT -A GROUP -RESIDENCE, FOR BUILDING CODE PURPOSES, SHALL BE TREATED AS A SING E-FAMILY RESIDENCI (SEE ATTACHED CODE REVIEW FOR DETAILS). THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS PROVIDED HERE INCLUDE MULTIPLt STATION SMOKE DETECTORS AS REQUIRED BY CHAPTER 9 AND CHAPTER x FOR SINGLE-FAMILY DWELLINGS. THEY ALSO INCLUDE NUMBEROUS NON-REQUIRED COMPONENTS, DESIRED BY THE: OWNER TO PROVIDE AN ADDITIONAL LEVEL OF SAFETY FOR OCCUPANTS. THESE INCLUDE, - A SPRINKLER SYSTEM - DOUBLE-ACTION PULL STATIONS - HORN AND STROBE DEVICES, INCLUDING AN EXT. BEACON, - A CENTRAL FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL THE AUTOMATIC, WET-TYPE, HYDRAULICALLY CALCULATED SPRINKLER SYSTEM IS DESIGNED PER NFPA 13D REQUIREMENTS. PIPE SIZING (TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR) WILL BE BASED ON THE DEMAND OF THE 2 'HYDRAULICALLY FURTHEST' SPRINKLERS. THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM WILL HAVE 1 44AIN CONT4aX VALVE WITH A TAMPER SWITCH AND VATER-FLOW ALARM, ALL SPRINKLERS WILL BE RESIDENTIAL TYPE, K-FACTOR AS REQUIRED, SPACING WILL. VARY WITH LISTING (I.E. EXTENDED COVERAGE OR STANDARD COVERAGE). THE SPRINKLED'SYSTEM WILL BE FED OFC OF ONE, NEW COMBINED, SPRINKLER / DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE. A TESTABLE, DOUBLE-CHECK-TYPE BACKFLOW PREVENTOR WILL BE INSTALLED ON THE SPRINKLER LINE IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE DOMESTIC WATER TAKE-OFF. NO FIRE DEPT. CONNECTION, OUTSIDE HYDRANTS. OR REMOTL PI)! ARE REQUIRED. THE AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PANEL WILL MONITOR SPRINKLER ALARM, SPRINKLER TAMPER, MANUAL PULL STATIONS, AND 1 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTOR LDCATED AT THE FIRS ALARM -PANEL. THE CONTROL PANEL VILL COMMUNICATE ALL SYSTEM ALARMS AND SPRINKLER TROUBLE SIGNALS DIRECTLY TO THE N.F.D VIA DIGITAL DIALER. ALL OTHER TROUBLES WILL TRIGGER A LOCAL ALARM ONLY (LIGHT IN OFFICE), OCCUPANT NOTIFICATION DEVICES WILL CONSIST OF NON-CODED HORNS AND STROBES DESIGNED TD PROVIDE A MINIMUM SPL OF 70 dBA IN ALL AREAS. MULTIPLE STATION, PHOTO-ELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTORS WILL BE INSTALLED 13N -EACH FLOOR AND THE VICINITY OF EACH BEDROOM. BECAUSE THE BUILDING IS SPRINKLERED THROUGHOUT, SMOKE DETECTORS ARE NOT REQUIRED WITHIN THE BEDROOMS. IN THE EVENT THAT ANY MULTIPLE STATION SMOKE DETECTOR IS ACTIVATED, ALL MULTIPLE-STATION DETECTORS WILL SOUND THEIR BUILT-IN ALARM, IN THE EVENT OF WATER FLOW THROUGH THE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, THE SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTOR ACTIVATING, DR ANY MANUAL PULL STATION BEING ACTIVATED, ALL HORN-STROBE DEVICES WITHIN AND OUTSIDE THE BUILDING WILL ACTIVATE. SYSTEM ALARMS WILL SOUND CONTINUOUSLY UNTIL TURNED OFF BY THE N.F.D, TESTING CRITERIA TO BE USED FOR FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE ARE T+tE CRITERIA OF NFPA 13D (SPRINKLER) AND NFPA 72 (FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM). 02/04/02 10:09 FAX 413732 4385 DIETZ & CO. ARCH. WjUU.1 DIETZ&COMPANY ARCHITECTS.INC, TRANSMITTAL TO: Mr.Anthony L.Patillo.C80 -DATE: February 4,2002 Building Commissioner Zoning Enforcement Officer City of Northampton -242 Main Street-Room 100 Northampton,MA 01060-3189 CC. RE. Pearl Reeky Trust Northampton.Massachusetts File Project No.20122 FED FROM: Kristen K.Lawler ❑ ATTACHED.via 0 FAXED,number of pages not Including this page;6 COPIES DATE CSI No. DESCRIPTION 1 02101/02 Fire Protection Narrative 1 01/30102 Code Review 17 Hampden Street Springfield.MA 01103 telepimm (4)3)733-6798 facilmlle (413)732-4385 %-mull REMARKS offireathetwTh-com Tony- For your review. 112rd copy to follow. Thank you Kristen shop drawings logged by: Wshdatz\20122-pearl realty ciatlsd-cdlregreq1rMO402-trn.dot DIETZ Architects i i i i i i i i PEARL REALTY TRUST 37 FRANKLIN STREET NORTHAMPTON, MA i PROJECT MANUAL OWNER PEARL REALTY TRUST P.O. BOX 1494 D AR NORTHAMPTON, MA 01061 �^ L. o�rFO ARCHITECT rA DIETZ & COMPANY ARCHITECTS, INC. s2sa N 17 HAMPDEN STREET ° gpri vingfietd, & SPRINGFIELD, MA 01103 r MECHANICALJELECTRICAL ENGINEER SENSIBLE SOLUTIONS 64 KNIGHTLY ROAD HA,DLEY, MA 01035 =' LILY K. 'y BARAK a MECHA,al9CA!_ -+ No.N0743 t� December 14, 2001